SWIFT GROUP Dunswell Road Cottingham East Yorkshire HU16 4JX Tel 01482 875740 Fax 01482 840082 email [email protected] For more information visit www.swiftgroup.co.uk Issued July 2016 FIND OUT MORE SWIFTGROUP.CO.UK BROCHURE DOWNLOADS FIND A DEALER FACEBOOK AND SWIFT-TALK.CO.UK PRODUCT VIDEOS SWIFTTV.CO.UK 1420403 MOTORHOME OWNER’S SERVICE AND WARRANTY HANDBOOK New! ten Haaft - A GERMAN COMPANY WITH 25 YEARS OF TRADITION • Oyster® Premium - the „classic“ in combination with the new „Oyster® TV“ - devices • Perfect networking - both systems are controlled with only one System Remote Control* • Everything from a single source! • 3 years warranty „Oyster® TV“ *System Remote Control only available for Premiumrange ® www.oystersat-tech.co.uk Sat-Tech Ltd. A ten Haaft Company Oyster Sat-Tech Ltd. . Unit 5, Hemploe Business Park Hemploe Road, Welford Northants, NN6 6HF Tel.: 0044 1858 575 928 . Fax: 0044 1858 575 028 [email protected] POWER YOUR GETAWAY Start your adventure with Yuasa When it comes to batteries, Yuasa are number one for high quality, reliability and performance. Designed for caravans and motorhomes, our maintenance free leisure range provide a long service life and also incorporate enhanced safety features. So the next time you’re ready to getaway, you can rely on Yuasa to give you the freedom. Find your nearest stockist at: www.yuasaeurope.com The world’s leading battery manufacturer PREMIUM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR MOTORHOME The AL-KO premium motorhome accessories provide a complementary range of products designed to suit the AMC Chassis and your Swift Motorhome. The range now includes Cycle and Scooter Carriers, tow bars and steady legs, all designed to offer you more flexibility and enhanced comfort when using your motorhome. For more information and to see the complete range of products, visit our website or email us at [email protected] Scan with your smart phone to visit our website [email protected] | www.al-ko.co.uk Dometic compact roof air conditioners FreshJet 2200 awarded Best Buy • Most compact rooftop air conditioner • Lightest • Quietest • Lowest starting current • Lowest power consumption FreshJet 2200 NOW Available in 4 performance levels *In an air conditioning comparison test by Reise Mobil International Magazine Dometic FreshJet 1100, 1700 & 2200 • 3 performance levels for vehicles up to 5 m, 6 m or 7 m in length • Very low starting currents - FreshJet 2200 with Soft Start • Air diffuser with two adjustable air flows • LED lighting, remote control Dometic FreshJet 3200 Ideal for vehicles of over 8 m For a full range of rooftop or underbench air conditioners please visit: www.dometic.co.uk/air-conditioners Thule Excellent Standard Thule Excellent Short Thule Excellent 100% innovation. Pure design e 2 bike • 2 bikes • Max. bike weight: 30kg • Weight: 10.6kg • Perfect for e-bikes • Max. loading weight: 50kg Contact us: [email protected] Bring your life thule.com TRUMA AVENTA AIR CONDITIONING THE PERFECT ADDITION TO YOUR MOTORHOME For Ultimate Comfort Fit This Roof-Mounted System Aventa Comfort Model * * * Reverse cycle heating Exceptional cooling performance of 2400W Extremely light at 33kg Aventa Eco Model * * * Powerful cooling at 1700W Low power consumption of 2.8A Lightest in its class at 28kg Catch up with us on Facebook and Twitter STEP INTOCONNECT DIRECT WHAT IS CONNECT DIRECT? Connect Direct is an online system which personalises each customers experience of owning their motorhome. The system is now available across the entire range. HOW DOES IT WORK? Once you have logged on and created your profile, you will be able to access a whole host of information, specific to your motorhome. In addition you will be able to have a direct line into the retail team, with the launch of a live chat facility. Should a problem occur, you will be able to report a fault to us directly, enabling us to react quickly and work together with your dealer to take the problem away from you the owner and resolve the issue as quickly as possible. Product upgrades and notifications will be sent via Connect Direct keeping you up to date over the coming years. This online system provides a direct route for you into the Swift Group, and enables us to provide you with proactive Customer Service support, enhancing your experience. Connect Direct is in addition to the traditional methods of contacting us. The key benefits of Connect Direct are: •Access to information 24/7 • Ability to report faults directly to us •Product upgrades and notifications •Live chat direct into our experienced retail team • Upload service history records • Service history reminders STEP INTOMORE CONTROL At the Swift Group we’re continually looking for ways to enhance your enjoyment of the outdoors. Swift Command is a real innovation designed to make your touring experience even more carefree. Swift Command technology includes a smart LCD control panel that has enhanced control panel functions. There is also an exciting, free downloadable ‘app’ that links to the Swift Command unit, so you can be in control from the comfort and convenience of your mobile device. Swift Command is now available across the entire range. NOW FEATURING THATCHAM CATEGORY 6 APPROVED PRO-ACTIVE TRACKER C 0% LIGHTING POWER Track your energy use and mange your batteries for efficient use of your all important power services. M 0% Y 0 White Sargent Purpl C M Y 71% 81% 0 Sargent Blue C M Y 67% 0% 1 ‘Command Tracker’ Typefac StainlessExt - Bold AaBbCc SUBSCRIBE FOR ONLY £95 PER ANNUM LOCATION AND REMOTE FEATURES Create just the right ambience onboard with easily adjustable lighting settings. C M Y 99% 96% 9 Pantone® 275 Head to the Apple or Android store and search for ‘Swift Command’. Connect to your leisure vehicle from any where to view its systems information and location. Conveniently control and monitor your onboard services when away from your vehicle. Colours WATER Keep an eye on your precious water levels so you know in good time when to top-up. HEATING Activate whilst out exploring and enjoy the warmth when you get back. INTRODUCTION Thank you for deciding to buy one of our new motorhomes. We are sure you will enjoy many happy hours in it and we hope the information and hints in this handbook will heighten your enjoyment. The handbook has been designed to give you a general guide to the care, use and maintenance of your motorhome. Whether you are a new or an experienced motorhomer the hints will help to protect your investment. Throughout the season, specifications and equipment details contained within this handbook may change. Please refer to our online handbooks (www.swiftgroup.co.uk) for the most up-to-date version of your handbook. Customers should note that all motorhomes are supplied with two handbooks, the User Handbook which contains general information for the use and care of your product and the Technical Handbook, which contains technical information, weights and dimensions of your product. IN TRODUCT ION Dear owner The information contained will answer most of your queries, but if there are any aspects which are not covered please consult your appointed dealer. We would suggest you make a note of your dealers name and contact information below. Dealer Name: Sales Tel: Telephone Number: Service Centre Tel: E-mail: Parts Tel: VIN: First Service Due: 1 CONT E N TS SWIFT TALK Swift Talk Swift Talk is the new central forum for the Swift community online. A place for all those united in their love of caravanning, motorhomes, holiday homes and touring in general, to share their experiences, meet new friends and find out a world of information on how to enjoy their touring lifestyle. The site is packed full of features that actively encourage members, not only to liaise with the Swift Group via the forums, but also interact with each other through publishing their own content, uploading and sharing photos and video, and even posting their own blogs for the community to follow. Swift Talk is the first place to learn about new product launches, events and Swift Group news, it’s also the first place customers can go to as a quick reference to frequently asked questions or to actively take part in the forums; providing valuable feedback on Swift Group products and customer service. The new online community can even be used to create your own groups, perfect for Owners’ Clubs, dealers and exhibitors to attract new members, publicise and build awareness for upcoming events, rallies and shows. Anyone who owns, uses, or is thinking of buying a Swift Group caravan, motorhome or holiday home, or would just like to be part of the growing Swift community is actively encouraged to sign up, create their own content, and start talking! Just visit www.swift-talk.co.uk and become part of a unique online experience. I chat on SwiftTalk Social Network for Caravan and Motorhome enthusiasts www.swift-talk.co.uk 2 CONTENTS Motorhome code .................................................................................................................... 15 Preparing for the road ............................................................................................................. 19 En-route ................................................................................................................................. 27 CO N T E NT S Warranty ................................................................................................................................. 5 Safety & security ..................................................................................................................... 33 Arrival at site ........................................................................................................................... 47 Services ................................................................................................................................. 49 Electrics .................................................................................................................................. 71 Fitted equipment .................................................................................................................... 101 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 219 Fault Finding ........................................................................................................................... 235 Useful information ................................................................................................................... 241 3 4 WARRANTY INFORMATION Change of ownership................................................................................................................ 9 Swift Connect Direct.................................................................................................................. 9 What to do if you require assistance ......................................................................................... 9 Supplier contacts...................................................................................................................... 10 Motorhome - annual service/inspection record ......................................................................... 11 Annual service / inspection record stamps ................................................................................ 12 WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 6 5 WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N WARRANTY Motorhome Warranty All the illustrations and descriptive matter in this handbook are intended to give a general idea of the motorhome. Changing market and supply situations and our policy of continuous product development may prevent us from maintaining the exact specifications detailed in this handbook. We therefore reserve the right to alter specifications as materials and conditions demand. Dealers are not agents of Swift Group Limited ("Swift") and have absolutely no authority to bind the manufacturer by any express or implied undertaking or representation. Your Coach-built motorhome has four warranties: Base Vehicle Warranty – provided by Fiat Your vehicle is a coach-built motorhome which utilises a Fiat base vehicle. Swift takes a flat bed chassis supplied by Fiat and adds the coach-built habitation part of the motorhome. Fiat provide a manufacturer's warranty for the base vehicle as supplied to Swift by them. For any issues with the base vehicle warranty please contact your local Fiat dealer. This Motorhome Warranty does not cover any parts of your motorhome that are covered by the Fiat manufacturer's warranty. Your base vehicle warranty is subject to the terms and conditions contained in the Fiat handbook supplied with the base vehicle and the vehicle must be serviced in accordance with Fiat's requirements. SuperSure Warranty – provided by Swift For all parts or fittings of your coach-built motorhome other than the habitation body shell and the Fiat base vehicle, Swift will repair (or at it's option, replace) any defective parts or fittings for 3 years from the date of purchase (or hire purchase) subject to conditions, terms and exclusions below. Body Shell Warranty – provided by Swift Swift will repair (or at its option, replace) any defects with the habitation body shell for 6 years from the date of purchase (or hire purchase), subject to the conditions, terms and exclusions below. 6 Extended Body Shell Warranty – provided by Swift For the first owner, Swift will repair (or at its option, replace) any defects with the habitation body shell for 10 years from the date of purchase (or hire purchase), subject to the conditions, terms and exclusions below. The SuperSure Warranty, the Body Shell warranty and/or the Extended Body Shell Warranty provided by Swift do not cover any parts of the motorhome that are covered by the Fiat warranty. Conditions for the SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body Shell Warranties 1. You must ensure that the habitation part of your coach-built motorhome has an Annual Service (see clause 2 below) within 90 days before or 60 days after each anniversary of the original date of purchase. In order to preserve your SuperSure Warranty the third Annual Service must, however, be carried out before the expiry of the 36 month period from the original date of purchase. In order to preserve your Body Shell Warranty, the sixth Annual Service must be carried out before the expiry of the 72 month period from the original date of purchase. In order to preserve your Extended Body Shell Warranty, the tenth Annual Service must be carried out before the expiry of the 120 month period from the original date of purchase. If you have not performed an Annual Service then Swift will not be obliged to perform any work under the applicable warranty. Original VAT invoices must be retained as proof that Annual Service have been carried out. 2. The Annual Service on the body shell and habitation area must be carried out in accordance with the requirements in this handbook. You will be responsible for any charges made for an Annual Service. If the Annual Service is performed by an authorised Swift Group Service Centre then Swift warrants that the Annual Service has been performed correctly. If the Annual Service is performed by an unauthorised repairer or service centre then if the Annual Service has not been performed in 3. All new motorhomes must be registered with Swift within 6 weeks of purchase as new. 4. The benefit of the SuperSure and Body Shell Warranties may be transferred to a new owner if the motorhome is re-sold, provided that the motorhome has been serviced in accordance with the requirements of this handbook, and details of the change of ownership have been supplied to Swift using the change of ownership form set out in this handbook as soon as reasonably practicable after the change. 5. The benefit of the Extended Body Shell Warranty is non transferable to new owners and applies only to the original registered keeper of the vehicle. 6. If any repairs are identified as being necessary to the body shell or habitation areas during an Annual Service or otherwise, Swift will only pay for Warranty work performed by an authorised Swift Group Service Centre. The motorhome must be made available to an authorised Swift Group Service Centre within 6 weeks of the date the repair need was identified for the work to be carried out. The cost of transporting, towing or moving the motorhome by any means to or from the place of repair is the responsibility of the owner. 7. The SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body Shell Warranties only apply to motorhomes purchased and used primarily within the UK, which means that the motorhome is not used for continuous journeys outside of the UK of longer than 90 days per journey. Please refer to the Fiat handbook for use of the base vehicle outside the UK. Terms 8. The Body Shell Warranty and Extended Body Shell Warranty covers any defect with the panels and seams of the coachbuilt habitation part of the motorhome. This includes body leaks, delamination of panels or floor, water ingress through any permanently sealed seam joints. NB: The Extended Body Shell Warranty is non transferable and only applies to the original registered owner. 9. In the first 12 months the SuperSure Warranty will cover any defect other than those specified in the Exclusions below. WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION accordance with the requirements in this handbook and/or work has been performed on your motorhome that is defective or faulty, then Swift will not be obliged to perform any work under this Warranty (insofar as it relates to defective or faulty work or defective Annual Service). 10. In the years 2 and 3 the SuperSure Warranty will only cover any defect with the following components: • Electrical System: PSU, battery charger, Smart Command and interior lighting units (excluding bulbs). • Water system: water heater, fresh water tank, water pump, water gauges, taps and shower head. • Cooker: the cooker unit including grill, oven, burners, igniter and flame failure device. • Refrigerator: gas igniter, flame failure device, door seal condenser, gas control valve, 12V and 230V heater elements, gas thermostat, 230V thermostat and 230V temperature control switch. • Cassette toilet: the casstte toilet (excluding seals, valves and glands) • Heating system: thermostat, motor, switches, control unit, gas heater, flame failure device and igniter (excluding ducting and fittings) • Windows: the functionality of the opening and closing sytem (stays, handles and catches) and a warranty against the cracking of the acrylic. Excludes fading. • Upholstery: zips, seams and colour fastness. 7 WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N WARRANTY In years 2 and 3, any defect specified in the Exclusions will not be covered. Exclusions 11.Swift shall not be liable under the SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body Shell Warranties for any defect related to or arising from the following: • The failure of a component for reasons of fair wear and tear; • Damage resulting from freezing, fire, overheating or accidents (whether caused by the user or a third party); • Misuse of any component; • Normal deterioration, corrosion, intrusion of foreign or harmful bodies, lack of servicing or negligence of any person other than Swift which causes stoppage of or impairment to the function of any component of the motorhome; • Replacement of parts which have reached the end of their effective working life because of age and/or usage; • Cleaning or adjustment of any assemblies; • Cosmetic finishes to kitchen sinks, cooker tops, vanity units, shower trays; and/or • Routine maintenance items which are part of the annual service including lubricants, rubber gas hose, the cleaning of the heater and fridge flues, the replacement of gas jets, the resealing and/or replacement of shower room sealant, and the adjustment and lubrication of locks. 12. In addition to the exclusions above, in years 2 and 3 of the SuperSure Warranty Period, Swift Group Limited shall not be liable under this Warranty for any defects related to: • Any audio equipment; 8 • Any microwave; and/or • Any television • Wall and Roof GRP sheeting material: after 24 months from date of purchase. 13. Swift shall also not be liable under the SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body Shell Warranties if the Motorhome has been neglected, misused, modified or used for hire or reward or if the identification marks (chassis/VIN numbers) have been removed or defaced. The motorhome will be deemed to have been neglected if it has not been serviced and maintained as stated in this handbook or any repairs being identified as necessary at an Annual Service or by a Swift Group Service Centre have not been carried out in a reasonable time. You have legal rights under UK law governing the sale of consumer goods. This Warranty does not affect your legal rights. The name and address of the Warranty provider is: Swift Group Limited, Dunswell Road, Cottingham, East Yorkshire, HU16 4JX To make a claim under this Warranty, contact the Swift Group Service Centre which supplied your motorhome. Alternatively, details of your nearest authorised Swift Group Service Centre can be obtained by contacting the Swift Group Customer Service Department on 01482 875740, or enquiring on the website www.swiftgroup.co.uk ASSISTANCE You can transfer the remainder of any 3 year 'Supersure' warranty' and the 6 year 'Body Shell' warranty, details of how to do this can be found at the rear of this handbook. The 'Extended 10 Year Body Shell Warranty' is non transferable. For Swift Connect Direct customers You have access to a new online system which is for all Swift models. A password will be issued to you, to enable you to interact with us. To access the system, called 'Swift Connect Direct', your initial log in details will be emailed to you once your supplying dealer has registered your ownership with us. Please log in and create your own profile. Should you have issues with accessing Swift Connect Direct, please contact our Customer Services Team. What to do if you require assistance Should you have an enquiry or require assistance with a problem, we hope that this guide will be of assistance to you. If you have a problem, or enquiry with regards to your new motorhome, please follow these steps: 1. Check the Owners Handbook, paying particular attention to the fault finding advice at the back of the book. 2. Contact your supplying dealer for assistance. WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION Change of ownership If you need to contact the Swift Group, please be aware of the following: 1. When contacting Swift Customer Service, please quote your name, postcode and VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). This can be found at the bottom of the front windscreen, on the plate on the front cross member within the engine compartment and on the Swift manufacturers plate situated on the bulkhead directly behind the front driver/ passenger seat. 2. In most instances, the Customer Service Team will involve your dealer in resolving the issue you are experiencing. 3. Check our website www.swiftgroup. co.uk and enter the Owners section which provides answers to frequently asked questions and how to contact us. 4. If you are contacting the company by email, letter or fax, the Customer Service Team will respond to you within five working days from the date of receiving the correspondence. 5. If you are calling the Customer Service Team, please avoid where possible, Mondays and lunch times. 6. Please be aware that the Swift Group cannot send parts direct from the factory. In all cases, without exception, your dealer must place the order for you. 9 WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N SUPPLIER CONTACTS Supplier contacts A number of Swift Group suppliers manage their own Technical and Warranty related queries. Where a customer has a question relating to a product manufactured by a company listed below, we would advise that the first contact should be directly with them. Sargent Electrical Services Unit 39, Tokenspire Business Park, Beverley, East Yorkshire, HU17 0TB Phone: 01482 678981 Fax: 01482 678987 E-mail: [email protected] AL-KO Kober Limited South Warwickshire Business Park Kineton Road, Southam, Warwickshire, CV47 0AL Fax: 01926 818562 Email: [email protected] Truma UK Ltd. Park lane, Dove Valley Park, South Derbyshire, DE65 5BG Phone: 01283 586020 Fax: 01283 586029 [email protected] Thetford Ltd. Unit 6, Brookfields Way, Manvers,Rotherham, S63 5DL Phone: 0844 997 1960 www.thetford-europe.com Email: [email protected] Alde International (UK) Ltd Huxley Close, Park Farm South, Wellingborough, Northants NN8 6AB Phone: 01933 677765 Fax: 01933 674975 Email: [email protected] Dometic (UK) Ltd Dometic House, The Brewery, Blandford St Mary, Dorset, DT11 9LS Phone: 0844 626 0133 Email: [email protected] 10 SERVICE INSPECTION 1. Damp and lamination test. In order to comply with the warranty, you must have your motorhome inspected and serviced at least once per year. 3. Corner steadies. We highly recommend that you have your Motorhome serviced by a Swift Group Approved Service Centre who have direct access to our online Customer Service system, Connect. This system provides them with the ability to order approved parts and ensure that any product upgrades which may be available for your Motorhome can be offered to you and carried out as part of the service. In the unfortunate event that an issue requires attention under warranty then Swift Group Approved Service Centres are able to submit a warranty claim to the Swift Group for processing, and deal with the issue for you from start to finish. All of our Swift Group Approved Service Centres are provided with up to date technical information and have access to current repair methods giving you peace of mind that any defect has been repaired effectively. It is important that the Owner’s Handbook is stamped on the appropriate page by the authorised Swift Group Service Centre. Failure to do this will invalidate the warranty and the transfer of the warranty on the change of ownership. 2. Chassis and chassis to body security. 4. Motorhome step. 5. Road lights, wiring and reflectors. 6. Internal lights and 12V DC system. 7. Water heater - gas and 230V AC (if fitted). 8. Hob, grill and oven. 9. Refrigerator 230V AC, 12V DC and gas. 10. Gas system. WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION Motorhomes - annual service/ inspection record 11. Water pump, taps and water system. 12. Mains 230V AC system. 13. Windows and fittings. 14. Smoke alarm and battery. 15. Carbon Monoxide detector and Battery 16. Roof lights. 17. Furniture hinges/stays etc. 18. Exterior locks and hinges. 19. All internal vents. 20. Seals. 21. Blinds and fly screens (if fitted). 22. Blown air heating and gas fire systems 23. Drop down bed operation The inspection should take approximately two to four hours and will cover the areas dealt with in the annual service check list. Any areas requiring service and/or maintenance will be highlighted by your dealer and we recommend that you authorise any necessary work to be carried out. Note: It is essential, to validate the warranty, that an annual inspection be carried out by an authorised Swift Group Service Centre covering the items listed. 11 WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N SERVICE INSPECTION 12 Annual service / inspection record stamps 1st service DATE: Motorhome model: DEALER’S STAMP Year: Chassis VIN: We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. 2nd service 3rd service DATE: DATE: DEALER’S STAMP DEALER’S STAMP We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. 4th service 5th service DATE: DATE: DEALER’S STAMP DEALER’S STAMP We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. 6th service 7th service DATE: DATE: DEALER’S STAMP DEALER’S STAMP We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. 9th service DATE: DATE: DEALER’S STAMP DEALER’S STAMP We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. 10th service 11th service DATE: DATE: DEALER’S STAMP DEALER’S STAMP We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. We certify that an annual service has been carried out in accordance with the handbook. WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION 8th service 13 14 WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N MOTORHOME CODE The Country code......................................................................................................................18 The Coastal code......................................................................................................................18 MO TORHOME CODE Code of conduct.......................................................................................................................16 15 MOT ORHOME C O D E CODE OF CONDUCT Code of conduct Camp sites Arrivals Report to reception immediately on arrival. Vehicle Movement Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed. Adhere to speed limits. Note that these are generally 10 mph. (Remember that the stopping distance on grass is considerably greater than on tarmac.) Only a person in possession of a current driving licence may drive on the site. Park correctly as advised on your pitch. Where possible leave 20 feet of free space around your vehicle. Use of Site Appliances Use the electrical mains hook-up in the correct manner and with caution. Ensure that all fresh water taps/connections are turned off after use. Have care and consideration when using all facilities (toilets and showers etc) and leave clean and tidy. Young children should be supervised. Waste Disposal If the vehicle is not fitted with a waste water tank, a suitable receptacle should be placed below all waste water outlet pipes. Do not let these containers overflow. Dispose of all waste water where instructed. Empty effluent from chemical toilets where instructed. To avoid possible damage to sewage purification works, only approved chemical fluids must be used. Under no circumstances should coal tar, phenol or caustic-based fluids be used. Disposable nappies and similar bulky items must not be put into chemical closet emptying points but should be wrapped in a polythene bag and placed in the container provided. Place all litter in containers marked for the purpose. 16 Noise Do not make excessive noise. Children should be restrained from making excessive noise. Flying kites and model aircraft and the use of items like catapults or air-guns, as well as ball games, should not be permitted among, or close to other vehicles. Musical instruments, record players, radios and televisions should not be used to the inconvenience of other people on the site. Open and close doors quietly. Power generators must be adequately silenced and used with consideration. Dogs and other Pets All dogs and other pets should be kept under control. Unless permission has been granted, no animal should be allowed loose on the site and leads must not exceed 10ft. No animals should be allowed in the shower/ toilet blocks. Do not let dogs foul the site. Fire Precautions Adhere to and take note of fire precautions noting the whereabouts of the fire points. ! WARNING: Provide one dry powder fire extinguisher of an approved type or complying with EN3-7, of at least 1kg capacity, by the main exterior door and a fire blanket next to the cooker. Familiarise yourself with the operating instructions on your fire extinguisher and the local fire precaution arrangements. When using a dry powder extinguisher it is suggested that the motorhome be evacuated until the powder has settled, to avoid inhalation. PARKING/DRIVING Open fires are not allowed. Awnings and Tents Driving Before moving off, elevated rooflights and aerials should be lowered and correctly secured, and top hinged windows closed. Likewise all doors and access lockers for gas containers and chemical toilets must be properly secured. Awnings and tents should only be used when permission has been obtained. Exterior steps should be properly retracted and secured. When on grass and staying for more than a few days, the ground sheet and/or side flaps of awnings should be periodically raised in order to avoid damage to the ground. When the vehicle is in motion it is compulsory for all front seat passengers and rear seat passengers to wear seat belts, where fitted. Departure Leave the pitch clean and tidy. On leaving, check out with reception paying the required fees. Wild camping Camping away from licensed sites, without the permission from the land owner or his agents, is not allowed in the United Kingdom. When permission has been granted, all aspects of this Code should be adhered to. When using a motorhome on either the public highway or private roads the Highway Code should be complied with and full consideration given to other road users. In the event of a motorhome travelling slowly the driver of the motorhome should, where possible, pull over in order to let other traffic pass. ! WARNING: When refuelling or on a ferry ensure the gas system is fully isolated at source. On no account should: Handbooks (chassis & converter) a. L itter be disposed of other than in the receptacles provided. Before using a motorhome all aspects of the handbooks, produced by the chassis manufacturer and the converter, must be read and adhered to. b. W ater be allowed to escape from the vehicle. c. C hemical toilets be emptied except into the disposal places agreed with the land owner. d. Washing or similar be hung outside the vehicle. MO TORHOME CODE Unless permission has been granted, barbecues should not be used. If permission is given, consideration should be given to the annoyance that can be caused to other users of the site. The separate chassis manufacturer handbook refers to your motorhome chassis and base vehicle including care and maintenance. Parking Motorhomes should only be parked in approved places. When using the facilities of a motorhome, care and consideration should be given to those around them. 17 MOT ORHOME C O D E COUNTRY/COASTAL CODE Environment Care and consideration should be taken to protect the environment. Shellfish can take years to grow and fines can be imposed for not observing national regulations. Observe the Country and Coastal Codes. Do not pull up seaweeds unnecessarily. The Country code Make your visit instructive - not destructive. Enjoy the countryside but respect its life and work. More people than ever before are exploring the countryside, interested in farming, plant life, bird watching or just observing the general wildlife. Whatever your interest, there is a lot to learn, but please observe the following code: 1. Guard against all risk of fires. Hay and heathland catch alight easily and once ablaze are very difficult to put out. Remember: fire spreads quickly. 2. Fasten all gates. 3. Keep your dog under proper control. 4. Keep to the paths across farm land. 5. Avoid damaging fences, hedges and walls. 6. Leave no litter. 7. Safeguard water supplies. 8. Protect wildlife, wild plants and trees. 9. Go carefully on country roads. 10. Respect the life of the countryside. The Coastal code As our coastlines are increasingly used for recreation and education, the following suggestions are made to enable us to enjoy our inheritance and preserve it for posterity. Disturbance may mean DEATH. Do not trample about, or move rocks unnecessarily. Do not frighten seals or seabirds. Do not spill detergents, solvents or fuel from boats as these can kill marine life. When sailing, moderate your speed - the wash from a fast boat can destroy banks and nests. 18 Live molluscs and crustaceans need not be collected as souvenirs - dead shells can usually be found. Look at material - don’t remove it. Take notes and photographs, not specimens. Observe by-laws and be considerate to others. National Trust property and Country Parks have regulations to protect the wildlife. Follow these and the Country and Coastal Codes. PREPARING FOR THE ROAD Motorhome terms..................................................................................................................... 20 Loading of vehicle..................................................................................................................... 21 Large storage areas.................................................................................................................. 22 Roof loading............................................................................................................................. 22 Tyres........................................................................................................................................ 22 Dedicated travelling passenger seating..................................................................................... 23 Child seats............................................................................................................................... 23 Three point seat belts............................................................................................................... 24 Driving licence.......................................................................................................................... 24 P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D Before moving off..................................................................................................................... 20 Vehicle classifications............................................................................................................... 25 Advice on towing...................................................................................................................... 25 European Touring..................................................................................................................... 26 19 PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D BEFORE MOVING OFF Before moving off Check: • gas cylinders are correctly positioned, secured and turned off unless using en-route heating. • all gas operated appliances have been isolated, except the en-route heating system if fitted. • loose articles including bed and luton ladders are stowed securely. Do not stow tins, bottles or heavy items in overhead lockers. • all lockers and cupboard doors are closed and secured. • tables are stored or locked in their transit position. • fridge is on 12V operation and door lock is set. • 230V mains input socket flap is securely closed. • all drain taps are closed • tyre pressures and wheel nuts. • rear corner steadies (if fitted) are raised. • exterior roof rack ladder is raised and secured. • all windows/doors/rooflights are closed and secured. • TV aerial is lowered and locked into position (where fitted). • exterior step (where fitted) is retracted /folded in. • Ensure exterior service locker is closed and locked (where fitted). • Drop down bed is in upper stowed position. Special attention must be taken to ensure all top hinged windows as well as the Luton windows, Skyviews and rooflights are closed when in transit. All units should be fully closed and latched to prevent damage. The motorhome exterior door should also be locked. 20 ! WARNING: Large and/or voluminous items should be stored securely before travelling. ! WARNING: Vehicles over 3m high have a maximum vehicle height label affixed to the drivers sunblind. When planning your route take your vehicle height into consideration. Central locking (if fitted) The central locking will not activate unless the cab doors are closed. It will however activate with the habitation door open. The habitation door lock will then engage when the door is closed leading to the possibility of being locked out of the vehicle, if the keys are left inside. It is therefore essential that the habitation door is closed before the central locking is activated. To open the habitation door when locked, pull the internal door handle twice. Motorhome terms Mass in Running Order: The mass of the motorhome equipped to the motorhome manufacturers standard specification, as stated by the manufacturer. The MRO comprises the ex-works weight of the motorhome, including the driver, 90% fuel capacity, 1 x LPG gas cylinder @10kg and standard fixtures & fittings in compliance with European Regulation No. 1230/2012 (Masses & Dimensions) Note: The mass of the motorhome in running order contains provision for the masses of liquids, gas etc. (see Mass in Running Order in the Technical Section). Part of this provision can also be utilised as additional payload, if for example, you wish to travel with no gas cylinders. Note: If you travel with water in the fresh water tank or waste tank, the payload will be reduced accordingly Note: Quoted MRO is subject to tolerance, due to weight variation of materials used in Motorhome construction. LOADING VEHICLE Nose weight of Towed Trailers: The maximum allowable weight to be put into the motorhome whilst it is being driven. This is made up of 4 sections: The static mass of the trailer towing device on the rear of the towing vehicle. Personal effects, conventional load, optional equipment and essential habitation equipment. 1. When measuring the noseweight it is important that the trailer is loaded. The Maximum User Payload is the difference between the Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass and the Mass in Running Order. 2. The trailer is intended to be towed slightly nose heavy. The nose weight can be adjusted by distribution of the load. The nose weight should be approximately 7% of the actual laden weight (but not greater than the hitch capacity) and at the same time suit the motorhome requirements. Personal Effects: Those items which a user can choose to carry in a motorhome and which are not included as Essential Habitation Equipment or Optional equipment. Conventional Load: A mass allowance for each designated passenger seat. Optional Equipment: Items made available by the manufacturer over and above the standard specification of the motorhome. Essential Habitation: A mass allowance for liquids in systems not accounted for within the MRO. Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass: The maximum weight for which the motorhome is designed for normal use when being driven on a road, laden. This mass takes into account specific operating conditions including factors such as the strength of materials, loading capacity of tyres etc. ! WARNING: Under no circumstances should the axle loadings or the Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass of the motorhome be exceeded. Notes: P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D Maximum User Payload: See ‘Advice on Towing’ page 25. Loading of vehicle ! WARNING: The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with the technical weight limits of the specific motorhome model. Correct weight distribution is an important factor in ensuring your vehicle is well balanced and easy to drive. It is therefore necessary to load your motorhome carefully making sure all heavy articles are evenly distributed and are preferably placed in the lower lockers or bed boxes. ! WARNING: The two longitudinal bars fitted to the roof are there for styling purposes and should not be used for load carrying unless cross bars are fitted. ! WARNING: Do not travel with televisions or microwaves in overhead lockers unless the appliance was supplied fitted to your motorhome by the manufacturer. Although it is essential to ensure that the total weight of your motorhome does not exceed the stipulated Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass, (MTPLM), it is important to remember that the front and rear axles also have individual maximum weights which must not be exceeded. 21 PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D STORAGE/ROOF LOADING See your Technical Handbook for MTPLM and maximum axle loads. Note: To ensure adequate road holding the load on the front axle, under all conditions, must not be less than 40% or more than 70% of the total weight. Ensure you distribute the payload equally on each side of the vehicle to avoid an imbalance. These weights, together with the MTPLM, can be found on the Statutory plate adhered to the bulkhead behind the right hand cab seat. Note: Please take care to ensure you have allowed for the masses of all the items you intend to carry in your motorhome e.g. passengers, optional equipment, essential habitational equipment and personal effects such as clothing, food, pets, bicycles, sailboards, sports equipment etc. Large storage areas The large storage areas provided in some motorhome layouts are designed solely for the purpose of carrying personal possessions, these areas must not be used; • as a habitation area (eg living, sleeping or cooking). • to carry passengers, animals or livestock. • for the installation (or use) of any LPG gas operated appliances, (unless supplied fitted by the manufacturer). • for carrying LPG gas bottle cylinders. • to carry any flammable liquids, unless properly stored, sealed and secured. Some motorhome roofs can be fitted with a roof rack (optional). A maximum load of 50kgs can be evenly distributed on the roof rack system. This figure MUST NOT be exceeded. Note: When loading the roof rack, make sure the load is spread evenly and do not allow sharp objects to come into contact with the roof surface. Note: Ensure items loaded on the roof rack do not act as a sail (i.e. deck chairs). ! WARNING: Do not apply excessive load to the rear suspension of your motorhome or allow the vehicle to reverse with the roof rack access ladder in the down position, touching the ground. This may cause excessive strain on the ladder fixing points. The flat roof areas, up to the over cab section, are capable of withstanding an average person’s weight (13 stone or 82.5kg). Note: Do not walk on the over cab section. ! WARNING: The roof may become slippery in adverse conditions, wipe dry before attempting to walk on roof section. Extreme care should be taken to avoid falling from the vehicle. ! WARNING: When walking on the roof, deck type shoes should be worn – not leather sole • for the operation of an electrical generator. Tyres • in such a way that the load exceeds the MTPLM and maximum axle loads. If a wheel or tyre fitted to a wheel is changed any replacement must be of the same type of construction and size. Care must be taken to ensure that exterior doors are closed, locked and that all possessions are properly stored and secured before setting off on any journey. 22 Roof loading The law requires that the tyres and pressures must be suitable for the use to which they are being put. The minimum tread depth must be 1.6mm throughout a continuous band SEATBELTS Please refer to base vehicle manufacturer’s handbook (Fiat or AL-KO AMC conversion handbook) for tyre pressure information. This may also be displayed in the driver’s or passenger's door aperture. Motorhome Tyre Specifications You should note that your Motorhome is fitted with “Camper Tyres”. Camper tyres meet a specific “CP” (Camping Pneu) standard for tyres on Motorhomes. The Camper tyres on a Motorhome (unlike a commercial van) are designed to carry a significantly higher load for the majority of their life and even when stationery for greater periods of time unlike a van which typically loads and unloads. As a result Camper tyres have stiffened side walls to withstand the increased payloads and pressure on them, this extra reinforcement also gives better vehicle stability on the rear with the heavier rear axle loads typical on a Motorhome. The tyres are also designed to improve mileage (wear) and offer better grip off road. When replacing your tyres we only recommend the fitment of CP or Camper Tyres. Tyre Pressures The motorhome tyre pressures noted in the Technical book are the pressures stated by Fiat for your vehicle calculated in a fully laden condition. If you are not running fully laden, reduced pressures could be used but please seek clarification from the Tyre manufacture. Dedicated travelling passenger seating Seat belts are fitted to all travelling seats. Travelling seats are designated by the manufacturer and vary according to the layout you have purchased. Each seat is homologated i.e. tested to all relevant safety requirements. NEVER travel in or attempt to install a seatbelt to a non-designated seat. ! WARNING: Side facing seats are designed for habitational use only, not for use when the vehicle is in motion. Seat belts and legislation Designated driver and passenger seats are fitted with seat belts and MUST be worn. Children, aged up to 3 years of age, must wear an appropriate child restraint suitable for their age and weight. Children from 3 years of age and up to 135cm (4’5”) in height, or 12 years of age, whichever is reached first must use a restraint suitable for their age. P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D comprising the centre three-quarters of the breadth of the tread and around the circumference of the tyre. Children over 135cm (4’5”) in height or aged 12 or 13 years must wear a seat belt. Note: It is the legal responsibility of the driver To ensure children aged up to 14 years old are suitably restrained. For passengers aged 14 and over, it is their responsibility (not the driver) that a seat belt is worn. Fig 1 Designated passenger seats within the habitational compartment of your motorhome are identified (fig. 1). Seat belts are fitted for your safety and must be worn unless a ‘Certificate of Exemption from Compulsory Seat Belt Wearing’ is held. This Certificate must be produced if asked for by the Police – seat belt offences can result in a fine. Child seats Choosing/Buying Go to a reputable retailer such as Halford’s, Mothercare, Toys R Us, John Lewis etc. Most reputable retailers will have trained child seat advisers on site and will offer a fitting service. Ask the advisor to fit various seats to the vehicle. Once a correctly fitting seat has been installed, satisfy yourself on its suitability for your child and the vehicle before buying as it is 23 PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D DRIVING LICENCE important to use a correctly fitting seat in your motorhome. ! WARNING: The child seat you use in This section refers to the seat belts located in the habitation area of your motorhome. your car may not be suitable for mounting on a motorhome seat. Fastening the seat belt: Choose the right seat for your child’s height and weight. Releasing the seat belt: Ensure it has an official approval mark (usually the United Nations ‘E’ mark). The current UN standards is Regulation 44.04 Never fit or use a second hand car seat. It could have been damaged and may not meet modern standards. The fitting instructions may also be missing. Positioning/ Fitting Dependant upon the child seat type, the most suitable position for the child seat to be fitted may be the front passenger seat of the cab (NOTE airbag advice below) or the window seat of the forward facing rear seat, the isle seat in the rear is NOT a recommended position, advice should always be taken from the retailer on the suitability and security of the seat in the motorhome. Insert tongue into buckle; a positive ‘click’ indicates correct assembly. Press the red release button, the tongue will be ejected from the buckle. • The belt is designed for use by one person and must not be put around a child seated on a person’s lap. • The belt is suitable for restraining most child seats and boosters. • The belt should at all times be adjusted and used in accordance with the instructions. No excessive slackness should be present. • Once installed the diagonal should pass across the centre of the shoulder and the buckle should lie just on or below the hip. • Avoid twisting the webbing during use. Webbing must not be allowed to chafe against sharp edges. Read and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for fitting the seat. • Do not make alterations or additions to the belt. All Swift Motor homes are fitted with inertia reel seat belts, however, the child seat must be tight in the adult seat. Push all your weight into the child seat as you tighten the belt. • Belts that have been cut, frayed, damaged or stressed through impact should be replaced. After impact the motorhome anchorage points should also be checked. Keep a copy of the child seat fitting instruction in the motorhome for easy reference. • To clean use warm soapy water only. Any doubts, ask an advisor to show you how to correctly install the seat. Airbag Never fit a rear-facing child restraint in a seat with an active airbag in front of it. Forward-facing child restraints should be positioned as far back from the airbag as possible. Check the base vehicle handbook. 24 Three point seat belts • Periodic inspection of the installation will ensure reliability of the seat belt. Driving licence Licences issued to drivers who passed their car driving test before 1st January 1997 include categories B+E and C1+E which gives them entitlement to drive motor vehicles up to 7500kg MTPLM. Drivers who passed their test on or after this date have category B entitlement only, which restricts the entitlement to motor vehicles with up to 8 passenger seats and an MTPLM of up to 3500kg with trailers up to 750kg TOWING ADVICE Drivers who passed their test on or after the 1st January 1997 will need to take an additional test(s) to gain the B+E and C1+E entitlement. A number of Swift Group motorhomes have an MTPLM greater than 3500kg, therefore you must check you have the correct driving licence entitlement for the vehicle you drive. Vehicle classifications Motorhomes up to 3500kg MTPLM are P/LGV (Private Light Goods Vehicles), motorhomes with an MTPLM over 3500kg and up to 7500kg are P/HGV (Private Heavy Goods Vehicles). These are used for vehicle excise duty (road tax) classifications. Advice on towing The towing capability of each motorhome differs depending on the specific chassis and engine types, (see ‘Towing Capabilities’ in your specification handbook). This takes account of the maximum front and rear axle loadings as well as the minimum front axle loading in two conditions, MRO and MTPLM condition. Towing in these, and any other condition requires sensible loading and distribution of payloads to ensure the requirements of the towing capability table are met. When towing, the demands on both the vehicle and driver increase. A trailer reduces manoeuvrability, the ability to climb hills, acceleration and braking capacity and makes the vehicle handle and corner differently. It will also increase the fuel consumption of the vehicle. Always brake in good time. Special care must be taken when descending gradients. Change down before going down a steep hill so the engine can act as a brake. Ensure that the towing vehicle tyre pressures are correct and adjusted for full load conditions and that the trailer tyre pressures are as recommended by the trailer manufacturer. Regularly check the operation of trailer brakes and lights. For maximum stability, when loading the trailer ensure that the loads are properly secured during transit. Position loads so that most of the weight is placed close to the floor and, where possible, immediately above or close to the axle(s). Where the load can be divided between trailer and tow vehicle, loading more weight into the vehicle will generally improve the stability of the combination. After loading the trailer, check that the nose weight and axle loads are in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, also check the rear and front axle loads on the motorhome. When calculating the laden weight of the trailer, remember to include the weight of the trailer PLUS THE LOAD. P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D MTPLM (4250kg combined) or larger trailers providing the combination of the trailer and towing vehicle does not exceed 3500kg and the MTPLM of the trailer does not exceed the unladen weight of the towing vehicle. Note: Towing regulations vary from country to country. It is very important to ensure that national regulations governing towing weights and speed limits are observed (refer to the relevant national motoring organisation for information). The stated maximum permissible towing weights refer to the vehicle’s design limitations and NOT to any specific territorial restrictions. Notes: 1. Do not exceed the motorhome gross vehicle train weight. 2. Do not exceed the maximum front & rear axle loads on the motorhome. 3. Ensure the motorhome front axle load is never less than 40% or more than 70% of the total weight. 4. Motorhomes with an MTPLM up to 3500kg which have European Type approval can only be fitted with a type approved towbar complying to 94/20/EC or ECE R55. 5. The limit for towing an un-braked trailer is 750kg (based on VIN plate not actual weight), this applies to a towed car. 25 PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D 6. A car dolly with a car with a GVW over 750kg in place is considered as two trailers, these are legal for use for recovery but under the Road Traffic Regulations Act 1984 the combination is limited to 40 mph on motorways and dual carriageways and 20 mph elsewhere. A car dolly is not legal for transportation (there is a very specific difference between recovery and transportation. Recovery is defined as the removal of a broken down vehicle to a place of safety). 7. The maximum permitted vehicle combination length is 18.75m, however any combination must ensure compliance with the turning circle requirements of Construction and Use regulations 1986 & 97/27/EC. European Touring Please note there are a number of requirements placed on a driver when driving on European roads. Carrying a warning triangle, high visibility jacket, first aid kit and spare bulb is now compulsory in many EU states but some EU countries are now introducing further regulations such as carrying a breathalyser kit and not being able to use satellite navigation systems with speed camera warnings. We would advise customers to check on the many web-sites available to ensure you are carrying the correct equipment when touring in those EU countries. 26 EN ROUTE Removal of spare wheel on ALKO conversion ...........................................................................28 Removal of FIAT spare wheel ...................................................................................................29 E N ROUT E Cruise Control...........................................................................................................................28 Fix & go repair kit ...................................................................................................................... 30 27 E N ROUTE CRUISE CONTROL / SPARE WHEEL Cruise control The driver of the vehicle should always remain seated and in control of the vehicle when cruise control has been engaged. Never leave the driving seat for any reason when the vehicle is underway. Removal a. Spare wheel in the stowed position (Fig. 1). b. Remove the securing pins (a) from the supports (b) at each side of the spare wheel carrier frame (c) (Fig. 2). Removal of spare wheel on ALKO conversion: c. Lift the wheel carrier frame (c) slightly and move the frame supports (b) forward and clear of the carrier frame (Fig. 3). ! WARNING: Exercise care when lowering d. Lower the carrier frame and wheel to the ground (Fig. 4). the wheel and frame due to its weight. e. Remove the spare wheel. Replacement Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Ensure the securing pins (a) are correctly located in the frame supports (b). a Fig.1 Fig.2 b Fig.3 c Fig. 4 28 SPARE WHEEL E N ROUT E Removal of Fiat spare wheel: a.the ground should be flat and adequately firm. b. turn the engine off and engage the handbrake. c. engage first gear or reverse. Removal Fig. 3 a. w heel restraining device screw (fig 1) – rear right side of vehicle b. u se the extension and wrench provided to operate the wheel restraining device screw (fig 2). c. w hen the wheel is fully lowered (fig 3) and the restraining device screw can turn no more, use the wrench to pull the wheel out (fig 4). Fig. 4 d. loosen the knob and remove the support to release the wheel (fig 5 & 6). Fig. 5 Fig. 1 Fig. 6 Replacement Fig. 2 Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. ! WARNING: Exercise care when handling the wheel due to its weight. 29 E N ROUTE FIX & GO REPAIR KIT Fix & Go Repair Kit (if fitted) CAUTION: Before use please read the user instructions supplied with your Fit & Go repair kit. The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repair kit is positioned at the front of the vehicle passenger compartment and includes Fig. A: Fig.A • Bottle A containing sealer and fitted with: – a transparent filler pipe B; – a black pressure restoring pipe E; – sticker C bearing the notice “max. 80 km/h”, to be placed in a position visible to the driver (on the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre; • Instruction brochure (see fig. b), to be used for prompt and correct use of the quick tyre repair kit and then to be handed to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit; • A compressor D complete with pressure gauge and connectors; a pair of protective gloves located in the side compartment of the compressor; • Adaptors for inflating different elements CAUTION: Give the instruction booklet to the tyre repair workshop personnel. CAUTION: Punctures on the sides of the tyre cannot be repaired. Do not use the quick tyre repair kit if the damage is due to running with flat tyre. CAUTION: If the wheel rim has been damaged (bent so as to cause air to leak), the wheel cannot be repaired. Do not remove the foreign body (screws or nails) from the tyre. 30 CAUTION: Punctures caused by foreign bodies can be repaired if the damage does not exceed 4 mm on the tread and on the shoulder of the tyre. Important Information: The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is effective at external temperatures of between -20 °C and +50 °C. The sealant has an expiry date. CAUTION: The bottle contains ethylene glycol. It contains latex that might cause allergic reactions. It is harmful if swallowed. It is irritant for the eyes. It may cause sensitisation if inhaled or on contact. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. In the event of contact, wash immediately with plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting if swallowed. Rinse your mouth and drink plenty of water. Call a doctor immediately. Keep out of the reach of children. The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do not breathe in the vapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor immediately if allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle in its proper compartment, away from sources of heat. The sealant has an expiry date. Replace the bottle. Bottle Replacement Procedure • Pull the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve cap, take out the filler hose A fig. C and tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve; • Insert the plug E Fig. C in the nearest 12V power socket and start the engine. Turn the selector D Fig. D anti-clockwise to the repair position. Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the "Inflation pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical Data" chapter; For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check the pressure reading on the pressure gauge F Fig. D with the compressor off and without moving the centre selector. To replace the bottle, proceed as follows: E N ROUT E Inflation Procedure Fig. F • press button A fig. F to release the part; • fit the new bottle and press until it is automatically engaged. CAUTION: Punctures caused by foreign bodies can be repaired if the damage does not exceed 4 mm on the tread and on the shoulder of the tyre. Fig.B CAUTION: Replace the bottle containing the sealant after the expiry date. Dispose of the bottle and the sealant properly. Have the sealing fluid and the bottle disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations. 31 E N ROUTE EN ROUTE 32 SAFETY AND SECURITY Model - SI 601 Smoke Alarm Operation................................................................................... 34 Alarm test................................................................................................................................. 35 Fire extinguisher....................................................................................................................... 36 Escape paths .......................................................................................................................... 36 Children ................................................................................................................................... 36 Ventilation ................................................................................................................................ 37 Security.................................................................................................................................... 37 Swift Command Tracker by Sargent......................................................................................... 37 SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y Fire........................................................................................................................................... 34 CO Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 39 33 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY FIRE AND FIRE ALARM Fire Note: Your attention is drawn to the notice affixed inside the wardrobe advising on fire precaution, ventilation and what to do in case of fire. In case of fire 1. Get everyone out of the motorhome as quickly as possible using whichever exit is the quickest, including windows. Do not stop to collect any personal items. 2. Raise the Alarm. Call the Fire Brigade. 3. Turn off the gas supply valve if it is safe to do so. 4. Turn off the electricity supply at supply point. Model- SI 601 smoke alarm operation Normal condition The red LED on the front should flash once every 40 seconds to show the alarm is active. Low Battery Condition ! WARNING: Your smoke alarm requires a battery with a sufficient capacity of power to operate correctly. This must also be correctly installed. Should your smoke alarm enter a low battery condition, the unit will emit an audible ‘chirp’ once every 40 seconds. When this occurs you must replace the battery immediately. Your smoke alarm will continue to warn of this low battery condition for at least 7 days, however, failure to change the battery after this time would mean your smoke alarm has insufficient power to alert you in a real fire situation. 34 Battery replacement ! WARNING: Only the following batteries can be used for replacement. Use of a battery other than those recommended below may have a detrimental effect on the detector’s operation. Use of a lithium (long-life) battery could provide power for 10 years under normal operating conditions, meaning there is no need for an annual battery change. Note: The alarm cover can not be installed without a battery fitted. Note: Upon delivery the battery may be fitted with a protective cover. Please ensure this is removed before use. Carbon-Zinc type: Eveready Energizer 1222; Gold Peak 16045 (UL). Alkaline Type: Energizer 522; Duracell MN 1604; Duracell 9V Ultra; Energizer 9V Ultra+; Gold Peak 1604A. Lithium (long life) type: Ultralife U9VL 1. Remove the alarm from its mounting plate by turning anti-clockwise FIRE ALARM 3. Replace the alarm on its mounting plate, lining up the large central vent on the front of the alarm, with the ‘X’ that is moulded into the plastic on the mounting plate (if unsure see page 13 of the alarm user manual). Ensure the unit is securely fitted. Alarm test 1. Press the test button in the centre and release. SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y 2. Remove the existing battery and replace with a new battery from the list on this page, making sure that the positive and negative connections are in the correct position. If unsure see the alarm user manual. 2. The unit will emit a loud (85dB at 3 meters) alarm for around 5 seconds and stop automatically. 3. The red LED on your alarm will flash rapidly during the audible signal. 4. Test your alarm as explained in the next section ‘Alarm Test’. 35 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY FIRE ALARM Note: The test button accurately tests the alarm’s smoke sensing circuit, there is no need to test your alarm with smoke. If your smoke alarm fails to give an audible test signal, please refer immediately to the troubleshooting guide at the end of the user manual supplied. ! WARNING: Test your smoke alarm at least once per week. Your smoke alarm has been designed to be as maintenance - free as possible and although the unit requires only battery maintenance for its entire life, there are several things you must do to keep it working properly. ! WARNING: our smoke alarm is a sealed electrical device and no attempt should be made to open the case. Attempting to open the case will invalidate your Warranty. Cleaning As a minimum your smoke alarm should be cleaned once every 3 months using your vacuum cleaner fitted with the soft brush attachment. ! WARNING: The electronic test button provides a full test of the unit’s functionality. DO NOT try to test the alarm with a naked flame, as this may present a potential fire hazard. ! WARNING: Never use portable cooking or heating equipment other than electric heaters that are not of the direct radiant type, as it is a fire and asphyxiation hazard. ! WARNING: Appliances such as cookers must not be used for heating. Fire Extinguisher It is recommended that a dry powder fire extinguisher be carried inside your motorhome at all times. When using a dry powder extinguisher it is suggested that the motorhome be evacuated until the powder has settled, to avoid inhalation. A fat pan fire should not have a fire extinguisher aimed at it. It should be smothered with a fire blanket. ! WARNING: Provide one dry powder fire extinguisher of an approved type or complying with EN3-7 or ISO 7165, of at least 1kg capacity, by the main exterior door and a fire blanket next to the cooker. Familiarise yourself with the instructions on your fire extinguisher and the local fire precaution arrangements. Escape paths ! WARNING: Your smoke alarm may false alarm when it is being cleaned using a vacuum cleaner. ! WARNING: Do not use solvents or cleaners on your smoke alarm, as they may cause damage to the sensor or circuitry. The unit can be wiped with a slightly damp cloth. 36 It is important that you do not block escape paths to emergency exits with obstructions or hazards. Children Do not leave children alone in the motorhome in any event. Keep potentially dangerous items out of reach, as at home e.g. matches, medicine etc. VENTILAT ION / SECURITY / SWIFT COMMAND TRACKER All motorhomes comply with BS EN 721. The ventilation points on your motorhome are fixed points of ventilation which are required by the European Standards. All motorhomes have ventilation at high level and low level which have been calculated to suit the individual needs of your motorhome. High level ventilation is achieved by means of the roof lights and washroom roof ventilators (where applicable). The low level ventilators are positioned under sink units. Under no circumstances must these vents be blocked or obstructed in any manner as this could lead to insufficient fresh air. In this case the confined atmosphere becomes depleted of oxygen which could lead to dangerous levels of carbon dioxide (CO2) build up leading to the risk of asphyxiation. The risks of carbon monoxide (CO) build up, which is a colourless, odourless and tasteless gas, will also be reduced with ventilation. Carbon monoxide is produced from incomplete combustion and should the CO detector be activated the cause of the incomplete combustion must be investigated prior to reusing the appliance in question. It is advised that fixed ventilation points are checked and cleaned (if necessary) on a regular basis using a small brush and a domestic vacuum cleaner. Additional night time ventilation is obtained by releasing the window catches and placing them in the second groove. Note the windows are not sealed from rain in this position. As the ventilation levels are calculated to suit each model requirements no modifications should be made which may result in reduced ventilation levels. ! WARNING: Do not obstruct ventilation. Security Motorhome theft: The theft of a motorhome can occur in the most unlikely circumstances; from a motorway service area or even an owner's driveway. Secure all windows and doors when your motorhome is unoccupied even if only for a short length of time. VIN (Vehicle identification Number) SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y Ventilation Record your motorhome VIN which can be found on the lower edge of the base vehicle front windscreen and the plate located on the front cross member under the bonnet. Make a note of these numbers in the space provided at the front of this handbook and make a separate note of the numbers to keep safe at home. Additional security Consider fitting any device which might deter intrusion by thieves. Customers are advised to identify their motorhome with a method for subsequent identification if other forms of identification have been altered or removed. Free crime prevention advice about securing your motorhome, protecting your valuables, property marking either at home or whilst on site, can be obtained from the Crime Prevention Officer through your local Police station. Swift Command Tracker by Sargent A Swift Command Tracker is built in to your vehicle and forms part of the Swift Command system. The unit is Thatcham Category 6 certified and is monitored by an approved monitoring centre which operates 24 hours a day 7 days a week and provides European coverage and direct police liaison. This system is ready for use, all you need to do is purchase a tracking subscription by visiting www.swiftcommand.co.uk or calling Sargent on 01482 881655. The subscription cost is £95 per year including VAT. 37 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY SWIFT COMMAND TRACKER For more information please visit www.swiftcommand.co.uk Operation The Swift Command Tracker is easy to operate as it is controlled by the vehicle systems. In a caravan the tracker is armed when the Stinger 310 / 350 Alarm System is armed. It is disarmed when the alarm is disarmed. If the caravan doesn’t have an alarm system fitted, a simple numeric keypad is used to arm / disarm the tracker. Enter your code followed by the ON button to arm the tracker. Enter your code followed by the OFF button to disarm the tracker. In a motorhome the tracker is armed / disarmed by the ignition key. When the ignition is turned off the tracker is armed. When the ignition is turned on the tracker is disarmed. Event of a Theft If the vehicle is moved whilst the tracker is armed the geo-fence monitoring will trigger a theft event. In addition to the above, in a caravan with the Stinger 310 / 350 Alarm System fitted, if the alarm is triggered by internal movement or caravan tilting the alarm monitoring will also trigger a theft event. The monitoring station will now contact you to confirm the theft or false alarm. You will be required to confirm your identity against the information you provided when you subscribed. If a genuine theft is confirmed the monitoring station will liaise with the police and keep you informed of progress. Note; during a theft event to comply with legislation you will not be able to manually locate your vehicle using the Swift Command locate feature. 38 Contact Before contacting any of the following please ensure you know your caravan or motorhome serial number. For caravans this is the last 10 digits if the CRIS number (like SWG0123456). For motorhomes this is the unique MH number (like MH01234). The Swift Command Tracker monitoring station can be contacted on 0345 6027302. The stations operates 24 yours a day 7 days a week. Sargent customer support can be contacted on 01482 678981 or via [email protected] swiftcommand.co.uk Telephone lines are manned during normal office hours. Swift customer support can be contacted on 01482 875740 during normal office hours. Precautions The Swift Command Tracker monitors the leisure battery supply and if the voltage falls below a set level or the battery is removed this will trigger a fault event. If you plan to remove your battery for maintenance or external charging please contact the monitoring station BEFORE removing the battery. If you lose an alarm key fob you need to contact Sargent for a replacement and follow their instructions to remove the ‘lost’ fob from the system. If you lose an ignition key you will need to visit a Fiat dealer for key replacement and removal of the ‘lost’ key. CO ALARM Fireangel CO-9D Carbon Monoxide Alarm ! WARNING: Please read the full user instructions provided. Carbon monoxide Known as the silent killer, Carbon Monoxide is an invisible, odourless and tasteless gas. What are the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning? Early symptoms of carbon monoxide (CO) poisoning can mimic many common ailments and may easily be confused with flu or simple tiredness. Symptoms to look out for include: • tiredness • drowsiness • headaches • giddiness • nausea • vomiting • pains in the chest • breathlessness • stomach pains • erratic behaviour • visual problems suffering the effects of carbon monoxide poisoning (headache, nausea), and advise that carbon monoxide poisoning is suspected. • Do not use the appliance again until it has been checked by an expert. In the case of gas appliances the engineer must be Gas Safe registered. Power Pack Activation See diagram below Your detector comes complete with an integrated power pack that will provide power for its entire operational life. To activate the power pack you need to pull the disabling tab (see image). This will in turn pull out the metal disabling clip, which is attached to the end of the tab, from the disabling socket which is situated on the underside of the detector. Retain the disabling tab for future use by taping it to page 22 of the CO-9D user manual. SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y CO alarm When the detector is activated the screen will display all of the icons, then after a few seconds will show the current CO level. The power indicator LED below the symbol will also flash green once every minute to indicate that the detector is receiving power from the power pack and is fully operational. A symbol will also flash briefly on the LCD screen approximately once every minute. Anyone with these symptoms should immediately turn off all appliances and seek medical attention. What to do during an alarm • Keep calm and open the doors and windows to ventilate the caravan. • Stop using all fuel burning appliances and ensure, if possible, that they are turned off. • Evacuate the caravan leaving the doors and windows open. • Do not re-enter the caravan until the alarm has stopped. When exposed to fresh air it can take up to 10 minutes for the sensor to clear and the alarm to stop depending on the level of carbon monoxide detected. • Get medical help immediately for anyone Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry by pushing the centre of the Test/Mode button briefly to confirm that the detector is operating properly. The sounder will sound as soon as the button is pressed, and the Alarm LED will illuminate red indicating that the sounder is working and the power pack is providing power to the unit. You'll notice that the display will switch to temperature mode, this is explained later in the manual, press button again to return to the CO display. This test for the sounder, power pack and circuitry should be 39 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY CO ALARM performed on a weekly basis. This should be continued for the lifetime of the product. ! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to the sounder in close proximity to your ears may damage your hearing. Under normal operating conditions, the power pack will last for the lifetime of the product i.e 7 years. The detector will not protect against the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning when the power pack has drained. ! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to extreme high or low temperatures may reduce the life of the power pack. Power Pack Deactivation Your CO-9D is portable making it ideal for taking with you on holiday. You will need to deactivate your detector when travelling or even when storing e.g when decorating. Fitting is reverse of removal. To deactivate the detector the two ends of the metal clip must be inserted into the corresponding holes in the disabling socket located on the underside of the detector (see image). You can ensure that the product is disabled by pressing the test button- If there is no sound from the sounder then the clip has been fitted correctly. Note: If the disabling tab is no longer available then the clip can be replicated by opening out a thin metal paper clip into a U-shape. Operating Features Standby Mode The alarm can display two views when in normal standby mode, the current level of CO or the current room temperature in degrees centigrade (ºC). When the alarm is showing the current CO Level you will see something similar to the following. 40 FireAngel's unique digital read out displays the amount of CO that the sensor is detecting shown in parts per million (PPM). It is designed to indicate levels from 10PPM to 999PPM. Note: Ambient background levels between 0PPM and 10PPM will show as 0PPM When the alarm is showing the current temperature you will see something similar to the following. In both modes you will notice a symbol appear briefly in the top left hand corner of the screen once every minute. This is an additional indication to show you that the alarm is operating as well as the flashing green LED. To switch between CO and temperature view, simply press the Test/Mode button briefly. The unit will also sound when pressing the button to switch between the two display modes. You will also notice that when switching between modes the display will change slightly, this is because the alarm is displaying the Peak Level CO reading that it has recorded in the last 4 weeks, please see the following peak level reading feature section for further description. Note: If the alarm is in temperature view and detects CO it will automatically switch back to CO display mode. Power pack, sounder and circuitary test SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y Pressing the Test/Mode button will also test the power pack, sounder and circuitry of the alarm. The unit will sound and the alarm LED below will illuminate red. You should perform this test once per week. Peak Level Reading feature. The alarm will record the highest reading of CO that it has detected in the last 4 weeks. This information is useful if your alarm has sounded so you can see the highest level of CO detected during that time. It is also useful to check periodically to see if a readable level of CO has been detected for a short time, but not long enough to trigger a full alarm. The peak level reading is shown briefly every time you press the Test/Mode button and will look something like the image below. Note: We suggest the use of an incense stick or cigarette as the way in which these products burn produces a readable localised amount of CO. A readable level of carbon monoxide will not be given off by other sources of smoke, for example an extinguished candle or match. Step 1: If the alarm is wall mounted unhook it from the fixing screws. Note: It is possible and quite normal for the peak level to remain at 0ppm, i.e. this simply means that the alarm has not detected any CO in the last 4 weeks. The Peak Level reading will be reset to 0ppm whenever a Sensor Test is carried out. (See the next section for Sensor Test). Sensor Testing ! CAUTION: Sensor testing should only be performed by a responsible adult. This test should only be performed once a month. Excessive testing will shorten the life of the power pack. Step 2: Hold the Test/Mode button down until the spanner icon appears in the bottom left hand corner of the screen and the bar graph ‘scans’ from left to right. This indicates the alarm is in sensor test mode where the sampling rate of the sensor has increased and the alarm can be tested using a known source of CO. Step 3: Light an incense stick or cigarette using a match or lighter. Extinguish the lighter, or put out the match and place it into a dish of water. Step 4: Hold the incense stick or burning cigarette 15cm (6 inches) below the detector, so that the smoke goes into the holes at the bottom of the detector. As the smoke gets into the alarm the display will show the amount of CO being detected. When the level of CO in the sensor reaches 50ppm the alarm will sound a single alarm cycle, this confirms that the sensor is working correctly and is the end of the sensor test. The alarm will return to normal standby mode. 41 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY CO ALARM Step 5: P ut out the incense stick or cigarette by placing it into a dish of water. Ensure that all flames have been extinguished. Note: If the level of CO in the sensor doesn’t reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test mode will time out and finish automatically after 3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t reach 50ppm, as long as the display shows a reading of CO then you can be confident that the alarm is working correctly. If you have any questions about testing the sensor please contact the FireAngel technical support team Understanding the Product's Indicators Digital Display The LCD screen has many icons with one or more being shown at any one time. Bar Graph to show early build up of CO. To understand the role of the product indicators please refer to section ‘Carbon Monoxide and how it can affect your family’ on page 3 of the CO-9D User Manual. The alarm has a bar graph which mimics the way CO levels build up in the blood stream. The response times of the alarm are determined by the European Standard BS EN 50291:2001 so the alarm will only sound when it has detected CO for a prescribed length of time, the higher the level of CO the quicker the alarm must sound. However with FireAngel’s CO-9D there is an early visual warning that CO is present. When CO is first detected the alarm indicates it’s presence by displaying the level on the screen in parts per million (ppm). If CO continues to be present additional bars will 42 appear on the graph. When the graph is full (i.e. the 6th segment is shown the unit will sound a loud audible alarm (85 dB at 1m (3 feet)) and the Alarm LED below the symbol on the front of the detector will flash red once every second. The Alarm will sound • Between 60 and 90 minutes when exposed to a minimum of 50ppm of CO. • Between 10 and 40 minutes when exposed to a minimum of 100ppm of CO. • Within 3 minutes when exposed to a minimum of 300ppm of CO. Alarm silence It is possible to temporarily silence the alarm up to two times if the level of CO that triggered the alarm is less than 200ppm. After ventilating the property you can temporarily silence the alarm by pressing the Test/Mode button, the alarm will stop and the silence mode symbol will appear on the screen. The silence mode will last for up to 3 minutes. If the CO level remains too high the alarm will trigger again or if the level of CO rises above 200ppm then the detector will automatically re-enter alarm mode. If the level of CO has fallen to a satisfactory level the silence mode icon will disappear, the unit will exit alarm mode and the segments of the bar graph will slowly disappear as the CO in the sensor clears. Alarm in absence: If the Peak level reading symbol is showing on the screen but there is no full alarm sound and you are not pressing the test button, then your detector is warning that it has detected Carbon Monoxide in your absence. Immediately vacate the premises and seek medical attention for anyone suffering the effects of CO poisoning (headache, nausea). Error signal The unit continuously checks the settings of its sensor and circuitry. If any of these settings are found to be incorrect, the detector will emit a single chirp once per minute and the display will show “Err” for error and an error code,cycling between “Err”and the particular error code. Low power pack signal If the power pack becomes low then the detector will emit a single chirp once per minute and the low power pack icon will flash on the screen. ! IMPORTANT: A single chirp once per minute together with an error signal 14 or low power pack warning does NOT mean that the detector has detected carbon monoxide. If you experience an error condition or low power pack warning and the product is still within warranty then contact FireAngel technical support. If the product is no longer in warranty replace immediately! ! IMPORTANT: The selected power pack was chosen to provide power beyond the lifetime of the product, in particular the sensor (under normal operating conditions). The operational life of the sensor is seven years, for this reason, the detector should be replaced after seven years from the date of installation. FireAngel Technical Support Line 9.00am – 5.00pm, Monday – Friday Telephone: 0800 141 2561 (1-800 523171 in EIRE) Maintenance Your detector will alert you to potentially hazardous CO concentrations in your motorhome when maintained properly. To maintain your FireAngel detector in proper working order, and to ensure that the sensor will last for the lifetime of the product, it is recommended that you: • Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry of your detector at least once per week by pressing the Test/Reset button briefly (see above). SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y Treat this as a serious warning. Call a qualified technician and have the problem investigated and rectified immediately. • Perform the Sensor Test once every month (See p39). • Keep the detector free of dust by gently vacuuming the case with a soft brush attachment once per month. To prevent the possibility of contaminating the sensor in your detector and thus affecting its reliability: • Never use cleaning solutions on your detector. Simply wipe with a slightly damp cloth. • Do not paint the detector. • Do not spray aerosols on or near the detector. • Do not use any solvent based products near the detector. • Move the detector to a safe location and store in a plastic bag before painting, wall papering, or performing any other activities using substances that emit strong fumes. Remember to remove it from the bag and replace the detector when these activities are finished. Failure of any test should be reported to the Fireangel Technical Support Team. Do not attempt to repair your CO detector. Do not remove any screws or open the main casing of your detector. Any attempt to do so may cause malfunction and will invalidate the warranty. e-mail: [email protected] 43 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY CO ALARM What to do in the event of an alarm ! WARNING: A loud alarm is a warning that unusually high and potentially lethal levels of carbon monoxide are present. Never ignore this alarm, further exposure can be fatal. Immediately check residents for symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning, and contact the proper authorities to resolve all CO problems. NEVER IGNORE ANY ALARM. Please carefully review this owner’s manual to ensure that you know what actions to take in the event of an alarm. What to do during an alarm Within 3 minutes when exposed to a minimum of 300ppm of CO. • Keep calm and open the doors and windows to ventilate the property. • Stop using all fuel burning appliances and ensure, if possible, that they are turned off • Evacuate the motorhome leaving the doors and windows open. • Do not re-enter the motorhome until the alarm has stopped. When exposed to fresh air it can take up to 10 minutes for the sensor to clear and the alarm to stop depending on the level of carbon monoxide detected. • Get medical help immediately for anyone suffering the effects of carbon monoxide poisoning (headache, nausea), and advise that carbon monoxide poisoning is suspected. • Do not use the appliance again until it has been checked by an expert. In the case of gas appliances the engineer must be gas safe registered. 44 Note: If the level of CO in the sensor doesn’t reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test mode will time out and finish automatically after 3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t reach 50ppm, as long as the display shows a reading of CO then you can be confident that the alarm is working correctly. If you have any questions about testing the sensor please contact the technical support team Disposal Waste electrical products should not be disposed of with regular household waste. Please recycle where facilities exist. Check with your local authority, retailer or manufacturer for recycling/disposal advice as regional variations apply. The power pack should be deactivated before disposal. To do this, insert the two ends of the metal clip on the end of the disabling tab back in to the socket located on the underside of the detector. If the disabling tab is no longer available then the clip can be replicated by opening out a thin metal paperclip into a U-shape. You can also return your carbon monoxide detector to Fireangel for disposal. For return address contact Fireangel Technical Support. Please include a note confirming the product is being returned for disposal. Technical Information Detector Specifications: Model CO-9D Sensor Type: Electrochemical Sensor Life: 7 Years Alarm Sound Level: 85dB at 1 metre (3 feet) Power Pack Life: 7 years (Life of product) Temperature Range: -10ºC (14ºF) to 40ºC (104ºF) Operating Humidity Range: 30 - 90% RH Weight: 120 grams (4.23oz) Certified to: BS EN 50291:2001 This FireAngel carbon monoxide detector is designed to continuously monitor for CO. Its response times meet the requirements of BSI standard BS EN 50291:2001. OPEN - DO NOT BURN ! WARNING: APPARATUS CONFORMING TO THIS STANDARD MAY NOT PROTECT PEOPLE WHO ARE AT SPECIAL RISK FROM CARBON MONOXIDE EXPOSURE BY REASON OF AGE, PREGNANCY OR MEDICAL CONDITION. IF IN DOUBT, CONSULT YOUR DOCTOR. A CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR A SMOKE ALARM OR A COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR. REPLACE UNIT AFTER 7 YEARS OF OPERATION. 7 Year Warranty FireAngel Ltd warrants to the original purchaser that its enclosed carbon monoxide alarm be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal residential use and service for a period of 7 (seven) years from the date of purchase. Provided it is returned with postage paid and proof of purchase date, FireAngel Ltd hereby warrants that during the 7 (seven) year period commencing from the date of purchase FireAngel Ltd, at its discretion, agrees to replace the unit free of charge. The warranty on any replacement CO-9D alarm, will last for the remainder of the period of the original warranty in respect of the alarm originally purchased – that is from the date of original purchase and not from the date of receipt of the replacement product. FireAngel Ltd reserves the right to offer an alternative product similar to that being replaced if the original model is no longer available or in stock. This warranty applies to the original retail purchaser from the date of original retail purchase and is not transferable. Proof of purchase is required. This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident, misuse, disassembly, abuse or lack of reasonable care of the product, or applications not in accordance with the user manual. It does not cover events and conditions outside of FireAngel Ltd’s control, such as Acts of God (fire, severe weather etc.). It does not apply to retail stores, service centres or any distributors or agents. FireAngel Ltd will not recognise any changes to this warranty by third parties. FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by the breach of any expressed or implied warranty. Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose is limited in duration for 7 (seven) years. This warranty does not affect your statutory rights. Except for death or personal injury, FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any loss of use, damage, cost or expense relating to this product or for any indirect, or consequentia loss, damages or costs incurred by you or any other user of this product. SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y ! WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO 45 S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY SAFETY AND SECURITY 46 ARRIVAL AT SITE A RRIVA L AT S IT E Positioning the motorhome.........................................................................................................48 47 A RRIVA L AT SITE POSITIONING THE MOTORHOME Positioning the motorhome Note: Check and observe site regulations. Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed. Adhere to speed limits. Note that these are generally 10mph. (Remember that the stopping distance on grass is considerably greater than on tarmac.) Only a person in possession of a current driving licence may drive on the site. Selecting a pitch Do not pitch in such a position that your motorhome will obstruct others coming in. Try to choose an area which is dry, reasonably level and preferably with a hard base. If you have no alternative but to pitch on a slope try to ensure that you are facing down the slope, for when you leave. Levelling the motorhome Levelling must be carried out in both directions for the refrigerator and other equipment to function correctly. Stepped levelling boards (Fig. A) or proprietary ramps are ideal for this purpose. Levelling pads or boards should be used under the steadies where the ground is soft or uneven. Fig. A Stepped levelling board 48 Fig. A Winding the corner steady Lower the rear corner steadies (if fitted) until they are in firm contact with the ground (Fig. A). DO NOT use the steadies as a jack, they are only a means of stabilising the rear of the motorhome. Levelling pads or boards should be used under the steadies where the ground is soft or uneven. Awnings and Tents Awnings and tents should only be used when permission has been obtained. When on grass and staying for more than a few days the ground sheet and/or side flaps of awnings should be periodically raised in order to avoid damage to the ground. SERVICES Pressure switches................................................................................................................... 55 Pressure switch adjustment..................................................................................................... 55 SE RVICE S Water System ......................................................................................................................... 50 Pressure switch troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 56 Water level sensor & cleaning.................................................................................................. 57 Water faults............................................................................................................................. 58 Gas schematic drawings......................................................................................................... 60 Gas ........................................................................................................................................ 61 Types of gas ........................................................................................................................... 62 En-route heating...................................................................................................................... 63 Gas safety advice ................................................................................................................... 64 Gas Fault Finding .................................................................................................................... 66 Electrical system ..................................................................................................................... 67 Overseas connection .............................................................................................................. 67 230V mains electrical equipment power consumption ............................................................ 68 Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet .......................................................... 69 Typical appliance consumption figures ................................................................................... 70 49 S E RVICE S WATER SYSTEM Water system - Introduction All Swift Group motorhome water systems have been designed around a pump fitted within the motorhome. This pump draws water from an under floor or internal water tank, to provide water pressure within the water system, whenever it is switched on and water is available. The schematic below shows the basic configuration of the water system: When power is supplied to the pump, it will draw water from the water tank, and pump it to the motorhome taps, shower and water heater. The pump is fitted with its own pressure switch, and the pump will continue to pump water, until the pressure of water on the output of the pump reaches a pre-set level. For this pressure to be achieved, the taps must be closed. When the taps are opened, water will leave the tap via the spout, and the pressure in the pipes between the pump and the taps will reduce. Because of this reduction in pressure, the pressure switch on the pump will switch back on and the pump will again run to pump more water. Close to the pump, the water under pressure is split into two paths: 50 1. Through blue water pipes routed directly to the cold connection of each tap. 2. To the water heater. Water from the pump enters the bottom of the water heater. Once the water fills the water heater (typically 10 litres), water then leaves the water heater via a connection at the top of that water heater. This water, which is still under pressure, then routes to the hot connection of each tap via the red pipes. To winterise the system please see separate details later in this handbook. WATER SYSTEM 1. All fittings, including the holding tank, water pipes, taps and connections are of food quality material (to BS6920) and therefore, should not affect the quality of the water used. It is recommended however, that the system is flushed through twice before it is used for the first time, and always cleaned/ flushed after it has stood unused for a period of time (eg over the winter period). Care has been taken (using smooth bore pipes etc) to eliminate as many water traps as possible. 2. When filling the fresh water system remember to check that the water source is suitable for use as drinking water and, if you are using a hose pipe or water carrier, that it is also made from nontoxic materials (preferably food quality material). 3. Depending on specification level, the fresh water tank may be drained either by a handle within a seat or other storage space, or by using a furniture mounted switch to open an electrically operated valve. The handle operated valve can be seen in the image 'Kon Tiki drain valve' below. The furniture mounted switch will be printed with a graphic similar to that shown in the image 'Fresh tank drain valve switch', and will normally be fitted to the furniture above the entrance door. For the handle operated valve, 90deg of movement is required to alternate between 'open' and 'closed'. For the electrically operated 12v power is switched on at the control panel, and then press and hold (for a few seconds) the top of the switch to close the valve, or press and hold the bottom of the switch to open the valve. SE RVICE S Fresh water system Escape fresh water tank showing central cleaning hatch Kon-Tiki Drain valve Fresh and Waste tank drain switch 51 S E RVICE S WATER SYSTEM ! WARNING: The fresh water system is pressurised by a pump which will continue to operate until it senses a pre-set pressure in the system. If the fresh water tank is completely empty the pump will be unable to pressurise the system and will operate continuously. In this situation it is essential that, in order to avoid damage to the pump, it is switched off using the pump isolator switch on the distribution panel until such time as the water tank has been filled. Tank heaters Depending on specification, your motorhome may be fitted with 12v tank heaters, designed to prevent or reduce instances of freezing water in fitted water tanks. If tank heaters are fitted, they can be turned on via the control panel feature of the Swift Command panel above the entrance door (see page 72/73). Turn this feature on when the external temperatures are low, and the tank heaters will then turn on and off automatically. Lockable water filler inlet Fresh Water Tank Your motorhome is fitted with a water tank filled from the outside via a lockable water filler cap. When filling, use a hose manufactured from non toxic material, to prevent tainting of the water. Remember, if the water heater has been drained it will require 10 litre (0.2 gal) of water to fill it. External 12v Fill Socket Depending on specification your motorhome may be fitted with an external 12v socket which can be used to attach an external 12v tank filling pump. 52 Before heating each tank the system will check that the water level in each tank is at the 1/4 level or higher (the heaters will not operate if the tank is 'empty'). If the water level is appropriate, the heaters will then switch on. The fresh and waste water tank heaters can operate independently, for instance use of frost protect feature while the fresh tank is full, but waste tank is empty, would only result in the operation of the fresh tank heater. Please note that the heating elements use a 12V supply, and if used without a mains hook up and charger operating, then leisure battery power consumption will be increased (see consumption table on page 68 for more information.) PRIMING & CLEANING WATER SYSTEM Cleaning water system 1. Close the water tank drain valve or re-fit the drain bung. (Model specific) Clean the water system at the start and end of the season with sterilising fluid. 2. Fill the water tank with water. Sterilising 3. Close the water heater drain valve (see boiler instructions in the fitted equipment section) When cleaning the water system at the start or the end of the season it is advisable to use a suitable sterilising fluid available from your motorhome dealer. The fluid must be suitable for use with stainless steel components 4. Open all the taps except the shower tap. Mixer taps should be opened in the central position so that both the hot and cold pipes are purged of air. Ensure the tap spouts are over the sinks. 5. Turn on the pump using the button on the control panel (See pump button in paragraph 2.5 of the Electrics section). 6. Turn each tap off in turn as and when the air is expelled and the water runs smoothly from each tap. Move the mixer taps to hot and then cold to check that the air is out of both the hot and cold pipes before turning them off. SE RVICE S Priming the Water System Flush the system thoroughly to remove the effective fluid traces. When water is first introduced, or the water supply in the internal tank, runs out, air will be present in the pipework. It is important that every tap is run to remove any air in the system before, for instance, the shower is used. Air left in pipework local to a tap can act as an accumulator and affect the ratio of hot and cold water flowing from other taps or shower mixers in the system. 7. Whilst holding the shower head down towards the shower drain, open the shower tap and shower head tap until all the air is expelled and the water runs smoothly. Turn the shower taps off. 8. Top up the fresh tank with water. Please note that priming the system will automatically fill the water heater with water. Please ensure all taps are fully turned off when not in use (except when winterising). Note: All tanks are fitted with a breather which acts as an overflow. Overfilling a tank will result in water being expelled from the overflow outside the vehicle. 53 S E RVICE S CLEANING WATER SYSTEM System care Allowing water to freeze in the system may result in damage to the pump and plumbing system. Non-Toxic antifreeze for potable water may be used with Truma pumps. Follow manufacturers recommendations. Do not use automotive antifreeze to winterize potable water systems. These solutions are highly toxic and may cause serious injury or death if ingested. Sanitising The water systems, and in particular storage tanks, in motorhomes are susceptible to contamination by bacteria if care is not taken with their use and cleaning. The symptoms caused by bacterial contamination are not purely limited to gastro-intestinal diseases, but may also manifest themselves as ear, nose, throat, eye or skin infections. It is therefore important that you carry out the following procedure prior to using the motorhome each time, even if you boil or filter all water you use for drinking. Separate Water Containers 1. All water remaining in the container should be disposed of so that the container is empty. 2. The outside of the container should be thoroughly cleansed and washed down to remove any dirt, dust or other contaminant. Water at a suitably hot temperature containing an appropriate detergent is recommended for this purpose. 3. Water should be put in the container, swirled around, then emptied out. 4. The container should then be totally filled with water containing an appropriate sterilant solution and allowed to stand for the recommended contact time. 5. The solution should be emptied from the container. 6. The opening of the container should be cleaned thoroughly with an appropriate prepared wipe impregnated with a sterilant. 54 7. The container should be inverted whilst stored overnight (if possible). 8. The container must be filled with mains water only and mains water only should be used for the above cleaning procedure. 9. On no account should garden hoses be used to fill water tanks. For Systems: 1. Drain down the system (open all taps to allow air in, enabling the system to drain quickly). 2. Remove any water filters fitted, and replace with a short length of hose or empty filter cartridge (this will ensure the filter is not affected by the disinfectant/ sterilant solution). 3. Fill the water system with a disinfectant/ sterilant solution (check that the solution at full strength appears at all taps/showers). Allow to stand for the recommended period of time. 4. Drain the system completely. 5. Thoroughly clean the outside of all taps/ connectors with a cloth soaked in the disinfectant/sterilant. 6. Flush the system through with clean drinking water until no traces of disinfectant/sterilant can be detected at any tap. Suitable sterilising chemicals are available from your motorhome dealer, accessory shop, chemist or home-brew shops. It is not, however, recommended to use bleach or sodium metabisulphite. Sterilising Do not use products that contain aggressive agents for sterlising the water system. Always use products designed for stainless steel tanks available from your motorhome dealer. Note: Never use the water heating system when disinfectant/sterilising fluid is present. Doing so may damage the system. PRESSURE SWITCH Pressure switch adjustment 2. In order to eliminate unpleasant odours as much as possible, only smooth bore pipes are used. • All of the Truma/Flo-Jet pumps used by Swift are pre-set at 25psi - 31psi. owever, should the waste water tank be H overfilled, it is possible the waste water will backfill the drain pipes until it eventually appears in the shower base. In order to prevent this, please take note of part 3. 3. The waste water gauge shows levels of the tank in quarter increments, and it is recommended that the waste water tank level is checked on a daily basis, emptying the tank when required. The tank can be drained by using either a handle within a bed or storage space, or, by using a furniture mounted switch. Pressure Switch Adjustment, Truma/Flo-Jet pump. (Normally Grey upper section with White lower section/valve housing) • To further adjust the pressure switch setting, a cover cap must be first be removed from the end of the pump to reveal a pressure adjusting screw, as shown in the photos. A maximum of 1/4 turn clockwise or anti-clockwise, from the factory setting, is advised. Turning the screw clockwise 1/4 turn will increase the pressure switch cut-out pressure, turning the screw anti-clockwise will reduce the pressure setting. • Please note a second screw mounted below the cover cap is set in position with threadlock, this should not be disturbed. The manual/handle operated drain valve will take the same appearance as that shown for the fresh water tank, on page 51. If a furniture mounted switch is fitted, it will be printed with a graphics similar to the image 'waste drain valve switch, below, and will usually be positioned on the furniture above the entrance door. Waste tank drain switch See page 51 fresh tank details for further information Pressure switch The purpose of a pressure switch is to monitor the pressure on the outlet side of the pump. When a tap is closed, and the pump continues to run, there is an increase of pressure in the system, and when that pressure reaches a pre-set limit, the pressure switch will turn the pump off. SE RVICE S Waste water system 1. The waste water holding tank is secured underneath the chassis of your motorhome and is gravity fed. Cover cap Pressure switch adjusting screw The pump may have to be removed to gain access to the adjusting screw. Drain the water system before removing the pump. To remove the pump pull the blue taps at right angles to the pipe work and lift the pump out. 55 S E RVICE S PRESSURE SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Pump will not start, when the tap is opened: • Check fuse(s). • Check power source(s), and ensure there is sufficient voltage to run the pump. • Ensure 'pump' LED is illuminated. • Check for leaks on the high pressure side of the pump. • Ensure water system has been primed correctly, as per the handbook, and there are no air-locks present. • Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power at the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as there maybe damaged cabling or a fault with the fusebox. • Ensure the pump is securely mounted. • Is the pump hot? If so, allow to cool before retrying. • The pressure switch may need adjusting. (See pressure switch paragraph in this section for how to do this) • Has the vehicle been stored over winter? was it correctly winterised? If no, the pump may have frozen, causing permanent damage. • The pressure switch may need adjusting. (See pressure switch paragraph in this section for how to do this) Pump runs, but will not pressurise system (i.e. no or little water being discharged from taps) - Not Pulsing: • Ensure that there is water in the fresh water tank. • Check in-line filter is free from debris and correctly fitted. • Ensure water system has been primed correctly, (see priming the water system page 53), and there are no air-locks present. • Ensure there are no restrictions in the plumbing. • Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power at the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as there maybe damaged cabling or a fault with the fusebox. • Ensure the inlet side of the pump is watertight and not allowing air into the system. • Using a multimeter check that the voltage is between 10 and 14.5 volts. If not, refer to your dealer. 56 Pump continues to run (for more than 5 seconds) after taps are closed or pump turns on for no reason: • Ensure the piping on the high pressure side of the pump is in good condition (not blowing or deforming). Noisy or rough operation • Check for leaks on the high pressure and low pressure side of the pump. • Ensure that all pipes (especially those within 150mm of the pump) are not touching any furniture. • Ensure the pump is securley mounted Pump rapidly cycles (switches on or off) or water pulses from taps, including temperature pulsing: • Check for leaks on the high pressure and low pressure side of the pump. • Ensure there are no restrictions in the plumbing • The pressure switch may need adjusting. (See pressure switch paragraph in this section for how to do this) WATER LEVEL SENSOR & CLEANING Principle The sensor, fitted to Swift Group motorhomes are pre-fitted to water tanks, and link to the control unit, via a pre-fitted wiring harness. The sensors, which consist of a number of stainless steel rods or probes, at different lengths, are immersed in the fresh or waste water, and use the conductivity of water, between the probes, to provide a reading to the control unit. SE RVICE S Water level sensor & cleaning The sensors are 'digital', in that while the conductivity (resistance) value can vary, the fusebox will register any conductivity between the reference probe and the various different length probes, indicating water present. Normally, even if the rods are dirty, and providing the rods have not bridged by a foreign object, a circuit will still be delivered back to the control unit and a water level displayed. Sensor cleaning The first step, in case of fault diagnosis, is to clean the sensor rods. False water level readings at the control unit can be caused by calcium build-up or foreign objects within the tank bridging the probes. (Especially with waste tanks). To clean sensor: ! WARNING: Only use food safe plastic mesh scourers, which are suitable for domestic use, for cleaning the sensor studs. 1. Remove the sensor from the tank 2. Check the probes for build up of contamination 3. Use clean soapy water 4. Place scourer in water to dampen 5. Apply scourer to the sensor probes with limited pressure 6. Rub sensor probes removing contamination 7. Swill sensor probes with fresh clean water 8. Replace sensor into tank. 57 S E RVICE S WATER FAULTS Water Fault Cause Remedy Water not flowing from any tap when operated but pump runs Freshwater tank empty Check Pump wired in reverse Check wiring, refer to pump manufacturers instructions Pipe inlet or outlet pipe disconnected Check connections Pump pipes restricted by kinking Check pipes run Blockage in pump inlet or outlet pipe Check, starting inside freshwater tank Blocked pump filter Dismantle and clean filter. See pump manufactures instructions. Air leak in suction line to pump Check condition of pipe and pipe joints between the water tank and the pump. Frozen pipes Pump does not run Water flows from cold tap but not from hot 58 Pump incorrectly wired Refer to pump manufacturers instructions Pump fuse blown Check wiring connection and then replace with fuse of correct rating Battery disconnected Check connections Pump seized or overheated Refer to pump manufacturers servicing instructions Pressure pump sensing switch may have failed Refer to pump manufacturers servicing instructions Contacts may be faulty Check contacts in plug and socket are clean and making contact Wiring connections may be faulty Check wiring connections Blockage in hot pipeline Disconnect pipes and inspect Heater inlet or outlet pipes kinked preventing flow Check and re-route if necessary. Hot tap failed or blocked Disconnect and inspect Heater non-return valve jammed Seek service attention WATER FAULTS Fault Cause Remedy Water flows from hot tap but has reduced flow from cold Cold water pipe kinked preventing flow Check and re-route if necessary Blockage in cold pipe line Disconnect pipes after 1st connector and check up to tap Cold tap not connected Refer to installation instructions Cold tap failed or blocked Disconnect and inspect Battery condition low causing pump to run slowly Check battery state of charge, refer to electrical supply note If new taps have been fitted they may be restricting flow Disconnect and check that they have at least 1/4” (6.3mm) bore Pump needs servicing Refer to pump servicing instructions Partially blocked pump filter or in-line filter, if fitted Dismantle and clean if necessary Pump outlet pipe kinked restricting flow Check and re-route if necessary Water leak Check all water connections Reduced flow from either tap Pipe kinking restricting flow Check and re-route if necessary Bore size difference in taps Use taps of equal bore size If pump motor runs steadily and will not stop Battery voltage may be too low (below 10.5 volts) Check that there is water in the container Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery Check all connections in pipework Reduced flow from both hot and cold taps SE RVICE S Water 59 60 Gas Cylinder BBQ (when fitted) Typical gas schematic drawing with Combi or Alde Boiler Regulator Alde or Truma heating Appliance Manifold Fridge Hob/Grill/Oven Or Hob and Grill Oven / Hob S E RVICE S GAS SCHE MATIC GAS General information Gas Cylinders Bottled Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) is the most convenient portable source of fuel for your vehicle. The gas cylinder, cooking and heating appliances should be isolated when travelling unless your motorhome is fitted with en-route heating. Regularly check flexible gas hose, joints and connections for tightness. Finally make sure that each gas appliance is working efficiently to the recommendations of the appliance manufacturers. The LPG system should be inspected annually by a competent person. Only use gas cylinders that are located within their dedicated position within the gas bottle housing, never extend the hose - hose lengths must not exceed 400mm. Your vehicle is supplied with a wall mounted gas regulator plumbed inside the gas bottle compartment. The regulator and all appliances work at a harmonised 30mb pressure, which work with Butane and Propane gas. Pressure regulation system in this vehicle has a fixed working pressure of 30 mbar with a flow rate of 1.5 kg/H and complies with the requirements of EN 12864 annex D. We do not recommend the use of an inline LPG BBQ with the 1.5kg/H regulator when other LPG appliances are in use. time. If you are in any doubt please consult your dealer for advice. To use point proceed as follows: 1. Fit male tail connector from despatch kit to your barbeque or appliance ensuring a gas tight joint. The work should be carried out by a competent person; if in any doubt consult your dealer. SE RVICE S Gas 2. Open box lid by pulling tab on bottom edge and lifting, while pressing on centre of flap. 3. Insert tail connector on appliance into female coupling, twist to engage and lock. 4. Open gas locker on motorhome, ensure gas bottle tap is open and supply is connected to regulator. 5. Light and operate appliance to its instructions. Please note that you cannot open the gas supply until the nozzle has been inserted. In the interest of safety all external hose lengths should be kept to a minimum and attachments secured correctly. ! WARNING: Care should be taken when using the external barbeque point. Never barbeque next to an awning or tent. ! WARNING: The motorhome barbeque point should only be used as an outlet point for gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to the outlet. ! WARNING: Unless en-route heating is in use the LPG cylinder valve should be closed when driving. Motorhomes with external barbeque point Models equipped with an external barbeque point can be used to power any gas appliance suitable for the gas used in the motorhome, at the working pressure shown on the label in the barbeque outlet box. Please note when using the outlet that the fitted regulator will allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the consumption of gas from both the appliances within the motorhome and the appliance connected to the barbeque point cannot exceed a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one Gas Hoses High-pressure hoses or pigtails as they are called must be used with the new style regulator. High-pressure hoses incorporate a safety shut off valve for the use of the en-route heating system. LPG cylinder i.e. Propane, Butane, BP and Camping Gaz cylinders all have unique bottle adaptor connections. 61 S E RVICE S GAS It is important to check you have the correct hose and adaptor to suit your gas cylinders. Push on hoses are no longer permitted under the latest regulations. The new high-pressure hoses have threaded connections and must be securely attached to the regulator and to the gas cylinder. The hose connection to the pressure regulator relies upon a sealing washer(s) to maintain a gas tight joint, and it is essential to check that the washer is present, sound and correctly positioned prior to making the connection. The gas cylinder connection relies on a metal seating or bull nose connection to obtain a gas tight joint, therefore it is essential that the mating surfaces are clean and undamaged. In no case should a damaged valve or connection be used. Ensure that there is a constant rise in the flexible gas hose between the gas cylinder outlet and the regulator elbow. ! WARNING: Inspect flexible gas hose(s) regularly for deterioration and renew as necessary with the approved type, in any case no later than 5 years after the date of manufacture marked on the hose. When replacing the en-route hose ensure the new hose incorporates a safety shut off valve (Hose rupture protection). ! WARNING: Ensure that the high pressure hose is not excessively twisted or under stress when connected to the LPG cylinders and regulator. ! WARNING: Always ensure the gas supply is isolated at the LPG cylinder (and not at the regulator) whilst the vehicle is in storage for any period. It is important to ensure that the high pressure gas hose has a continuous rise from the bottle cylinder to the regulation to allow any condensate to fall back into the gas bottle cylinder. Cylinder compartment 62 All cylinder compartments have four plastic mouldings per cylinder position fitted to the floor of the compartment that are designed to fit both steel and BP Gas Light cylinders. Two straps are provided for retaining the bodies of the cylinders at mid to high level. Types of gas Propane Propane is supplied in red, or partly red cylinders which have a female left hand threaded connector. Scandinavian countries use the same connector. Germany and Austria supply propane with a male connection. Propane will work at temperatures as low as -40°C and is therefore suitable for all winter motorhoming. Note: Swift recommend that 6kg CalorLite propane cylinders are used. However the cylinder compartments can also house various cylinders dependant on model. Escape 1 x 6kg +1 x 13kg Rio 2 x 6kg Bessacarr/Bolero/ Kon Tiki 2 x 13kg Bessacarr 424 - 2 x 6kg Butane Butane is supplied in the U.K. in green or blue cylinders. All these have a male left hand thread EXCEPT for Camping Gaz which has a special female right hand thread and Calor 7kg and 15kg and aluminium bottles which have a special clip-on connection. Continental cylinders usually have a male left hand thread similar to but not identical with U.K. butane. Butane is only suitable for use at temperatures down to 2°C but will not work below that. Note: A hose suitable for use with propane has been supplied with your motorhome. For en-route systems only. EN-ROUTE HEATING • Press the hose-break safety device Swift Group motorhomes are equipped with an LPG en-route heating system. The en-route heating system is installed with additional safety features. Check the hose connection to the cylinder valve for leaks. ! WARNING: When re-fuelling your motorhome, switch off the heater and close the cylinder valve. Safety features • MonoControl CS regulator incorporating a crash sensor which stops the gas flow in the event of the motorhome being involved in a traffic collision. • Gas flow monitor • Hose rupture protection is installed. The full system is Homologated in compliance with UN ECE regulation 122 Operating instructions Priming the gas system • Open the cylinder’s valve. (1) • Firmly press the hose rupture protection (green button) on the high pressure hose. (2) If necessary (e.g. if the regulator has been knocked when replacing a LPG cylinder) press the green reset button on the regulator. (3) SE RVICE S En-route heating ! WARNING: To ensure the safe working of the en-route heating any replacement high pressure hoses must be of the same type as originally fitted. They must have the safety valve to ensure that the gas does not leak out in the event of damage to the gas pipe work in the event of a traffic collision. ! WARNING: When travelling using the en-route system all other LPG appliance shut off valves must be in the closed position including the fridge, cooker, water heater etc. Note: It is dangerous and illegal to operate other LPG appliances whilst travelling Note: Service and repairs must only be carried out by a competent service engineer. ! WARNING: When leaving the motorhome for any period of time or storage always turn off the gas at the gas cylinder. • Start the gas-burning devices if desired. Note: The regulator should be replaced no more than ten years after manufacture. Changing a gas cylinder Please use the correct size spanner for the gas hose connectors as this will prevent damage to the screw fittings and ensure that the fitting is tightened sufficiently. • Turn off all gas appliances • Close the empty gas cylinder’s valve • Remove the high pressure hose from the gas cylinder. • Attach the high pressure hose to the full gas cylinder. • Open the full cylinder’s valve. 63 S E RVICE S GAS SAFETY ADVICE Gas safety advice ! WARNING: If you smell gas or suspect a leak or in the event of a fire and if it is safe to do so, isolate the gas appliances and turn off the gas bottles at the regulator. Evacuate the motorhome and ventilate. Seek professional advice as to the cause of the leak. Facts about LPG • LPG is not poisonous. • Bi-products are harmless. • There is danger if all air and oxygen were excluded. • (Ventilation holes must be kept clear at all times). • LPG has been given a smell by the manufacturers in order to identify leaks. Awning Spaces LPG Appliance Exhaust There is no danger of pollution of an enclosed awning space by the LPG exhaust from a refrigerator venting into it, as awning spaces are generally well ventilated. Space heaters may produce sufficient exhaust to pollute the awning space, if it is totally enclosed, from a general comfort, smell and hygiene point of view. In the extreme case there could be a build up of carbon dioxide to a dangerous level. Motorhome owners are advised to allow some fresh air circulation in the awning space when such appliances are in use. General Safety Notes In the event of leaks in the gas system or if there is a smell of gas: • Extinguish all naked flames. • Do not smoke. • Switch off the appliance and gas cylinder. • Open the windows. • Do not operate any electrical switches. • Have the entire system checked by an expert. 64 Precautions a. Never look for a leak with a match. Always use a soap solution or its equivalent when testing connections. Do not operate any electrical apparatus whatsoever, especially light switches. If the leak is not obvious, the motorhome should be evacuated and qualified personnel consulted. b. Avoid naked lights when connecting or changing a cylinder. c. Check the flexible hose frequently. d. The gas is heavier than air and therefore sinks to the lowest point. e. Keep bottle gas containers outside (and protected against frost). If they must be kept inside make sure they are well away from heat. ! WARNING: Do not use appliances with a different working pressure to 30mbar. ! WARNING: Maintain adequate spacing of combustible materials from sources of heat. ! WARNING: Do not use independent portable gas appliances inside the vehicle. Cookers shall not be used as heaters. ! WARNING: A BBQ point inlet valve, if fitted, must only be used for the connection of portable LPG appliances. Always read individual appliance instructions ! WARNING: If in doubt, ask! GAS SAFETY ADVICE Thermal insulation heating Ensure that the gas regulator hose is correctly connected to the gas cylinder in gas bottle compartment and that the hose connection is tight. Your motorhome has been designed to achieve a thermal insulation and heating level for specific climatic conditions when tested according to the procedure in EN1646-1. See the motorhome technical book for the classification of your motorhome. Gas cylinders must be fully located, seated at the base of the bottles and restrained by the straps provided in the dedicated compartment position. Straps are positioned to suit 6kg, 7kg and 13kg bottles. ! WARNING: If using cylinders other All Swift Group motorhomes achieve a Grade 3 classification. The classifications are as follows: Grade 1 than those recommended, the user must ensure these are adequately supported, ventilation openings must not be obstructed and the cylinders must not cause damage to other fixtures and fittings located in the compartment. Open ended gas hoses must always be protected from dirt and insects. Before turning on the gas supply at the regulator, ensure that all gas operated equipment in the motorhome is turned off. All gas equipment is supplied through a Gas Manifold System which has individual isolation taps for each appliance (Fig A), as follows: ON Fig. A SE RVICE S Connection A motorhome with an average thermal transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.7w/(m2k). Grade 2 A motorhome with an average thermal transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.7w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average temperature difference of at least 20°C between inside and outside temperatures when the outside temperature is 0°C. Grade 3 A motorhome with an average thermal transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.2w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average temperature difference of at least 35°C between inside and outside temperatures when the outside temperature is -15°C. OFF RED - W ater Heater / Combination boiler BLUE - Fridge GREEN - Oven Flue installations All flue installations should be inspected once a year throughout their length for corrosion. Flues should be replaced if any sign of perforation is found. Ensure that the replacement is of an approved type. 65 S E RVICE S GAS FAULTS Gas Fault Cause Remedy Hob does not light No gas Check level of gas in cylinder Check gas cylinder valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to hob manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in cylinder Check gas cylinder valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to oven manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in cylinder Check gas cylinder valve is on Check gas taps are on Over gassed Air in pipe Turn off appliance, wait 2 minutes and try again Purge system No gas Check level of gas in cylinder Check gas cylinder valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in cylinder Check gas cylinder valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to water heater manufacturers instructions Oven does not light BBQ Fridge does not light Combination Heater does not light 66 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM On departure from the campsite General Information • Switch off supply from the site, disconnect the cable at both ends. It is strongly advised that the mains installation is inspected periodically to ensure safe use. The IET (BS7671) wiring regulations recommend that mains installations in motorhomes are re-inspected every 3 years or annually if the van is used frequently. The National Caravan Council lists the qualifications necessary to perform this inspection, but an NICEIC approved contractor is probably the first choice. On arrival at the campsite • Switch off RCD. Note: Never use a mains supply lead whilst coiled. Always uncoil the full length before connecting to the supply and remember to protect the cable from traffic. ! WARNING: Current consumption in the motorhome must not exceed 16 amps or the pitch permitted maximum if this is less than 16 amps. • Check the suitability of the supply, is it AC or DC, is the voltage and frequency correct. Overseas connection • Ensure that there is a proper earth (3 pin socket outlet). • Connection to a mains voltage overseas requires particular attention. • If in doubt consult site staff. • Overseas supplies can be of reverse polarity. • Make sure that the supply from the site is switched off. • Make sure that the charger switch on the PSU is switched off. • Lift the cover on the electricity inlet on the motorhome, and insert the connector on the flexible supply cable. • At the site supply point, connect the other end of the supply cable to this using the socket provided. • Switch on the main switch at the site supply point. Note: It is good practice to test the RCD (Residual Current Device) in the PSU before switching on. There is a test button on the RCD to test the lever, put the lever in the up position (on) before testing. SE RVICE S The electrical system • Reverse polarity results in equipment not necessarily being isolated when turned off, reverse polarity indicator on the PSU will light in the event of reverse polarity. • The only sure way to make equipment safe is to unplug it. • It is useful to have a means of checking polarity when overseas. • If it can be achieved then connect live to live, and neutral to neutral to achieve full electrical protection. ! WARNING: Never allow modifications of electrical or LPG systems and appliances except by qualified persons. Note: As with the RCD it is good practice to check the Miniture Circuit Breaker (MCB) in the PSU. Switch all to the on position (lever up). If any do not stay up then there is a fault. 67 S E RVICE S 230V ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 230V mains electrical equipment power consumption Please note: It is possible that the 230v mains electrical equipment may not all operate simultaneously. A typical UK site mains hook up point provides a maximum output of 10 amps and on some continental sites the available output may be as low as 5 amps. If your loading exceeds the site supply it may trip the site circuit breaker. Please check the available mains supply with your site operator. Similarly loadings on each circuit breaker within the motorhome should be observed. A label positioned close to the MCB’s (Miniture Circuit Breakers will identify which appliances within the motorhome are fed from which MCB. Consulting the typical appliance consumption figures table in conjunction with this label, will give an indication of which appliances can, and cannot, (site supply allowing), be operated simultaneously. 68 EARTH GREEN & YELLOW EARTH BROWN LIVE EARTH NEUTRAL VIEW OF SOCKET TUBES LIVE EARTH LIVE BLUE NEUTRAL EARTH YELLOW & GREEN BROWN LIVE VIEW OF TERMINALS MOTORHOME MAINS INLET NEUTRAL VIEW OF PINS FLEXIBLE 3 CORE CABLE 2.5mm2 SE RVICE S The legal length of the mains inlet cable is 25 ± 2 metres. When in use it must be fully uncoiled and protected from traffic. EARTH GREEN &YELLOW BLUE NEUTRAL VIEW OF TERMINALS EARTH YELLOW & GREEN BLUE NEUTRAL VIEW OF TERMINALS BROWN LIVE CABLE COUPLER NEUTRAL BLACK NEUTRAL LIVE RED FIXED WIRING EARTH NEUTRAL EARTH GREEN & YELLOW LIVE LIVE VIEW OF PINS NEUTRAL BLUE RED LIVE VIEW OF SOCKET TUBES LIVE BROWN FLEXIBLE WIRING EARTH GREEN &YELLOW BLACK NEUTRAL VIEW OF TERMINALS PITCH SUPPLY OUTLET Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet CONNECTING CABLE WIRING 69 70 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not applicable 12v LED lights (each, depending on size of light) Water tank frost element (Winter pack) Powered bed mechanism 2W - 86W Max 240W Max 20 amp 2.5 amp 0.05 amp - 0.5 amp Max 10 amp 0.2 amp - 7.2 amp Not Applicable (cooling fan) 1.2 amp (cooling fan) 1.2 amp Not Applicable Not Applicable 0.4w - 6.1W Max 120W 1.0 amp 1.1 amp (avg) 1.1 amp (avg) Not Applicable (cooling fan) 14.4W 30 W Amperes Only when driving (cooling fan) 14.4W 12 W 13 W 13 W 12V Watts Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 125 g/h/146 g/h 117 g/h Not Applicable 70-161 g/h Not Applicable 245-460 g/h 480 g/h 320 g/h 16 g/h LP GAS Grams/hour item or appliance is operating - ie. a light is illuminated, or a heating system is providing space heating or water heating. Appliances which feature LCD or illuminated control panels can have a low current consumption when in stand by mode, or have a constant low current draw in the background to run their displays and electronics systems - these figures are typically 0.4 amps or less, for each applicable item. These electronic items can in most cases be switched off individually, or, use of the System Shutdown button on the power supply unit isolates all of these items. Note: These are approximate figures for guidance only, and are subject to changes in specification. The figures show energy consumption when an Not Applicable Powered skylight 3.0 amp Omnivent 690W Not Applicable Battery Charger Oven 3.5/3.7 amp Not Applicable 800/850 W Grill Cooker - Electric Hotplate 5.5 amp 4.6/9.1/13.7 amp 3.9/7.8 amp 3.9/7.8 amp 0.8 amp Amperes Not Applicable 1270 W Microwave (factory fit) Cooker - Hob burners 1050/2100/3150 W 900/1800 W 230V Alde Heating System 900/1800 W Truma Combi 6kW Heating system 190 W Watts Truma Combi 4kW Heating system Dometic Refrigerator Appliances Typical appliance consumption figures S E RVICE S TYPICAL APPLIANCE CONSUMPTION ELECTRICS Control Panel System Operation.............................................................................................. 74 Swift Command technical information ..................................................................................... 77 Swift Command Alde heating controls .................................................................................... 83 E L E CT RICS Swift Command power control system.................................................................................... 72 Swift Command Truma Combi CP+ controls .......................................................................... 84 Swift Command system warnings ........................................................................................... 86 Swift Command remote access .............................................................................................. 89 Motorhome Battery ................................................................................................................ 92 Solar panel connection point .................................................................................................. 94 Accessory Harnessing ............................................................................................................ 95 Generator usage ..................................................................................................................... 96 Habitation relay........................................................................................................................ 96 Fault finding............................................................................................................................. 97 Cab Radio - timer setting......................................................................................................... 100 71 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM Fig 1 1. Introduction 2. Using the System This section of the handbook will guide you through the operation of the electrical system. 2.1 Power Supply Unit - Component Layout (see image above) The PSU is located in the bed box or is mounted into furniture. Further technical details are contained in section 3 or in the supporting technical manual available from www.sargentltd.co.uk For the safe operation of all electrical equipment within your Leisure Vehicle it is important that you read and fully understand these instructions. If you are unsure of any point please contact your dealer / distributor for advice before use. The system has a number of key components that you will need to be familiar with before attempting to use the system, these are: • The EC601 & EC651 Power Supply Unit (PSU) - a combined mains consumer unit and 12V controller located in the bed box or upper locker. (Fig 1) • The EC620 Control Panel (CP) - a remotely located user control panel used to turn circuits on and off and to display battery, water tank and other system information. This panel uses simple straightforward controls and reliable data communication to the PSU. (Fig 2) • The PX300 Intelligent Battery charger 300W 72 2.2 Activating the System The EC600 system has a shutdown feature that can be used when the vehicle is in storage. This allows the leisure electronics to be turned off when not required to save battery power. When in the off state the alarm and tracking system supplies are still active, all other supplies are turned off. Before using the system please ensure the system shutdown switch is in the on position (button in). 2.3 Connecting to the Mains 230V supply and Safety checks For your safety it is IMPORTANT that you follow these connections instructions each time your Leisure Vehicle is connected to a mains supply. This section assumes that the system is complete and that a Leisure battery has been installed (see 3.4). A) Ensure suitability of the Mains Supply. Your Leisure Vehicle should only be connected to an approved supply that meets the requirements of BS7671 or relevant H) Check operation of equipment. It is now safe to operate the 12V and 230V equipment. E L E CT RICS harmonised standards. In most cases the site warden will hold information regarding suitability of supply. If using a generator you also need to comply with the requirements / instructions supplied with the generator. Please note that some electronic generators may not be compatible with your leisure system. Further generator operational information is contained elsewhere in this manual. B) Switch the PSU internal Power Converter OFF. Locate the green ‘Charger’ power switch on the PSU and ensure the switch is in the off position (button out) before connection to the mains supply. C) Connect the Hook-up Lead. Firstly connect the supplied hook-up lead (orange cable with blue connectors) to the Leisure Vehicle and then connect to the mains supply. D) Check Residual Current Device operation. Locate the RCD within the PSU and ensure the RCD is switched on (lever in up position). Press the ‘Test’ button and confirm that the RCD turns off (lever in down position). Switch the RCD back to the on position (lever in up position). If the test button failed to operate the RCD see section 3.18. E) Check Miniature Circuit Breakers Locate the MCB’s within the PSU (adjacent to the RCD) and ensure they are all in the on (up) position. If any MCB’s fail to ‘latch’ in the on position see section 3.18. F) Turn the PSU ON. Locate the black ‘Shutdown’ button and ensure it is in the on position (press button in). Locate the green ‘Charger’ switch on the PSU and turn to the on position (press button in). The charger switch will illuminate when turned on. G) Check correct Polarity. Locate the ‘Reverse polarity’ indicator on the PSU and ensure that the indicator is NOT illuminated. If the indicator is illuminated see section 3.18. 73 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM 2.4 Control Panel - Component Layout (see image below) Your control panel will have an appearance as below, but depending on your type of vehicle the control panel features will vary. Not all features are present in all vehicles. Fig 2 2.5 Control Panel Operation Power Button. Press the power button to turn the leisure power on. Press the button again to turn the power off. The adjacent LED will illuminate when the power is on, the screen backlight will turn on and system information will be shown on the LCD display. To avoid night time nuisance the LED and backlight will be turned off after a preset time, see note below. Menu Navigation Up Button. Use the menu up and down buttons to scroll through the various functions. The menu operates on a continuous loop arrangement so you can go up or down to reach all menu items. It is recommended to start in the down direction. Menu Navigation Select Button. Use the select button make a selection or to change a value or setting. This button is also used to select the display or toggle the display information on many menu items. Menu Navigation Down Button. Use the menu up and down buttons to scroll through the various functions. The menu operates on a continuous loop arrangement so you can go up or down to reach all menu items. It is recommended to start in the down direction. 74 E L E CT RICS • Leisure battery, the leisure battery voltage and charging or discharging current is displayed. Use the select button to toggle the display, with voltage on the main display whilst current (in or out of the battery is shown on the bargraph and vice-versa, current on the main display and voltage on the bargraph. • Vehicle battery, when connected the vehicle battery voltage and charging or discharging current is displayed. Use the select button to toggle the display, with voltage on the main display whilst current (in or out of the battery is shown on the bar-graph and vice-versa, current on the main display and voltage on the bar-graph. • Solar Power, the charging current from the solar panel along with the voltage of the battery it is charging is displayed. Use the select button to toggle the display, with voltage on the main display whilst current is shown on the bargraph and vice-versa, current on the main display and voltage on the bargraph. • Select Battery, press the select button toggles between the Leisure and Vehicle batteries as the power source (or battery to be charged). The selected battery is shown in the header area. • Tank-Fill on/off, is not applicable to motorhomes and will not appear on the menu. Menu Tree • Tank Heaters on/off, this feature enables or disables the automatic Fresh & Waste water tank frost protection system. Tank heating will start when the tank level is 25% or higher and the external temperature is under 2 degrees C. • AC Limit, the AC current limiter, when enabled, will monitor the incoming AC current and if the set limit is reached the 230V heating element within the heating system will be temporarily turned off until the current falls below the set limit. Use the select button to set the limit or to turn the feature off. The AC Limit icon in the header indicated that a limit is set and will flash if the limiter is active. • Temperature & Humidity, Pressing the select button scrolls through the internal temperature, internal humidity & external temperature readings. Please note that due to the location of the internal temperature sensor there may be slight differences to the temperature shown on the heating system. • Dimmer %, this display shows the lighting dimming level and is adjusted in 5% increments. The display commences where the level was last set. Press the select button to increase the level up to 100% and then back down again to 5%. Pressing the dimming button on the control panel immediately shows this dimming value. • Heater Settings, this sub menu allows the heater controls and associated settings to be adjusted. A full explanation of the controls can be found in the heater section. • System Settings, this sub menu allows a number of system features to be configured like the Clock, Date, Key beep, Backlight time, LED time, Tank Alarms, Bluetooth Pairing etc. 75 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM Pump Button. With the power on, press the pump button to turn the water pump on. Press the button again to turn the pump off. The adjacent LED will illuminate when the pump is on and the level of the water tank will be shown on the screen. Interior Lights Button. With the power on, press the lights button to turn the main lighting supply on or off. Light Dimming Button. With the power on, press the dimmer button to turn the dimmed lighting on or off. Press the select button to adjust the dimmer level (the menu automatically changes to the adjustment screen). The last setting is remembered. Awning Light Button. With the power on, press the awning light button to turn the awning light on or off. The Adjacent LED will illuminate when the awning light is on. The awning light may also be controlled by the motorhome locking system. Note, display illumination. The LCD back light will illuminate for the pre-set time (default time is 30 seconds) adjustable between 5 and 120 seconds. Setting the timer to 0 seconds will force the backlight to be permanently on. The illumination of the blue LED’s adjacent to the power, pump & awning light buttons can be configured in the same way as the backlight. The screen will wake up if your hand is placed near the panel or if a button is pressed. 2.6 Operation while driving The EC600 system is designed to shutdown parts of the system while the engine is running. This is to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations and to ensure the safe operation of the motorhome. Please ensure the system shutdown switch on the PSU is in the on (button in) position before driving (see 2.2). This will ensure the electronic system is active and will therefore be able to control the charging process, supply the refrigerator and monitor other system circuits. When fitted, designated 12V sockets, en-route reading lights and en-route heating will remain operational while the engine is running. With the engine running the screen will show ENGINE RUNNING, the leisure and vehicle battery icons will be displayed to indicate they are being charged and the charging voltage will be show in the main display. 76 3.2 Generator Usage The following section provides further technical information relating to the electrical system. You can also access the supporting technical manual from www.sargentltd.co.uk Caution should be used before connecting a generator to your motorhome. 3.1 Residual Current Device & Miniature Circuit Breakers ! WARNING: Never start or stop E L E CT RICS 3 System Technical Information the generator while electrical loads are connected and switched on. Start the engine, let it stabilise and then connect the electrical load. To stop the engine, disconnect the electrical load and let engine stabilise before switching off Whilst some generators use electronic inverter technology, others use a more basic principle to generate the 230V supply. Preference should be to choose a generator which produces a consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate voltage control. The Residual Current Device (RCD) is basically provided to protect the user from lethal electric shock. The RCD will turn off (trip) if the current flowing in the live conductor does not fully return down the neutral conductor, i.e. some current is passing through a person down to earth or through a faulty appliance. To ensure the RCD is working correctly, the test button should be operated each time the vehicle is connected to the mains supply (see section 2.3) The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) operate in a similar way to traditional fuses and are provided to protect the wiring installation from overload or short circuit. If an overload occurs the MCB will switch off the supply. If this occurs you should investigate the cause of the fault before switching the MCB back on. The Reverse Polarity warning light on the PSU may illuminate when using a Generator. This is a normal side effect when using some types of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral conductor to earth, some generators centre tap the earth connection making both neutral and live conductors 110V above earth. This 110V difference causes the neon polarity indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but please consult the generator handbook for further information. The following table shows the rating and circuit allocation for the three MCB’s MCB Rating Output Wire Colour Description 1 10 Amps White 230V Sockets 2 16 Amps White (Yellow for heater) Extra 230V Sockets / Alde or Truma Heating System 3 10 Amps Black (Blue for Whale water heater) Fridge / Charger / Auxiliary devices 77 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM 3.3 Battery Charger 3.4 Leisure Battery The system incorporates an intelligent three-stage battery charger. A) Type / Selection For optimum performance and safety it is essential that only a proprietary brand LEISURE battery is used and it is suggested to select a battery from the NCC Verified Battery Scheme with a typical capacity of 75 to 120 Ah (Ampere / hours). Depending on the prospective use of the motorhome the correct type should be selected (A, B or C). A normal car battery is NOT suitable. This battery should always be connected when the system is in use. During stage 1 the battery voltage is increased gradually while the current is limited to start the charging process and protect the battery. At stage 2 the voltage rises to 14.4V to deliver the bulk charge to the battery. When the battery is charged, the voltage is decreased at stage 3 to 13.6V to deliver a float charge to maintain the battery in the fully charged state. The charger can be left switched on continuously as required. The battery charger / power converter also provides power to the leisure equipment when the mains supply is connected. This module supplies DC to the leisure equipment up to a maximum of 25 Amps (300 Watts), therefore the available power is distributed between the leisure load and the battery, with the leisure load taking priority as per the following example: Leisure Load Available power for battery charging 5A 20A 10A 15A 15A 10A 20A 5A The PSU is configured to work with standard lead acid leisure batteries, and in most cases is also compatible with the latest range of Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) batteries. Before fitting non-standard batteries please check that the charging profile described in 3.3 is suitable for the type of battery by referring to the battery documentation or battery manufacturer. Some vehicle installations can cater for two leisure batteries connected in parallel. In these cases it is recommended that two identical batteries are used. The battery feed is fitted with an inline fuse between the battery and the electrical harness, and is usually located immediately outside the battery compartment or within 500mm of the battery. If a single battery is fitted to a motorhome, this fuse could be up to 40A, however if two batteries are fitted each battery should be fused at a maximum of 20A. B) Installation & Removal Always disconnect the 230V mains supply and turn the PSU green charger switch to the off position (button out) before removing or installing the battery. ! WARNING: Under heavy loads the Battery Charger case may become hot. ALWAYS ensure the ventilation slots have a clear flow of air. Do not place combustible materials against / adjacent to the charger. 78 When connecting the battery, ensure that the correct polarity is observed (black is negative [-] and red is positive [+]) and that the terminals are securely fastened. Crocodile clips must not be used. ! WARNING: Explosive gases may be present at the battery. Take care to prevent flames and sparks in the vicinity of the battery and do not smoke. with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent) which monitors battery voltage. If you plan to disconnect or remove your leisure battery for maintenance or external charging, then please contact the monitoring station before you remove or disconnect the battery. If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also contact the Tracker monitoring station before removing the mains hook up. The Swift Command Tracker monitoring station can be contacted on 0345 6027302. C) Operation / Servicing Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to remove the battery other than for routine inspection of the terminals and “topping up” of the battery fluid where applicable. Please see instructions supplied with the battery. Note: Do not over discharge the battery. One of the most common causes of battery failure is when the battery is discharged below the recommended level of approximately 10V. Discharging a battery below this figure can cause permanent damage to one or more of the cells within the battery. E L E CT RICS ! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted To prevent over discharge, the EC600 system incorporates a battery protect circuit that warns the users and then disconnects the batteries when they fall below set values. If a warning is active a beep will be emitted by the control panel and information will be shown on the screen. To cancel the warning, press the select button. These warnings will not be repeated unless the power switch is turned off and on again. This is to ensure the warning does not become a nuisance. Battery Voltage cut off Action after cut off Notes Vehicle 10.9V Battery selection is changed from Vehicle battery to Leisure battery. If the leisure battery is below 9V then a further warning will occur (see below). This cut off level is designed to protect the vehicle battery from over discharge. The 10.9V level ensures there is sufficient power in the battery to run the vehicle electronics and start the vehicle. This cut off only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure equipment; it will not protect the battery if you leave vehicle circuits switched on, such as the road lights. Leisure 9V Power is turned off This is an emergency cut off level to protect the battery from severe damage. You should not rely on this cut off level during normal operation, but manage your power consumption to a discharge level of about 11.5V. This cut off only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure equipment that is controlled by the control panel power switch; it will not protect the battery from discharge by permanently connected equipment. 79 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM 3.5 12 Volt DC Fuses ! WARNING: When replacing fuses always replace a fuse with the correct value. NEVER replace with a higher value / rating as this could damage the wiring harness. If a replacement fuse ‘blows’ do not keep replacing the fuse as you could damage the wiring harness. Please investigate the fault and contact your dealer. The following table shows the fuse allocation for the 13 fuses fitted to the PSU. Please note that fuses are dependant on PSU versions, so not all fuses may be present. Fuse Rating Fuse Colour Description 1 25 Amps White Charger 2 7.5 Amps Brown Permanent 12V / Alarm / Fridge Electronics / Alde Heating 3 10 Amps Red 12V Sockets / TV Amplifier 4 10 Amps Red Extractor Fans / Truma Heating 5 5 Amps Tan Appliances / Hob Ignition / Toilet 6 10 Amps Red Water Pumps / Tank Heaters 7 5 Amps Tan Lighting, Main Lights & Dim Channel 1. 8 5 Amps Tan Lighting, Entry Light & Dim Channel 2. 9 10 Amps Red Spare Outputs / Marker Lights / En-Route Sockets & Lights 10 10 Amps Red Auxiliary / Awning Light / Electric Step 11 20 Amps Yellow Fridge 12V 12 15 Amps Blue Towing 12V 13 15 Amps Blue Fridge D+ Note: Fuses (2-13) have a Red LED below them which provides indication that the fuse has blown.The charger fuse has a green LED which Indicates that the charger is working. 80 Fuse Rating Fuse Colour Description Battery 1 20 Amps Yellow Fuse remotely located near battery Battery 2 20 Amps Yellow Fuse remotely located near battery 2 (where fitted) 3.6 Solar Charge Management The EC601/651 PSU incorporates a built-in solar charge management feature, which will monitor the input from a separate solar panel and regulator. The Solar Active symbol will be displayed on the control panel when there is an amount of energy available to charge the leisure or vehicle batteries. The voltage and current produced from the regulator can be viewed on the multi-function display by selecting the Solar Power menu item. Depending on the charge state of the batteries, the solar power will be directed to the required battery or batteries, and be continuously monitored to ensure optimum operation. A maximum of 150w of Solar Charge can be managed in this way 3.7 Mains Charging The EC651 PSU incorporates a smart charge feature, which monitors both leisure and vehicle batteries and automatically adjusts and directs the charger power (and solar power if a solar panel is installed) to maintain the leisure and vehicle batteries at an optimal level. 3.8 Water Pump Operation The EC620 control panel pump button operates the internal water pump drawing water from an internal tank if fitted, or an external container when no internal tank is fitted. The water tanks (fresh & waste) incorporate a level warning feature to warn the user when the fresh water level drops below 25% or when the waste water level reaches 100%. If the water pump power is turned on and the fresh water level drops to below 25% a warning beep will be heard and a message will be displayed on the control panel. To cancel the warning, press the select button. E L E CT RICS The following table shows details of the fuse(s) located at the Leisure battery. See also 3.4A If the water pump power is turned on and the waste water level rises to full (100%) a warning beep will be heard and a message will be displayed on the control panel. To cancel the warning, press the select button. These warnings will not be repeated unless the water pump power switch is turned off and on again. This is to ensure the warning does not become a nuisance. The Swift Command App can be used to control this feature. 3.9 Water Tank Heaters (frost protection) Operation The EC651 features the ability to switch on water tank heaters to provide frost protection for the fresh and waste tanks. (Tank heaters are not normally fitted when those tanks are inboard) The tank heater symbol is displayed on the control panel when this feature is enabled. The tank heaters will only operate if there is over 25% in the relevant water tank and the external temperature sensor detects that the temperature falls below 2 degrees C. If the temperature rises above this level the heaters will be switched off but the feature will remain on. 3.10 AC Current Limiter Operation The EC600 system features a 230V current monitoring system which allows the mains hook up current to be displayed on the control panel. The resolution of this reading is 0.5A. A current limit setting can be activated which if reached will switch off the electric elements in the heating system, until such time as the current drops and the elements will be switched back on. An example of this is if a kettle was to be operated whilst the heating was on and the current limit was reached then the heater electric element would be 81 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM temporarily switched off, when the kettle had boiled then the heater element would be switched back on automatically. This feature is particularly useful when abroad on a low current supply. A warning that the limit has been reached is displayed on the control panel. Setting the value to OFF will disable this feature. The Smart Command App can be used to adjust this feature. 3.11 Lighting & Dimming Operation The system contains up to two dimming channels for groups of lights which can be controlled by the light dimming button on the control panel, and the furniture mounted controls for those lights. The awning light on a motorhome can again be controlled by a number of items, the control panel awning light button, the App, and the lock and unlock system (dependant on system setting being set to do so). Each item can toggle the light on and off. The Smart Command App can be used to both configure and adjust the lighting and dimming. 82 E L E CT RICS 3.12 Heating Controls There are a number of heating systems that can be controlled by the EC600. The system will be preconfigured by the manufacturer. The following menu items are only available in Timer control mode, and 2 examples are shown for the different heating system variants. Scroll to the Heating Settings and press select to set or adjust the following items: ALDE 3020 Menu Item Description Control Set to MANUAL to use the controls supplied by the heating appliance manufacturer. Set to TIMER to control the appliance by the control panel with the settings below. Set to APP control the appliance by the Smart Command app. To allow Swift Command control of the heating system, the ‘3rd Party Panel’ option on the Alde Controller must be enabled. This should already be set up for you on your motorhome or caravan. See Alde instructions for further details. The following menu items are only available when in Timer control mode. Electric Set the electric element to OFF, 1KW, 2KW or 3KW Gas Set gas heating ON or OFF Timer 1 Set the timer 1 event time. This setting adjusts in 15 minute increments and uses the 24 hour clock Example 07:30 T1 Heating Set the timer 1 heating temperature. This setting can be off, or 5 through to 30 degrees C Example 22 deg C T1 H/Water Set the timer 1 hot water temperature. This setting can be OFF, NORML or BOOST Example Boost The menu now repeats for timer 2 through to timer 4 Exit settings? When timer 4 is completed the exit settings item is reached. Press the select button to exit and save the settings. The timer example below will set the heating to 22 degrees C and the hot water to boost at 7:30 in the morning. 83 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM TRUMA Combi CP+ Menu Item Description Control Set to MANUAL to use the controls supplied by the heating appliance manufacturer. Set to TIMER to control the appliance by the control panel with the settings below. Set to APP control the appliance by the Smart Command app. To allow Swift Command control of the heating system, the Combi Controller must be initialised while Swift Command is active. This should already be set up for you on your motorhome or caravan. See Truma Combi CP Plus instructions for further details. The following menu items are only available when in Timer control mode. Energy Set the electric element to OFF, 1KW, 2KW or 3KW Timer 1 Set the timer 1 event time. This setting adjusts in 15 minute increments and uses the 24 hour clock Example 07:30 T1 Heating Set the timer 1 heating temperature. This setting can be off, or 5 through to 30 degrees C Example 22 deg C T1 H/Water Set the timer 1 hot water temperature. This setting can be OFF, ECO or HOT Example Eco The menu now repeats for timer 2 through to timer 4 Exit settings? When timer 4 is completed the exit settings item is reached. Press the select button to exit and save the settings. The timer example above will set the heating to 22 degrees C and the hot water to eco at 7:30 in the morning. 84 The main control panel will display the software version number of both the Control Panel and the PSU. On the EC620 menu item press the select button to display software information. E L E CT RICS 3.13 Other Controls 3.14 Electric Step Operation On vehicles fitted with an electric step, this is operated by a button near the entry door. Press and release the button to move the step in or out. One press of the button will move the step out; a further press will move the step in again. If the engine is started the step will move in automatically, after a short warning buzzer. If this operation fails due to an obstacle a buzzer will sound continuously to warn that the step is still out, and therefore requires your attention. 3.15 Additional CI Bus Enabled Devices The Swift Command system will continue to develop enabling the control of additional devices such as air conditioning and control units. When selecting additional equipment check for CI Bus compatibility markings, and check with Sargent Electrical for details of the latest compatible devices. 3.16 Bluetooth Pairing Using the control panel, access the System Settings menu and then scroll to the Bluetooth pairing section. Press the select button to start pairing, the power button LED will flash to indicate the pairing mode. You can now pair your device to the system following the devices instructions to add a Bluetooth item. Pairing remains on for 1 minute and is then turned off automatically. 85 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM 3.17 System Warnings The system incorporates a number of warnings that are active at specific times. These are summarised below, and also covered by relevant sections of this manual. When a warning is active a triangle will be displayed in the control panel header area. Warning When Type Fresh water level low With pump turned on and fresh water level low (less than 25% full). Only available when an onboard tank is fitted. Message on screen and 30 second audible beep. Waste water level full With pump turned on and waste water level full. Only available when an on-board tank is fitted. Message on screen and 30 second audible beep. Leisure battery voltage low With control panel power on and leisure battery selected (as active battery) and the voltage level falls below 10V. Message on screen and 30 second audible beep. With control panel power on and leisure battery selected (as active battery) and the voltage level is below 9V. Message on screen and 30 second audible beep. If no action taken after 30 seconds then the system will switch the power off to prevent severe discharge of the battery. Note: This is an emergency cut off level to protect the battery from severe damage. You should not rely on this cut off level during normal operation, but manage your power consumption to a discharge level of 11.5V or above. This cut off only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure equipment that is controlled by the control panel power switch; it will not protect the battery from discharge by permanently connected equipment. Leisure battery voltage high With control panel power on or off and leisure battery is selected (as active battery) and the voltage level rises above 15V. Message on screen and repeated beeps from the control panel. The power is automatically turned off. The beeping will not stop until the fault is cleared. Vehicle battery warnings If the vehicle battery is selected instead of the leisure battery, then similar warnings to those described above are applied to the vehicle battery. The vehicle battery low warning level is 10.9V. Engine running When the engine is started the system power will be turned off. Message on screen, Leisure & Vehicle battery symbols indicating both batteries are connected for charging. The charging voltage is also shown on screen. Step extended Step extended and engine started. Message on screen and warning buzzer. Step jammed or obstructed. 86 Mains lead (hook-up cable) still connected / plugged in When the engine is started and the mains cable is still plugged in and the charger is switched on. Message on screen and repeated beeps from the control panel. The beeping will not stop until the hook-up lead is removed. 3.18 Common Fault Table Possible Cause Proposed Fix No 230 volt output from PSU Connecting lead between the site and Leisure Vehicle not connected Check and connect lead as per 2.3C RCD switched off Reset RCD as per 2.3D RCD not operating correctly Check supply polarity; if the RCD continues to fail contact your Dealer as there is probably an equipment or wiring fault. MCB switched off Reset MCB by switching OFF (down position) then back ON (up position), if the MCB continues to fail contact your Dealer as there is probably an equipment or wiring fault. No or deficient supply from site Contact site Warden for assistance Other fault Contact your Dealer Mains Supply reversed? The reverse polarity light is designed to illuminate when the Live and Neutral supply has been reversed / crossed over. If the light illuminates there is a problem with the site supply or the cable connecting the supply to your vehicle. The light is designed to work on UK electrical supplies (where the neutral conductor is connected to earth at the sub station). If you are using your vehicle outside the UK this light may illuminate when no fault exists. In these cases consult the site warden for advice. Generator being used ‘The Reverse Polarity warning light is on when using my Generator’. This is a normal side effect when using some types of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral conductor to earth, some generators centre tap the earth connection making both neutral and live conductors 110V above earth. This 110V difference causes the neon polarity indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is still safe to use the generator, but please consult the generator handbook for further information. Control Panel has no display Check batteries and fuses, turn PSU isolate switch and charger switch on and ensure mains supply is connected. Check control panel connecting lead at PSU and behind Control Panel Contact your Dealer 12V Power turns off Battery protect feature has operated to protect the Vehicle battery and or the Leisure battery. See 3.4C Over voltage protection has been activated, the control panel will display a warning. A number of things can cause this but the most common is the solar panel, it is worth checking the regulator is connected correctly and operating within the correct parameters. Engine has been started, all equipment has been disconnected to meet EMC requirements. See 2.6 Control Panel locked / erratic function Observe control panel handling instructions Control panel software may have crashed. Reboot control panel by turning off the PSU isolate switch. Wait 30 seconds then turn the switch back on. Reverse Polarity light is illuminated on PSU Control Panel Problems E L E CT RICS Fault 87 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix No 12 volt output from PSU No 230V supply Check all above Charger not switched on Turn charger switch on, switch will illuminate Battery not connected and / or charged Install charged battery as per 3.4 Power button on control panel not switched to on Turn power on at control panel Battery flat / Battery fuse blown Recharge battery, check fuses, check charging voltage is present at battery Fuse blown Check all fuses are intact and the correct value fuse is installed as per fuse table Equipment switched off / unplugged Check equipment is switched on and connected to the 12V supply Other fault Contact your Dealer Fuse blown Replace fuse with correct value as per fuse table. Pump turned off Turn pump on by pressing the pump button at the control panel. Setting incorrect Both the internal and external pump feeds are controlled from the control panel. To alter the setting of the pump switch see section 3.8. Ensure the setting matches your desired requirement. Fuse/s blown Replace fuse with correct value as per fuse table. Lights turned off Turn Lights on by pressing the lights button, use dimmer at the control panel. Bluetooth not paired Using System Settings menu, select Bluetooth Pair option Bluetooth not active on Device Ensure that the handheld device has Bluetooth switched on and that the device supports the Bluetooth 4 standard (BLE) Bluetooth out of range Ensure the handheld device is within 7M of the middle of the caravan/motorhome switch see section 3.8. Ensure the setting matches your desired requirement. Bluetooth connection issue See App user guide for further details Account details notentered on App Enter details in Account page of App settings menu Pump not working illuminated on PSU Lights not working Bluetooth Communications not working illuminated on PSU Remote Communications not working 88 Account not registered Check with supplying dealer or Sargent Electrical at time of vehicle delivery that an account has been registered. Sargent Electrical Services Limited provide a technical help line during office hours. Please contact 01482 678981 if you require technical help. For out of hour support please refer to the tech support section of the Sargent web site www.sargentltd.co.uk. Below is a list of the countries covered by the SIM under a fair usage policy, a complete list is available at request. 4.1 Swift Command App Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom. The Swift Command app can be down loaded from the Apple App Store, the Android Play store or the Windows store (when available). For continued use outside of the countries listed above, a change of SIM card should be arranged by your supplying dealer. A separate Swift Command User Guide is available which covers the operation of the app. The app will update as features are continuously developed or added. 4.4 Replacement parts 4 Remote Access & Control Before you can use the App with your caravan or motorhome you will need to create an account and sign up to the free communication service. This is a simple process and will be explained further by your dealer at the vehicle handover. Additional information is available at www.swiftcommand.co.uk 4.2 Swift Command Web usage & Description In addition to the mobile App, you can also use the same account and login details to access the Swift Command web site. E L E CT RICS 3.19 Contact details The Control panel contains a small lithium battery to maintain the clock when no other energy supplies are available this will last in excess of 5 years under normal conditions. The battery is a CR2032 3.0V The EC630 Communication module contains a special backup battery pack which should last in excess of 3 years under normal conditions. The pack part number is 16308 available from Sargent. 4.5 Updates From time to time there may be updates to the system software; these updates will be done at service intervals by your dealership. Here you can update and amend your details, look at location information and history, review system information and historical data as well as changing some system options and settings. Additional information is available at www. swiftcommand.co.uk 4.3 Swift Command SIM Coverage & Usage information The EC600 system, when delivered for mainly UK use, contains Mobile SIM with 36 month contract, which commences upon activation at the Dealership when a customer is assigned to the motorhome. 89 E LE CTRICS SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM 5 Technical Data & Approvals 5.1 Equipment – EC601, EC602, EC651, EC620, EC630 & PX300 Control Equipment Outline Specification INPUT 230V 230 Volts / 0 to 16 Amps OUTPUT 230V RCD protected, 2 x MCB outputs of 10A & 1 x MCB output of 16A + / - 10% Separate switched channels for heating system and charger INPUT 12V 2 x 20A battery inputs via 2 x 4 way connectors SOLAR INPUT 1 X Dedicated solar panel input (20 to 150W panel) via a 2 way connector OUTPUT 12V 25A total output via multiple switched channels protected by 13 fused outputs Integrated CHARGER Input 220-240 Volts AC +/- 10%, Frequency 50 Hz +/- 6%, Current 3A max. DC Output 13.6 to 14.4 Volts nominal, Current 25 Amps max (300 Watts). Signal INPUT 4 x Fresh water level, 4 x Waste water level, 1 x Engine running, plus multiple vehicle connections, sensor inputs for temperature & humidity Data IN / OUT CANBUS Data communication and power to Control Panel via 6 way connector Fresh water negative sensed Waste water negative sensed CI-Bus Data communication to CI-Bus enabled devices via RJ11/12 connector IP rating IP31 Operating Ambient 0 to 35° Celsius temperature Charger case temperature with full load 65° C Max Automatic shutdown and restart if overheated / overloaded Dimensions EC601 & EC651 PSU Overall size (HxWxD) 180 x 305 x 135mm Weight 3.8 Kg EC620 Control Panel Overall size (HxWxD) 93 x 180 x 32mm EC630 Comms Module Overall size (HxWxD) 55 x 116 x 85mm Weight 550g EC640 Sensor Overall size (HxWxD) 60 x 27 x 14mm Weight 80g Clearances 75mm above, 50mm left & right Cut-out size (HxW) 82 x 165mm Fixing centres 166mm X 26MM Weight 150 g 90 E L E CT RICS 5.2 Approvals System: BSEN 1648-1, BSEN1648-2 compliant, BS7671: 2008 compliant Residual Current Device: RCD 40A 30mA trip to BS EN 61008 Miniature Circuit Breakers: MCB’s type C 6000A breaking capacity to BSEN 60898 Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive 2004/108/EC Certificate CE20071224-1 Integrated Charger: BS EN 60335-1/2.29, 2006/95EC, IEC61000-3.2/3:1995, 1. Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95EC TUV014900-A1, EN55022, Class B, EN55024/ Level 2 5.3 Declaration of Conformity Equipment: Leisure Power Control System Model name: EC601, EC602, EC651, EC620, EC630 & PX300 I hereby declare that the equipment named above has been designed to comply with the relevant sections of the above referenced approvals. The unit complies with all essential requirements of the Directives. Signed Date: Name Position Manufacturer I L Sargent Technical Director Sargent Electrical Services Ltd Unit 35, Tokenspire Business Park Woodmansey, Beverley East Yorkshire, United Kingdom 91 E LE CTRICS MOTORHOME BATTERY Motorhome battery ! WARNING: Use precaution when removing or replacing the battery, as batteries contain acid liquids which can cause severe injuries and damage when handled incorrectly. Refer to the cleaning and maintenance section. Please also take into consideration when manoeuvring a battery, that the weight may be in excess of 20kg. Your motorhome has been fitted with one or two leisure batteries depending on size of vehicle and expected electrical loads. The battery will be housed in one of two ways: Within a floor mounted compartment Retained beneath the drivers seat Floor mounted compartments are designed to hold the battery securely and to contain any electrolyte (acid) spillage. They are sealed from the habitation compartment and a breather pipe is fitted to ensure any build up of explosive gases (hydrogen) is vented to the outside. If a breather pipe is fitted it is important to ensure that any replacement batteries are also fitted with a breather pipe. The battery or batteries should only be positioned in the appropriate compartment, and be properly secured before travelling. 92 Note: The batteries fitted to your motorhome in floor mounted compartments must be kept upright. When a leisure battery has been factory installed below the driver’s seat, the battery type used is specific to that installation, and is of a type (Sealed AGM) that allows a battery to be installed in a vertical or horizontal orientation. Due to the construction of this type of battery, it is not necessary to vent the battery to the outside, and there is no requirement to check and maintain electrolyte levels. Note: If an AGM battery is replaced, it must be replaced by an equivalent AGM battery which is suitable for a horizontal installation, and does not require venting to the outside. It is recommended that a good quality leisure battery is always connected when the motor home electrical system is in use. Leisure batteries are a deep cycling rechargeable heavy duty 12v battery designed to provide power for lights and other electrical appliances. It should be remembered that batteries suitable for the electrical demands of a motorhome differ in design from those for use with a car, and whilst the system may operate with a car battery it is strongly recommended that only a rechargeable leisure type battery, maintained in good condition, is used. The battery should be kept topped up (charged) at all times. If two leisure batteries are fitted additional care is needed, as one battery deteriorates this can reduce the lifespan of the other. Replacement batteries should be a proprietary brand leisure battery with a minimum 75Ah capacity. Replacement batteries should be checked dimensionally before purchasing, to ensure fitment within the battery compartment, as brands vary in size. ! WARNING: When connecting the battery, ensure that the correct polarity is observed (black is negative and red/ brown is positive) and that the terminals are securely fastened. M0TORHOME BATTERY with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent) which monitors battery voltage. If you plan to disconnect or remove your leisure battery for maintenance or external charging, then please contact the monitoring station before you remove or disconnect the battery. If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also contact the Tracker monitoring station before removing the mains hook up. The Swift Command Tracker monitoring station can be contacted on 0345 6027302. Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to remove the battery other than for routine inspection of terminals and (for nonAGM batteries) ‘topping up’. ! WARNING: Explosive gases may be present at the battery. Take care to prevent flames and sparks in the vicinity. Your motorhome has been fitted with an in-line fuse between the battery terminal and the power supply unit. Do not use a higher rated fuse as this may cause damage to your motorhome. ! WARNING: Switch off all appliances and lamps before connecting or disconnecting the battery. Smoking is prohibited around the battery compartment. To preserve the life of your leisure battery and charger please observe the following: 1. Do not leave all 12v lights powered at the same time as this will drain your leisure battery more rapidly. 2. If all 12v lights must be powered together, ensure the battery is ‘in-circuit’ and that the battery charger is turned on. 3. For optimum performance use the transformer/charger unit with a leisure battery attached. Please note the auxiliary battery or batteries supplied with your motorhome may not be fully charged and should be charged for a minimum of 24 hours before use. Battery performance may be affected by a number of things such as ambient temperature, age, state of charge etc. Cleaning and maintenance (Floor mounted battery compartment) E L E CT RICS ! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted • Use protective clothing and glasses when handling a leaking battery, and avoid direct contact to the skin, eyes and respiratory organ. • Should a battery leakage occur, please act according to the instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the battery. Act with caution as caustic substances are present in the battery. • Always remove the battery and the power cable before carrying out any maintenance of the product. • Before removing the clamps switch off all appliances. • Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/ abrasive detergent when cleaning the Battery Box and Soft Tray. • To check if any acid is present in the Soft Tray (non-AGM batteries), simply press it softly. A strong smell from the Soft Tray may also indicate spilled acid. The battery can be filled again with acid collected from the Soft Tray. Always treat spilled battery acid as hazardous waste. Dispose of spilled battery acid according to the local and national regulations. • At the beginning of each season or extensive travelling, check the Soft Tray for faults and replace if necessary. • The cleaning of the Battery Box and Soft Tray should only be done after all power sources have been switched off, in order to prevent a hazardous situations. Cleaning and maintenance (Driver mounted batteries (AGM)). • Always remove the battery and the power cable before carrying out any maintenance of the product. • Before removing the clamps switch off all electrical and gas appliances. • Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/ 93 E LE CTRICS SOLAR PANEL CONNECTION abrasive detergent when cleaning the battery tray and area. • Before the camping season or extensive travelling, check the under seat area for wear on fitting and cables and replace if necessary. level within furniture (i.e within wardrobe, either visible or behind a removable cover). The output from a regulator, rated to suit the chosen solar panel, should be connected to this point. Factory fitted Solar Energy System • The cleaning of the battery area should only be done after all power sources have been switched off, in order to prevent a hazardous situations. Solar panel connection point or Solar panel fitment Depending on specification, a solar panel connection point, or a solar panel and regulator, will be installed in the motorhome. Solar Panel Connection Point If a connection point only has been included in the motorhome harness, a solar panel using the provision must provide a fused and regulated output. From the provided connection the supply is taken to the EC600 power supply unit. This facility is designed to be used with a maximum solar panel size of 150 watts – if a solar panel (or panels) of output greater than 150 watts are required, please contact Sargent Electrical Services or the Swift Group for further advice. Solar charge directed to the power supply unit can then be distributed to the leisure battery, vehicle battery, or each battery in turn. For further details of selecting which battery receives the solar charge, please see the EC600 series instructions. Please note that solar charge can only be directed to both batteries in this way if the System Shutdown button is ON – if System Shutdown is OFF, any available solar charge will be directed to the vehicle battery only. Solar panel installations should be undertaken by trained technicians who are familiar with the systems involved. Particular care should be taken when making connections to solar panels, which can generate high voltages ahead of a regulator when exposed to light. 94 Motorhomes without factory fit solar energy systems will have two way connectors present close to the leisure battery, and/or at a high Depending on specification, your motorhome may be fitted with a solar panel of up to 120W, and if a solar panel is fitted then a suitable solar regulator will also be installed. This solar panel and regulator may provide additional 12v power whenever sunlight is available to the panel, and this will be directed to the EC400/ EC600 power supply unit. Conditions allowing, and depending on the settings chosen in the EC600 power supply unit, the system can keep the leisure battery and vehicle battery 'topped up' during storage, and will provide a daily boost to the leisure battery when camping without a mains 230V supply. Regulator operation The regulator operates automatically, turning on and off as required to charge and operate. When the solar panel is exposed to a source of sunlight the regulator tarts to operate. When the voltage from the panel reaches a usable level, the Panel Output LED will flash indicating that the battery is being charged (see battery charging above). If insufficient power is being generated by the solar panel the regulator will turn off. The regulator checks the solar panel output every 30 seconds and turns on/off as required. On overcast days when the solar panel output is minimal the regulator can still deliver a small charge, and in this mode the LED's are not illuminated to conserve power. Control Panel When the solar panel is operating the leisure battery voltage display on the control panel will increase, however this does depend on the SOLAR PANEL CONNECTION / ACCESSORY HARNESSING Accessory harnessing Battery charging A connection exists within the motorhome harness, which can be used as a power supply for an alarm or tracking system. For security reasons, information regarding this is not published; please contact your dealer for further information. If a leisure battery is fitted and requires charging the Charge Status LED will illuminate. Depending on the state of charge of the battery this LED will illuminate red for bulk charge (14.4V output) or green for float charge (13.6V output). It may take a few hours to several days to charge the battery depending on its state of charge. When the battery is fully charged the regulator will turn off to prevent overcharging of the battery. If the mains charger is turned on to charge the leisure battery this can also cause the solar panel regulator is to tun off. Alarm Power Supply E L E CT RICS amount of load placed on the system and the amount of power being generated by the solar panel at that time. Satellite Power Supply Dependant on specification, in many motorhomes a power supply harness is included for use with roof mounted satellite systems. This power supply is terminated in a 4-way connector marked ‘SATELLITE’, and carries 12v positive, 12v negative, and a signal which can be used to detect when the vehicle engine is running. (The engine run signal is required by some systems to automatically retract satellite dishes. In addition, on Kon-Tiki models which have a decoder / receiver position. At this position an additional 230v socket is present for use with a decoder / receiver, and a 12v supply is present (2-way connector, 12v positive and 12v negative), which can be used with an inverter (not supplied) to power a decoder/receiver when a mains supply is not available. Tow Bar Connection Note: This image is of a typical solar regulator, the appearance my vary Power Supply Unit The PSU does not need to be switched on (shutdown button in) for the solar panel to charge the battery, but if the PSU has an LCD display then this can be used to see the increase in battery voltage as the solar panel charges the battery. During storage the PSU should be shutdown (shutdown button out). Maintenance and cleaning The solar panel will require cleaning periodically in order to maintain the performance of the panel. A caravan, car shampoo or simple soap can be used, but do not use abrasive cleaners. The addition of a tow bar requires an electronic interface to ensure compatibility between the combined road lighting on the motorhome and the trailer, and the road light monitoring system on the Fiat base vehicle. Your motorhome already features an interface which enables the use of LED road lighting on the motorhome body, and there is connectivity on this device for the addition of a tow bar. It is important that the correct tow bar electrical harness is used, and your Swift Group dealer can order and fit this part for you. 95 E LE CTRICS GENERATOR USAGE Generator usage Caution should be used before connecting a generator to your motorhome. ! WARNING: Never start or stop the generator while electrical loads are connected and switched on. Start the engine, let it stabilise, then connect the electrical load. To stop engine, disconnect the electrical load and let engine stabilise before switching off. Whilst some generators use invertor technology, others use a more basic principle to generate the 230v supply. Preference should be to choose a generator which produces a consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate voltage control. The reverse polarity warning light may illuminate when using a generator. This is a normal side effect when using some types of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral and live conductors 110v above earth. This 110v difference causes the neon polarity indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but please consult the generator handbook for further information. Habitation relay Habitation relays are fitted to motorhomes by manufacturers to comply with the following legislation: 1. The Road Vehicles (Construction and Use) Regulations 1986 Regulation 60 - Radio interference suppression 2. European Community Whole Vehicle Type Approval (ECWVTA) framework directive 2007/46/EC and EU Regulation 661/2009 (General Safety) mandates UNECE Regulation 10 (Vehicles with regard to Electromagnetic compatibility). 96 A habitation relay must be fitted by manufacturers, safe guarding the consumer, the purpose of the relay is to disable nonhomologated appliances/components whilst the vehicle is in transit. Unintentional electromagnetic energy can be created by non-homologated devices within the habitation compartment, which could cause a malfunction of the base vehicles electronic systems/components, including safety critical items such as air bags, ABS braking etc. In your motorhome the habitational relay is within the power supply unit. ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING E L E CT RICS The Swift Group recommends that electrical fault finding is undertaken by a trained Technician familiar with the systems involved. The basic checks below are therefore limited to items that can be checked without the use of tools etc. If in any doubt please consult a Swift dealer. Power Supply Fault Remedy No 230v output from PSU See Sargent EC600 information No 12v output from PSU See Sargent EC600 information Reverse Polarity light illuminated See Sargent EC600 information Control Panel Problems See Sargent EC600 information Appliance Not Operating Fault Remedy Error code or fault light displayed on appliance (eg fridge LCD display) Check appliance specific information for next steps No display at appliance controls Check power supplies are available (electric hook up, charger operating, battery in good state of charge). Majority of appliances will not be operational when engine is running. Ensure control panel is ON. Check appropriate fusing in Power Supply unit Internal Lighting Fault Remedy Lighting not operational Check power supplies are available Check control panel is ON, and that CABIN LIGHTS button has been pressed Locate furniture mounted switches, where appropriate Check fuses on Power Supply Unit Determine if light is LED or Tungsten / Halogen bulb, or Fluorescent tube – check and replace bulb if appropriate 97 E LE CTRICS ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING Road Lighting Fault Remedy Dashboard warning light illuminated / groups of road lights inoperative Check all bulbs are located correctly in bulb holders (especially those recently replaced). See bulb replacement information in Service Book If Tow Bar fitted check trailer lighting / disconnect trailer to determine if this is the cause of the fault. Check fuses in Fiat dash for main road lighting (see Fiat handbook for details of which light groups are fused) Check fuse in Power Supply Unit for auxiliary marker lights (Amber side markers, Luton / upper rear markers) VLM Fusebox Rio/Bessacarr/Bolero Depending on specification, your motorhome may be fitted with a secondary VLM-4 fusebox, which is designed to work in conjunction with the Fiat base vehicle. The secondary VLM-4 fusebox allows the base vehicle to function with the LED rear lights and still inform the user if the directional indicators are functioning or not, via the base vehicle dash. If a towed trailer is attached to this motorhome then the VLM-4 fusebox will still allow the status of the vehicle directional indicators to be relayed to the user along with informing the user if the directional indicator on the towed trailer are functioning correctly. Electric Step Operation (When fitted) Fault Remedy Step will not automatically retract with engine start Check fuses in Power Supply Unit. Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if appropriate. Check other functions that are linked to the running of the vehicle engine (i.e. fridge 12v operation). If these are also inoperative contact dealer. Step does not respond to furniture switch Check fuses in power supply unit Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if appropriate. It is possible to link the operation of the step to the lock/ unlock commands from the central locking keyfob. If this feature is enabled on your motorhome, check if operation of the step via the central locking keyfob is possible. To enable / disable the keyfob feature contact your dealer. 98 ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING Fault Remedy Fresh water level sensor gives incorrect readings Use floor hatch within motorhome to access top of water tank, remove sensor (4-screws) and clean probes E L E CT RICS Power Supply If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further fault finding. Waste water level sensor gives incorrect readings If possible, from below motorhome remove level sensor from top of waste tank, and clean probes. Alternatively, clean waste tank internal surfaces by flushing through with water or cleaning agent. If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further fault finding. Battery Discharge Fault Remedy Leisure battery discharging earlier than anticipated If appropriate to battery, check condition and top-up battery fluid if required Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or tyre/exhaust/battery specialist If motorhome is not in use, ensure ‘SYSTEM SHUTDOWN’ button on Power Supply Unit is being used to isolate all circuits If motorhome is in use, see consumption table in handbook – are several items perating simultaneously / is total load likely to cause discharge. Check charger is operational when mains hook up is present, and that the charger is allowed sufficient time to replenish battery / batteries. Vehicle battery discharging earlier than anticipated If appropriate to battery, check condition and top-up battery fluid if required Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or tyre/exhaust/battery specialist If motorhome is not in use, see base vehicle handbook section headed ‘periods of inactivity’. Consider use of vehicle battery isolator If motorhome is in use, Power Supply Unit configured to charge / maintain both leisure and vehicle batteries. (Contact dealer for further assistance if unsure) 99 E LE CTRICS ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING / CAB RADIO Audiovisual Equipment Fault Remedy Rear view camera system inoperative when reversing (if fitted) Check if camera system can be switched on manually, using power button on rear view mirror. Rear view camera system inoperative whether moving forward or reversing (if fitted) Check fuses in habitation area fusebox (Power Supply Unit) Radio switches off intermittently Radio will not remain on indefinitely when vehicle ignition is switched off. Please see below or the Fiat handbook. Check Reverse Lights are operational on rear of motorhome. (Check base vehicle fuses if reverse lights are inoperative.) Cab radio - timer Settings On all vehicles fitted with a Fiat radio, the amount of time the radio will stay on can be altered. To do this please follow the instructions below: Procedure for setting radio switching off time after ignition-off. 1. Switch on the radio 2. Press MENU to access the menu. Radio VP1 3. Select SYSTEM SETTINGS and press OK. 4. Scroll to POWER OFF and tick the POWER OFF with 180min. Delay. 5. Press OK 6. Press MENU on the display. With 180 showing on the display, the setting is complete and the radio will remain on for 3 hours. Radio VP2 (Touch screen) 100 FITTED EQUIPMENT Truma CP Plus digital timer control (when fitted)..................................................................... 103 Truma Combi 4E/6E boiler..................................................................................................... 116 ALDE Compact 3020 Control Panel - Functions and Symbols .............................................. 123 ALDE heat exchanger............................................................................................................. 133 ALDE compact 3020 boiler..................................................................................................... 134 Dometic absorption refrigerators ............................................................................................ 142 Thetford Cooker 3 burner and hotplate .................................................................................. 164 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Truma Combi ........................................................................................................................ 102 Dometic Oven CU600............................................................................................................ 169 Microwave oven ................................................................................................................... 179 Extractor hood 524 ............................................................................................................... 181 Thetford C260CS & C260S cassette toilet.............................................................................. 182 Thetford C400 cassette toilet ................................................................................................. 187 Windows ............................................................................................................................... 194 Window Blinds ...................................................................................................................... 196 Skyview operating instructions ............................................................................................... 197 Roof lights ............................................................................................................................. 198 Doors .................................................................................................................................... 201 Omnistep single step ............................................................................................................. 202 Awnings/Fiamma F45S/L side awning/Thule Omnistor 4900 side awning............................... 202 Reverse camera system......................................................................................................... 206 Cycle rack mounting bars....................................................................................................... 206 Solar Panel............................................................................................................................. 208 Seat swivel (Driver / Passenger).............................................................................................. 208 Side Lockers ......................................................................................................................... 208 Bunk and luton bed safety ..................................................................................................... 208 Drop down bed mechanism................................................................................................... 209 Tables ................................................................................................................................... 211 Table storage ........................................................................................................................ 211 TV inlet .................................................................................................................................. 212 TV aerial................................................................................................................................. 213 TV brackets............................................................................................................................ 215 Trigger shower heads............................................................................................................. 215 External BBQ point................................................................................................................. 216 External shower...................................................................................................................... 217 Colour reference..................................................................................................................... 217 101 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL Note: The instructions covering fitted equipment to your vehicle were correct at the time of going to print. Owners handbooks are updated annually and we take great care to try and ensure their accuracy. However,Swift Group Limited cannot accept responsibility for any changes that may be made in specification or operating instructions to the equipment described in this section after the time of going to press. Every care is taken to ensure that the information provided in this handbook is correct and easy to understand. Separate manufacturers’ leaflets on many of the components are also included in the Owner’s Pack provided with this vehicle and we recommend that you compare the instructions in the handbook with the component manufacturers literature, to ensure the information provided is as accurate as possible. If you are in any doubt as to how to operate the equipment in your vehicle, please contact the component manufacturer’s service department on the telephone number shown on their component leaflet. If you remain in any doubt, please contact customer service department on 01482 875740. Equipment Specification For details on type of equipment fitted in your vehicle, please refer to the Sales Brochure or Dealer. ! WARNING: To maximise the use and life of all fitted equipment in your vehicle it is essential that any accompanying manufacturers’ literature is read fully. All recommended maintenance and preparation procedures should be followed. The information provided in this handbook is only intended as a guide. If in any doubt consult your manufacturer appointed dealer, particularly before attempting to install EXTRA EQUIPMENT. 102 Note: In the interest of safety, replacement parts for an appliance shall conform to the appliance manufacturer’s specifications and should be fitted by them or their authorised agent. Truma Combination Boiler The Truma Combination Boiler has been designed to run on gas or electric power and the optimum performance is obtained when used in dual fuel mode, that is running on gas and electric at the same time. Running in dual fuel mode has the following benefits: • Fastest possible heat up time, the 2KW gas burner combines with a 1.8KW electric element to provide 3.8KW of energy to heat your hot water and warm your motorhome. • The intelligent heat management system automatically senses when the water and room are nearing the required temperature and then automatically turns off your gas burner and operates solely electric power, conserving your gas. • As hot water is used or the room cools the Truma combination heater will continue to operate on electric only until a point where the demands necessitate that additional gas power is required. An example for such a demand could be for instance if the exterior door was left open and the room temperature dropped by 10 degrees in the space of a few minutes, in this case the intelligent heat management system would decide that the best way to get the room back to the required temperature would be to use both gas and electric at the same time. Operating the Truma Combination system on electric or gas only will result in longer heat up times for hot water and the room temperature in comparison to operating on dual fuel. Operating on electric only may not in all cases maintain a comfortable room temperature especially in colder conditions. Control of Truma combi via Swift Command The Truma combi can also be controlled using Swift Command. Please see details in the electrical section of this handbook for further details. While taking energy consumption and the environment into account, consider using the Combi in summer mode (water heating only) when room or space heating is not required, but may be needed in the near future. This ensures the appliance is held at the same temperature as the hot water setting chosen, and this can reduce the time taken to provide warm air into the living area, when room or space heating is then selected. Truma CP Plus Digital Timer Control (when fitted) The Truma CP plus control panel is used to control and monitor a Combi CP plus ready heater and/or a Truma air conditioning system. The Truma CP plus serves as an interface for operating connected appliances via Truma App and iNet Box. (Trauma aftermarket option) • Do not carry out any repair work or modifications on the Truma CP plus control panel! • A defective Truma CP plus control panel may only be repaired by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s service department. • Never use LP gas appliances when refuelling, in multi-storey car parks, in garages, or on ferries. Switch off the LP gas appliance on the Truma CP plus control panel and make sure that the LP gas appliance definitely cannot be switched on via the Truma App. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT The intelligent heat management system operation in dual fuel mode and allow the Truma Combination boiler to prioritize the electric power source over your gas, which all conserve your gas supply. Note: • If the power supply to the system has been interrupted, the time / time switch must be reset. • If a new or replacement appliance (heater, air conditioning system or iNet Box) is connected to the bus system, the procedure described in “Initial start-up” must be repeated. • The ZUCB time switch can no longer be used when the Combi CP plus ready heater is connected to the Truma CP plus control panel. • If an iNET box is connected, the operation of the CP plus controller will differ from these instructions The following air conditioning systems can be operated with the Truma CP plus: • Saphir compact • Saphir comfort RC • Aventa eco • Aventa comfort For further details on connecting and controlling these items, and iNet contact your dealer. Safety instructions • Operate the Truma CP plus control panel only if it is in technically perfect condition. • Repairs must be carried out immediately. Only carry out repairs yourself if the solution is described in the troubleshooting guide of this manual. 103 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL Display and control elements Rotate anticlockwise • Menu is run through from right to left. • Decrease values (-). Tapping • Accept (save) a selected value. • Select a menu item, change to the setting level. 1 = Display Long Press 2 = Status bar • Main switch function ON / OFF. 3 = Menu bar (upper) • Note: If an iNet Box was recognised while searching for an appliance, the function of the rotary push button changes. 4 = Menu bar (lower) 5 = 230 V mains supply indicator (power) 6 = Time switch display Back Button 8 = Rotary push button Pressing the Back button (9) returns you from a menu and discards settings. This means that the previous values are retained. 9 = Back button Initial Set-Up The menus can be selected in lines (3 + 4) and settings can be made using the rotary push button (8). The display (1) has an illuminated background. The Back button (9) can be used to return from a menu. In order to perform the initial start-up, the following steps are required: 7 = Settings / Values Rotary push button Setpoints and parameters can be selected, modified and saved by tapping on it using the rotary push button (8). Selected menu items flash. Rotate clockwise • Menu is run through from left to right. • Increase values (+). • Switch on power supply. 12V direct voltage for CP plus control panel and Combi and 230V mains voltage for air conditioning systems and Combi E. • Start the search of the appliances under menu item “Service menu” –> “RESET” –> “PR SET”. After confirmation,Truma CP plus control panel initialises itself. “INIT ..” appears on the display while this is in progress. This stores in the Truma CP plus control panel the appliances that have been found. Note: This initial set up will have been undertaken prior to delivery of your motorhome. 104 Switch off Start/Stand by screen • Press rotary push button for longer than 4 seconds. After connecting the control panel to the power supply, a start screen is shown after a few seconds. • “OFF” appears after another 2 seconds. • The Truma CP plus control panel deactivation procedure can be delayed by several minutes because of internal heating or air conditioning system after-runs. Change the room temperature F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Start-Up • Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push button. Note: • Change by tapping in the setting level. • The display changes between the time and the set room temperature. • Depending on the appliance that is connected, select between heating system (HEATER) or air conditioning system (AC) or automatic air conditioning system1 (AUTO) using the rotary push button. • Special displays on command via Truma App, IR remote control of the air conditioning system (see “Special displays” on page 113). • After a repair / retrofit, the procedure described under “Initial start-up” must be repeated. • Tap rotary push button to confirm selection. • Select desired temperature with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Functions The functions in the menu bars (3, 4) of the Truma CP plus control panel are selectable in any order. The operating parameters are shown on the status bar (2) and on the displays (5, 6). Select setting level Heater • Tap rotary push button. Settable temperature range 5 - 30°C (1°C steps) The display shows the setting level. The first icon flashes. a = heater2 – Heater is switched on. Air conditioning system (AC) (when connected/when AC is fitted) Settable temperature range 16 – 31°C (1 °C steps) Switching on and off Switch on • Tap rotary push button. • Previously set values / operating parameters are reactivated after switching on b = COOL* - Air conditioning system is switched on c = AUTO - Air conditioning system is set to automatic d = HOT - Air conditioning system is in heating mode. e = VENT - Air conditioning system is in air circulation mode 105 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL Notes: Quick temperature change using rotary push button possible (in Stand-by screen). Automatic air conditioning system (AUTO) only if “ACC” has been activated in the service menu (see “Service menu” on page 111). This is deactivated at the factory. 1 Symbol flashes until the desired room temperature is reached. Change the hot water level Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push button. • Change by tapping in the setting level. • Select desired level with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. 2 Automatic air-conditioning system (AUTO) Settable temperature range 18 – 25°C (1°C steps) Automatic switch over between heater and air conditioning system for an approximately constant temperature on the inside. f = AUTO - Automatic air-conditioning system is activated Requirements for operation with automatic airconditioning system: • The heater and air conditioning system must be connected. • Automatic air-conditioning system “ACC” must be activated in the service menu (see “Service menu” on page 111). – = OFF - H ot water generator is switched off. a = Boiler1 - H ot water generator is switched on. b = Eco2 - Hot water temperature 40°C c = Hot - Hot water temperature 60°C d = Boost1 - T argeted, rapid heating of boiler contents (Boiler priority) for a maximum time window of 40 minutes. Then the water temperature is kept at the higher level for two post-heating cycles (about 62°C). After reaching the water temperature, heating of the room continues. Notes: 106 1 his symbol flashes until the required water T temperature has been reached. 2 hot water temperature can only be A maintained with combined room and water heating for a limited time at 40°C. Special fixtures in the mixed mode • Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push button. • Interruption of the mains voltage 230V: • Change by tapping in the setting level. • Select desired energy source with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. The heating system switches automatically into gas mode. As soon as the 230V power supply has been restored, the heating system automatically switches back to mixed mode. • Fault in combustion procedure (e.g. lack of fuel). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Select energy source The heating system switches automatically into electrical mode. For the heater to operate in mixed mode again, the cause of the fault must be remedied and acknowledged on the Truma CP plus control panel. See “Fault” on page 114. Symbol Operating mode Power type a Gas Gas b MIX 1 Gas + Electro c MIX 2 Gas + Electro d EL 1 Electro e EL 2 Electro As soon as the heater is switched on (room temperature, hot water level active), the status line shows the energy type selected in the previous heating procedure. The factory setting is gas / diesel. The heater automatically switches to the gas mode. As soon as the 230 V power supply is reconnected, the heater automatically switches back to the mixed mode. Special features in electric mode Combi Gas • If the 230 V power supply is interrupted and the 12 V supply is switched on, a fault code is shown on the display. • When the 230 V power supply has been restored, the heater is automatically started with the existing settings. The fault code goes off. 107 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL Select fan level With connected heating / air conditioning system • Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push button. • Change by tapping in the setting level. • Select desired fan level with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Heater (HEATER) Icon – OFF an lead to additional motor wear C depending on frequency of use. Fan level “HIGH” results in higher power consumption, higher noise level and increased motor wear. 2 As soon as the heater is switched on (room temperature, hot water level selected) the status bar (2) displays the fan level that was selected during the previous heating procedure. The factory setting is “ECO”. Icon Operating mode – OFF Description Fan is switched off (only selectable if no appliance is in operation). a - b LOW Low fan level Fan is switched off (only selectable if no appliance is in operation). c MID Medium fan level d HIGH High fan level e NIGHT Ultra-quiet fan operation AUTO Automatic fan level selection. Cannot be changed in AUTO mode. Circulated air, when no appliance is in operation and the hot water generator is switched off. 10 speed settings available. VENT1 b ECO Low fan level c HIGH2 High fan level BOOST 1 Description a d 108 Operating mode Note: Rapid room heating. Available if the difference between the selected and the actual room temperature is >10 °C f Automatic air-conditioning system (AUTO), When connected/When AC is fitted Not possible to select the fan level with the automatic air conditioning system. • The fan level of the air conditioning system is determined automatically. • Only “ECO” is available for heaters. 12hour mode ! WARNING: Danger of toxic exhaust fumes. The activated time switch switches on the heater even when the vehicle is parked. The heater’s exhaust can be toxic in closed spaces (e.g. garages, workshops). If the vehicle is parked in closed rooms: • Shut off the fuel supply (gas or diesel) to the heater. • Deactivate the time switch of the Truma CP plus control panel (OFF). • Switch off the heater on the Truma CP plus control panel. Note: • When air conditioning systems are being operated, the time switch of the Truma CP plus control panel must only be used to clearly define the start and end time for a required period of time. • If the time switch has been activated (ON), the deactivate time switch menu is displayed first (OFF). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Set time switch Entering the end time • Set the hours then the minutes with the rotary push button. 24hour mode 12hour mode • Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push button. • Change by tapping in the setting level. Enter start tme • Set the hours then the minutes with the rotary push button. 24hour mode Note: If the start/end point was exceeded during entry, the operating parameters are not taken into consideration until the next start/end point has been reached. Until then, the operating parameters that have been set outside the time switch remain valid. Set the room temperature • Select the heater, air conditioning system or AUTO using the rotary push button, depending on the appliance that is connected. • Tap rotary push button to confirm selection. • Select required room temperature with rotary push button. 109 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Note: The Select fan level menu is only available if the heater / hot water level has been set. Not available with automatic air conditioning system AUTO. Activate time switch (ON) Set the hot water level • Activate time switch with rotary push button (ON). • Select required hot water level with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Select energy source • Select required energy source with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Note: • The time switch remains active until it is deactivated (OFF), even for several days. • If the time switch is programmed and active, the time switch icon flashes. Deactivate time switch (OFF) • Change by tapping in the setting level. • Deactivate time switch with rotary push button (OFF). • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Note: The select energy type menu is displayed if a heating system with electric heating elements is connected. Select fan level • Select desired fan level with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Switch lighting on/off Available when air conditioning system is connected and only with Aventa comfort or Aventa eco air conditioners. • Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push button. • Change by tapping in the setting level. • Select required function with rotary push button. 110 - S witch lighting on. Brightness selectable in 5 levels. OFF - Switch lighting off. • Tap the rotary push button to confirm the value. Service menu 1. Calibrating the room temperature sensor of the heater (OFFSET) The room temperature sensor of the heater can be individually adjusted to the sensor’s installation situation. The setting can be made in increments of 0.5°C within the range of 0°C to -5°C. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT 1 – 5 Set time 24hour mode Example: Set room temperature 23 °C; OFFSET = -1 °C; • Setpoint value for heater = 22 °C Presetting: 0 °C (Celsius). 2. AC SET1,2 (When air conditioner is connected/fitted) 12hour mode • With the rotary push button (8), select the “Set time“ symbol in the menu bar (4). The hour display flashes. • Set the hours with rotary push button (8). • The minutes display flashes when the rotary push button (8) is tapped again. • Set the minutes with rotary push button (8). • Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm the value. The sensed room temperature can – during operation of the automatic air conditioning system – be perceived differently during cooling than during heating. “AC SET” is used to set an offset between cooling and heating. The setting can be made in increments of 0.5 °C within the range of 0 °C to +5 °C. Example: Set room temperature 23 °C; AC SET = 2 °C • Setpoint value for air conditioning system = 25 °C Presetting: +1°C (Celsius) Notes: 1 Only available if the air conditioning system and heater are connected. 2 Only available if ACC is set to “ON”. 111 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL 3. ACC1 (When air conditioner is connected/fitted) • with good circulation and not on the vehicle ceiling. The automatic air conditioning system function AUTO is activated or blocked with “ACC”. Truma dealers / Truma partners are trained in correctly installing the automatic air conditioning system. You can find Truma partners at www.truma.com. ON -T he automatic air conditioning system function AUTO is activated. Automatic air conditioning system function AUTO can be selected in the Room temperature menu. - “AC SET” appears in the Service menu. OFF -T he automatic air conditioning system function AUTO is blocked. 4. °C / °F temperature display Select the temperature display °C (Celsius) or °F (Fahrenheit). Presetting: °C (Celsius). Presetting: OFF Note: The function of the Truma automatic air conditioning system depends on proper installation. Your Truma dealer/ partner would be pleased to advise you whether your vehicle is suitable. Requirements for the automatic air conditioning system functioning as expected: 1. The air conditioning system and heater cover the entire area of the vehicle that is supposed to be automatically air conditioned. 2. The room temperature sensor of the heater is the lead sensor of the automatic air conditioning system and must therefore be in a suitable location, i.e. • in the area in which the required room temperature should be reached. • if possible not influenced by the outside temperature and sunlight. • not near to warm air ducts, cold air ducts or other sources of heat. 112 • warm or cold air from the air outlets must not flow against the room temperature sensor. particular attention must be paid to this when adjusting the air throttles on Aventa air conditioning systems. 5. Changing the background lighting Change the background lighting of the Truma CP plus control panel in 10 levels. 6. 12 h / 24 h mode Display time in 12 h (a. m., p. m.) / 24 h mode. Presetting: 24 h mode. Perform Reset Select the desired language (German, English, French, Italian). • Select “RESET” with the rotary push button (8). • Tap on the rotary push button (8) • “PR SET” appears in the display. • Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT 7. Change language Presetting: English 8. Showing the version number Display version number of heater, air conditioning system, After confirmation, the Truma CP plus control panel initialises itself. Truma CP plus control panel or iNetBox. “INIT..” appears on the display while this is in progress. Special displays 230V mains voltage available Example: The icon signals that 230 V mains power supply is available. H 1.20.01 –> H = appliance; 1.20.01 = version number Appliance C = Truma CP plus control panel C = Truma CP plus control panel SMART Command A = Air conditioning system H = Heater T = Truma iNet Box 9. Presetting (RESET) The reset function resets the Truma CP plus control panel back to the factory setting. All settings will be deleted. Newly connected appliances are recognised and saved in the Truma CP plus control panel. • Switch on the power supply 12 V direct voltage for CP plus control panel and Combi and230 V mains voltage for air conditioning systems and Combi E. Truma app with iNet Box (when fitted) When a command is snet via the Truma APP of a mobile terminal device, “APP” appears in the display. Infrared (IR) remote control (air conditioning system when fitted) When a command is sent via infrared remote control of air conditioning system, “IR” appears in the display. External control panel (CI-BUS) (when fitted) When a command is sent via an external control panel with CU-BUS, “CI” appears in the display. Note: The Truma CP plus control panel CI-BUS is the company’s own variant that is configured only at the factory. 113 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL ! Warning This symbol indicates that an operating parameter has reached an undefined state. In this case the appliance concerned continues to operate. As soon as the operating parameter is within the target range again, this symbol goes off again automatically. Read out code of warning • Select icon with rotary push button. • Tap the rotary push button. The current warning code will be displayed. The cause of the warning can be determined and remedied with the aid of the troubleshooting guide (from page 115). W= Warning 42 = Fault code H= Device H = Heater A = Air conditioning system Fault In the event of a fault, the Truma CP plus control panel immediately jumps to the “Fault” menu level and displays the fault code of the fault. The cause of the fault can be determined and remedied with the aid of the troubleshooting guide (from page 115). E = Fault 112 = Fault code H = Device H = Heater A = Air conditioning system Cause eliminated / return to setting level • Tap the rotary push button. • The respective appliance is restarted. Note: This can take several minutes because of internal after-runs of connected appliances. If the cause has not been remedied, the fault will occur again and the control panel will jump to the “Fault” menu level again. Cause not eliminated, / return to the setting level Cause eliminated / return to setting level • Tap the rotary push button. Cause not eliminated / return to the setting level • Press the Back button. Note: In this case, the warning in the Truma CP plus control panel has not been acknowledged and the warning symbol remains. The affected appliance remains in warning status. Other connected appliances can be operated. 114 • Press the Back button. Note: In this case, the fault in the Truma CP plus control panel has not been acknowledged and the warning symbol remains. The appliance remains in fault state. Other connected appliances can be operated. TRUMA TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Cause Remedy #17 • Summer mode with empty water container • Switch device off and allow to cool. Fill boiler with water #18 • Warm air outlet blocked • Check each of the outlet openings • Circulated air intake blocked • Remove the blockage from the circulated air intake #21 • Room temperature sensor or cable faulty • Inspect the room temperature sensor cable, replace if faulty • Check the resistance of the room temperature sensor. 15°C – 16.2 kOhm / 20°C – 12.6 kOhm / 25°C – 10.0 kOhm Replace the room temperature sensor if faulty #24 • Risk of low voltage. Battery voltage is too low < 10.4 V • Charge battery #29 • Frost Control heating element has a short circuit • Disconnect heating element plug from electronic control unit. Replace heating element #42 • Open window above cowl (window switch) • Close the window #43 • Over-voltage > 16.4V • Check battery voltage / voltage sources such as the charger #44 • Low voltage. Battery voltage is too low < 10.0 V • Charge battery. If necessary replace old battery #45 • No 230 V operating voltage • Restore 230V operating voltage • Faulty 230V fuse • Replace 230V fuse • Overheating protection has triggered • Please contact Truma Service • Gas cylinder or quick-acting valve in the gas supply line closed. • Check gas supply and open valves #202 #121 • Gas pressure regulation system iced up • Use regulator heater (EisEx) • Butane content in the gas cylinder too high • Use propane. Butane is unsuitable for heating, particularly at temperatures lower than 10°C. • Combustion air infeed or exhaust outlet is sealed • Inspect openings for obstructions (slush, ice, leaves, etc.) and remove any obstructions • Gas pressure regulation system faulty • Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation system • Electronic system faulty • Please contact Truma Service • Heater has no 12 V power supply • Ensure that the 12V power supply is available • No connection between heater and control panel • Make connection between heater and control panel • Control panel cable faulty • Please contact the Truma Service #112 #211 #122 #212 #255 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Troubleshooting instructions (Combi Gas heater) If these measures do not remedy the fault or if fault codes are displayed that you cannot find in the troubleshooting guide, contact Truma Service. 115 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER Truma Combi 4E/6E Function description The liquid gas heater Combi E is a warm-air heater with integrated hot water boiler (10 liter volume). The burner operates fan-supported, which ensures trouble-free function even when on the move. The unit also has heating elements for electrical operation. In winter operation the heater can be used to heat the room and simultaneously warm water. If only warm water is required, select summer operation. 3 different options are available for operating the unit. • gas operation only Propane / Butane for autonomous use • electrical operation only 230 V for stationary use on camp sites • combined gas and electrical operation (winter mode only) Winter operation In winter operation, the unit automatically selects the required power setting according to the temperature difference between the temperature set on the control panel and the current room temperature. When the boiler is filled, the water is automatically heated as well. The water temperature depends on the selected operational mode and the heater output. If more output is required (e.g. heating up or low outside temperatures) gas or mixed operation should be selected so that enough heating power is always available. With mixed operation, 230 V electrical operation is preferred if the power requirement is low (e.g. for maintaining the room temperature). The gas burner is not enabled until the power requirement is higher, and is the first to switch off during heat-up operations. Summer operation (boiler operation only) Gas operation or 230 V electrical operation is used for hot water preparation. The water temperature can be set to 40 °C or 60 °C. With gas operation the water is heated at the lowest burner setting. Once the water temperature is reached, the burner switches off. Depending on the fuse protection at the camping site, power of 900 W (3.9 A) or 1800 W (7.8 A) can be manually selected for electrical operation. Mixed operation is not possible. With this setting the unit automatically selects electrical operation. The gas burner is not enabled. Repairs may only be carried out by an expert Guarantee claims, warranty claims and acceptance of liability will be ruled out in the event of the following: All 3 energy selection options can be used for winter deployment. – modifications to the unit (including accessories), With gas operation the unit automatically selects the output level that is required. – modifications to the exhaust duct and the cowl, Depending on the fuse protection at the camping site, power of 900 W (3.9 A) or 1800 W (7.8 A) can be manually selected for electrical operation. – failure to use original Truma parts as replacement parts and accessories, – failure to follow the installation and operating instructions. It also becomes illegal to use the appliance, and in some countries this even makes it illegal to use the vehicle. During the initial operation of a brand new appliance (or after it has not been used for some time), a slight amount of fumes and 116 Heat-sensitive objects such as spray cans or flammable liquids may not be stored in the same compartment where the heater is installed because, under certain conditions, this area may be subject to elevated temperatures. Important operating notes ! WARNING: Care should be taken to ensure adequate ventilation of the flue at all times. It is inadvisable to inhale exhaust fumes. For operating on gas turn on gas cylinder and open the shut off valve at the manifold. For operating on electric operate the heater / heating system heater switch on the power supply unit. See page 72. Summer operation (boiler operation only) The integrity and tight fit of the exhaust gas double duct must be checked regularly, particularly at the end of long trips. Also check the mounting of the appliance and the cowl. Mixed operation (gas and electrical) is not possible in summer mode. With this setting the unit automatically selects electrical operation with a preselected power setting of 900 W or 1800 W. Following a blow-back (misfire) always have the exhaust gas system checked by an expert! Winter operation Always keep the cowl for the exhaust duct and combustion air intake free of contamination (slush, ice, leaves etc.). The hot air outlets and the recirculated air intake openings must be free so that the unit does not overheat. The integrated temperature limiter blocks the gas supply when the unit becomes too hot. Operating Instructions Always observe the operating instructions and “Important operating notes” prior to starting! The vehicle owner is responsible for the correct operation of the appliance. Before using for the first time, it is essential to flush the entire water supply system through with clean water. If the heater is not being used, always drain the water contents if there is a risk of frost. There shall be no claims under guarantee for damage caused by frost! Taking into operation Heating is possible without restrictions with gas, electrical and mixed operation, with or without water. Check to make sure the cowl is unobstructed. Be sure to remove any covers that may be present. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT smell may be noticed for a short while. It is a good idea to heat the device up several times in summer operation (60 °C) and to make sure that the area is well ventilated. Heating with water temperature monitoring The device automatically selects the required power setting in accordance with the temperature difference between the temperature selected on the control panel and the current room temperature. When the room temperature selected on the control panel is reached, the heater switches back to the smallest setting and heats the water to 60 °C. Once the water temperature is reached, the heater switches off and the yellow LED (p) goes out. The warm air fan can continue to run in order to cool the unit (after-run). Heating without water temperature monitoring The device automatically selects the required power setting in accordance with the temperature difference between the temperature selected on the control panel and the current room temperature. Once the room temperature selected on the control panel has been reached, the heater switches off. The warm air fan continues to run at slow speed until the outgoing air temperature (on the unit) has fallen to 40°C or less. If the boiler is filled, the water will automatically be heated at the same time. 117 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER The water temperature is then dependent on the heating output being given off, and the duration of heating required to reach the desired room temperature. Heating with drained water system Depending on the operating mode, the unit will automatically select the required power level according to the temperature difference between the setting on the control panel and the current room temperature. Once the room temperature selected on the control panel has been reached, the heater switches off. The warm air fan continues to run at slow speed until the outgoing air temperature (on the unit) has fallen to 40°C or less. Filling the water heater Switch on power for water pump (main or pump switch). Open hot water taps in kitchen and bathroom, (set preselecting mixing taps or single-lever fittings to “hot”). Leave the fittings open for as long as it takes for the boiler to displace the air and fill up, and the water to flow without interruption. If just the cold water system is being operated, without using the water heater, the heater tank also fills up with water. To avoid frost damage, the boiler must be drained through the drain valve, even if the boiler was not operated. When connecting to a central water supply (rural or city mains), a pressure reduction valve must always be installed to prevent pressures above 2.8 bar from developing in the water heater. Draining the water heater Switch off power to water pump (main or pump switch). Open hot water taps in kitchen and bathroom. In order to check the water that is flowing out, place an appropriate container (capacity 10 litres) beneath the drain valve. Open the drain valve which is situated next to the boiler by lifting the yellow handle into the vertical position. Check whether all of the water in the boiler (10 itres) has been drained into the container via the drain valve. There shall be no claims under guarantee for damage caused by frost! 118 Fuses 230 V Only original Truma parts may be used for maintenance and repair work! Materials in the device which come into contact with water are suitable for use with drinking water (see manufacturer‘s declaration: www.truma.com / downloads / manufacturer‘s declaration). The fuse and the power supply lines must only be replaced by an expert! Bio-film, deposits and limescale must be removed using chemicals to protect the unit from infestation by microorganisms. The fuse is in the power electronics (16) beneath the electronic housing lid. Only chloride-free products must be used in order to prevent damage to the unit. The unit must be disconnected from the mains (all poles) before opening the electronic housing lid. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Maintenance This fine fuse must always be replaced with a fuse of the same type: 10 A, slow, interrupting capacity “H”. The effectiveness of the use of chemicals to combat microorganisms in the unit can be increased by heating the water in the boiler to 70 °C at regular intervals. The unit must stay switched on for at least 30 minutes and no warm water may be removed. The residual heat in the heat exchanger will heat the water up to 70 °C. Fuses 12 V The fuse is in the electronics beneath the connection cover. Replace the unit’s fuse only with an identical fuse. Device fuse: 10 A – slow – (T 10 A) Overheating protection 230 V The 230 V heating facility has a mechanical overheating switch. If the 12 V power supply is interrupted during operation or during the after-run period, for example, the temperatures within the unit could activate the overheating protection. To reset the overheating protection, allow heater to cool, remove connection cover and press red reset button. 119 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER Technical data Determined in accordance with EN 624 or Truma test conditions Device category I3 B/P in accordance with EN 437 Type of gas Liquid gas (propane/butane) Operating pressure 30mbar (see type plate) Water contents 10 litres Heating up time from approx 15OC to 60OC Boiler approx 20 minutes (measure according to EN15033) Heater + boiler approx 80 min Water pressure max 2.8 bar Rated thermal output (automatic output levels) Gas operation Combi 4 E: 2000 W / 4000 W Combi 6 E: 2000 W / 4000 W / 6000W Electrical operation Combi 4 E / Combi 6 E: 900 W / 1800 W Mixed operation (gas and electrical) Combi 4 E: max. 3800 W Combi 6 E: max. 5800 W Gas consumption Combi 4 E: 160-320 g/h Combi 6 E: 160-480 g/h Readiness-heat power requirement Combi 4 E / Combi 6 E: Gas operation 5.2 g/h Air delivery volume (free-blowing without hot-air pipe) Combi 4 E: with 3 hot-air outlets max. 249 m3/h with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h Combi 6 E: with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h 120 Current input at 12 V heater +boiler Combi 4 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A (average power consumption 1.1 A) Combi 6 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A (average power consumption 1.3 A) Heating up of boiler: 0.4 A Stand-by: 0.001 A Heating element FrostControl (optional): maximum 0.4 A TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER TROUBLESHOOTING Fault Cause Rectification After switching on (winter and summer operation) none of the controls are operational. - No operating voltage. - Check 12 V battery voltage, charge if necessary. The unit is switched on, but the heater does not operate. - The temperature setting on the control panel is lower than the room temperature. - Select higher room temperature at the control panel. After operating for a longer period of time, the heater switches to failure. - Summer operation with empty water tank. - Switch device off and allow to cool. Fill boiler with water. - Hot-air outlets blocked. - Check individual outlet apertures. - Recirculated air intake blocked. - Remove blockage from recirculated air intake. - Gas pressure regulator iced up - Use regulator heating (EisEx). - Device fuse or vehicle fuse defective. - Check the unit or vehicle fuse and replace if necessary (see fuses). - Butane content in the gas cylinder too high. Fan continues to run after controls switched off When the device is switched on in electrical operation, the heater does not heat up. - Check all electrical plug connections. - Use propane (at temperatures below 10 °C in particular, butane is unsuitable for heating purposes). - Unit was switched off during failure. Afterrunning is active in order to reduce the unit’s temperature. - After-running will switch off after a few minutes. Only at that time will a failure reset be possible (switch off and then back on). - After-running is active in order to reduce the unit’s temperature. - No failure. After-running will switch off after approximately 5 minutes. - No 230 V operating voltage. - Check 230 V operating voltage, and settings on power supply unit (EC400/ES600) - 230 V fuse defective. - Overheating protection has activated F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Troubleshooting - Check 230 V fuse and replace if necessary. - Reset overheating protection. Allow heater to cool, remove connection cover and press reset button. If these measures do not remove the failure, please contact the Truma Service Centre. 121 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T BLOWN AIR OUTLETS Truma heating system and air flow The Swift Group undertakes considerable testing of our products in cold chambers to ensure they meet the BS EN 1649 Grade 3 standard and are usable in cold temperatures. Butterfly outlets The air ducting outlets on models equipped with Truma Combi heating systems, are of the butterfly type. These may be opened or closed by moving the flap within the fitting, to adjust the balance of the heating output throughout the caravan. This can help offset differences in blown air output, between outlets close to the heating appliance, and those at a greater distance away from the heating appliance. This can also help adjust the temperature of the bathroom, relative to the temperature of the main living area and/or bedroom. When these outlet butterflies are closed in conjunction with a high heating system output, and therefore a high fan speed, a slight whistling sound can occur. In this case, opening the outlet slightly will reduce or remove the noise. Closing too many outlets when the heating system is producing a high output, can cause the appliance to reach high operating temperatures. This does not in general terms affect the appliance, but it can cause the appliance to automatically shut down. This can cause an interruption of the heating of the caravan, how ever heating will resume when the appliance temperatures have reduced to a lower level. The output of the appliance, and therefore the output of the blown air outlets, will generally be higher when using Gas or Dual Fuel operation. Electric only operation of the heating is rated at up to 1.8kw, whereas Gas (or Dual Fuel) operation is rated at up to 4kw (3.8kw) or 6kw (5.8kw), depending which model of Combi is fitted. 122 The blown air fittings can also be rotated to adjust the direction of air leaving the outlet, as shown in the photo below. Blown air The air ducting outlets are generally of the butterfly type and may be opened or closed by adjusting the butterfly valves. Twisting the disc in its housing directs the flow in the direction required. Some outlets do not feature butterfly valves and must remain fully open. One outlet on each leg of the air ducting layout must be kept open at all times. Under no circumstances should the air ducting outlets be blocked. ALDE CONTROL PANEL F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Alde 3020 - HE The Alde 3020 Compact HE control panel has two hard buttons and a non-capacitive, colour touchscreen interface. The soft buttons displayed on the screen are operated by touching the screen with your finger. Important: Please read the Alde 3020 Compact HE operating instructions fully before using the system Control of Alde system via Swift Command The Alde system can also be controlled using Swift Command. Please see details in the electrical section of this handbook for further details. 1. Starting the system i. Both the control panel and boiler are off. The system will now be drawing variable 0.1–1.5 A of current from the 12v supply. 2. Standby screen The Standby Screen is displayed after the Splash Screen. This screen contains useful information about the status of your heating system. Note: If Standby Screen is set to “Dark” in Backlight settings, the Standby Screen will not be displayed, the screen will be dark unless touched. ii. To start the system, press the Power button on the control panel. The Splash Screen is displayed and green LED is lit. The boiler will now start with the previously saved settings (factory settings by default). A. Clock Clock is enabled. Day of the week and time shown. B. Outdoor temperature Optional outdoor temperature sensor required. 123 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE CON TROL PANEL C. Room temperature Measured at the control panel. (Optional discrete room temperature sensors available). D. Circulation pump Central heating circulation pump is active. ii. Main Menu. a. What’s Activated Menu [Not displayed if no activated functions are detected.] b. Settings Menu E. Delayed start Delayed Start/Cycle is enabled. F. Day mode Day Mode active. G. Gas cylinder status Gas Cylinder Status. Full/empty and active EisEx shown. (Additional accessories required). H. Night mode Night Mode active. I. 230v supply If not displayed, the boiler is not receiving 230v supply. J. Power button Press to switch system on-off. Lit green LED indicates system is on. K. Menu button Press to access Main Menu from Standby Screen or Settings Menu. 3. Main menu Desired Room Temperature The desired room temperature can be set from 5 to 30°C, in 0.5 increments. Tip! T he World Health Organisation recommends a room temperature of 18–24°C for healthy living. Note: If Day or Night Mode are active, the temperature cannot be adjusted, the Plus and Minus buttons will be greyed out. Press MENU button to access the Main Menu from the Standby Screen or Settings Menu. The screen will revert to the Standby Screen after 30 secs if untouched. 1. The current desired room temperature is displayed. i. Standby Screen. Press MENU button. 2. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button. Domestic Hot Water The Alde boiler stores 8.4 Litres of hot water as standard. If the hot water cylinder is empty, the air is heated but no damage can result. Tip! In a good summer, for example, lower the desired temperature on the control panel to around 10°C. The central heating will not circulate (unless the temperature drops to 10°C), but you can still control hot water. Note: If Day or Night Mode’s Hot Water Ignore is active, the hot water cannot be adjusted, the Plus and Minus buttons will be greyed out. 124 ii. H ot Water Normal. Volume bar half-full. Hot water is heated to greater than 50°C. NB: If Circulation Pump is set to Continuous, this option will not be available. What’s Activated Menu Press the A button to access the What’s Activated Menu. This screen shows any functions that are activated and allows direct access to that function by pressing its button. NB: The A button is not displayed if no functions are activated. iii. H ot Water Boost. Volume bar full. Central heating circulation is disabled for 30 mins. Hot water is heated to greater than 65°C. After 30 mins the system reverts to Hot Water Normal. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT i. Hot Water Ignore. Volume bar empty. No attempt is made to heat hot water specifically. This saves energy when the freshwater is drained down. iv. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button. Electric Heating Check that 230v supply is displayed on the Standby Screen. The Alde boiler is hard wired to use power economically and there are times when it may use no power at all, even if set to 3kW. i. Select Off, 1, 2 or 3 kW electric heating. More power equals better performance, but may be restricted by the current (amps) limit on the electric hook-up. ii. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button. Max current draw from 230 V supply is 4.5 A on 1 kW, 9 A on 2 kW, 14 A on 3 kW. If the electric supply has unstable voltage, the amperage will also fluctuate. Gas Heating The Alde boiler is hard wired to use power economically. The gas burner has two stages, shifting dynamically between low or full flame. There are times when it may use no power at all, even if gas heating is selected. i. Press the Flame button to select gas heating. Green is on, blue is off. Use both gas and electric heating for best performance. Note: Not all Alde functions are relevant to a motorhome installation, (activated functions are shown below) Activated Functions Night Mode is enabled, but may or may not be active, depending on the time and day. Delayed Start/Cycle is enabled, but may or may not be active, depending on the time and day. Alde Smart-Control or daisy-chained, third party control panel is enabled. This includes the Swift Command system. Ensure this feature is enabled. Circulation Pump is set to Continuous. NB: This will reduce the hot water supply. 125 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE CON TROL PANEL Day Mode is enabled, but may or may not be active, depending on the time and day. Load Monitor is enabled and an amp limit is set. (model specific) Settings Menu Press the Tool Button to access the Settings Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level functions can be accessed by from these screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a function is not available its button is greyed out. To return to the Main Menu, press the MENU button. Delayed Start/Cycle (requires Clock to be set) llows you to programme the A boiler to start at a specified time and day, weekly. It will provide heating using the last saved settings for 24 hours, before automatically shutting down again. This is recommended for airing the vehicle over winter if stored locally and hooked up to 230 V power. Once Delayed Start/Cycle is enabled, the system should be shut down by pressing the Power button. here are four screens in the T Settings Menu. The up/down arrows allow you to navigate between them. Night Mode (requires Clock to be set) llows you to programme the A boiler to automatically change and select settings at night. Set a start and stop time for the night-time period. Set a day of the week, or “All” for the same daily programme. You can also define: • Desired room temperature • Invert Standby Screen • Hot water ignore •Temperature sensor (if discrete room temperature sensors are connected) • AC Quiet Mode (if Truma Aventa Comfort air-conditioning unit is connected) Day Mode (requires Clock to be set) llows you to programme the A boiler to automatically change and select settings during the day. Set a start and stop time for the day-time period. Set a day of the week, or “All” for the same daily programme. You can also define: • Desired room temperature • Hot water ignore Clock Temperature Offset he clock must be set for T programmable functions to activate at the correct time/day. If 12 V power is lost, the clock will reset. ecalibrate the room temperature R displayed by the control panel in 0.5 °C increments. If an outdoor temperature sensor is connected, this can also be recalibrated. TiP! The optional Alde 3010-414 battery backup uses two AA batteries and allows the clock memory to be stored even if 12 V power is lost. 126 Navigation Arrows Return Return to the previous menu. elect whether to prioritise gas S heating or electric heating, when using both. Less demand will be placed on the non-prioritised fuel. TiP! If you’re hooked up to a site with a flat rate 230 V supply, but still want the extra performance from gas heating, prioritise electric heating to save money on gas. Pump Manual 12 V. For the 12V inline circulation pump with manual 5-speed dial. Pump Remote 12 V For the remote-controlled 12 V inline circulation pump. Pump speed can also be set. Speed 2 is recommended. Speed 4–5 should only be used prior to bleeding the system of air. Optional Pump 12 V. For the optional 12V circulation pump in the expansion tank. Pump 230 V. For the 230V inline circulation pump Button Sound Bleep when a button is pressed. Backlight he brightness of the Standby T Screen can be adjusted from 1–3. The display mode of the Standby Screen can also be set. Dark. The Standby Screen is deactivated, the control panel may appear dormant except for the power LED. Pressing the screen will activate the Standby Screen for 30 secs. Suited for use in dark/night-time conditions. Bright. The Standby Screen shows dark characters on a light background. Suited for use in bright/day-time conditions. Invert. The Standby Screen shows light characters on a dark background. Suited for low light conditions. Antimicrobial (requires Clock to be set) ot Water Boost will automatically H activate at 02:00 every morning. This further reduces the risk of Legionella bacteria. Circulation Pump elect which circulation pump S to use for the central heating, depending on what pumps are installed. (your motorhome is fitted with ‘pump manual 12V’). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Prioritise Auto. Automatically selects the 230V pump when a 230V supply is detected, or the optional 12V pump when only 12V supply is available. Pump mode can also be set. Cont. The pump is continuously active. This will reduce the hot water supply. For testing the circulation pump in the summer, if room temperature exceeds 30°C. Thermo. The pump is controlled by the room thermostat. External Switch llows you to use a third party, A external switch to start up and shutdown the boiler. When the external switch starts the boiler, it will provide heating using the last saved settings. Once External Switch is enabled, the system should be shut down by pressing the Power button. The external switch then takes control of the boiler. 127 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE CON TROL PANEL Ext. When a circuit is made at X18 on the boiler, the boiler is started. When the circuit is broken, the boiler shuts down. For use with a third party rocker or toggle switch, or compatible telematics systems. NB: The Alde 3010-219 adaptor lead is available for connecting an external switch. 230V. When 230V is detected, the boiler is started. When 230V supply is lost, the boiler shuts down. No additional accessories required. Off. External Switch is disabled. TiP! Hiring out a vehicle? Your customers can operate the central heating/hot water with a convenient wall switch, whilst the control panel is fitted in a locked maintenance cupboard with a discrete room temperature sensor. On-off, no hassles. Language Select English, French or German language. NB: The Service Menu is English language only. Load Monitor If an Alde 3010-246 load monitor is installed, this allows you to set an amp limit from 5–17 A for the vehicle’s 230V power. If the current drawn by the vehicle exceeds the amp limit, the boiler will automatically reduce power. This helps avoid tripping the circuit breakers on the electric hook up. The load monitor can be disabled by selecting “Off”. Settings Menu Press the Tool Button to access the Settings Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level functions can be accessed by from these screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a function is not available its button is greyed out. 128 Error Log Press the Warning button to access the Error Log from the Service Menu. The most recent 20 error messages are displayed. To verify an error message, remove the system from the 12V and 230V supply. Wait 10 secs before restoring 12V and 230V power to the system. After fitting an accessory to the Alde 3020 Compact HE, it must be installed in the control panel software by ticking the box for that accessory in the Installed Accessories Menu, unless otherwise noted. Press the Installed Accessories button to access the menu from the Settings Menu. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Installed Accessories Menu Reset Press Reset to restore factory default settings, and the Error Log will be cleared. NB: The Main Menu will be set to 22°C, Hot Water Normal, 1 kW electric heating and gas heating. Note: Using Reset to restore factory default settings does not clear Installed Accessories. Fig 1 4. Shutting down the system To save energy, the control panel only updates the boiler after the last adjustment is made. Wait 10 secs before shutting down the system to ensure the boiler is updated. Fig 2 Press the Power button again. The screen goes dark, the green LED is unlit. The system is off. Fig 3 Fig 4 129 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE CON TROL PANEL Setup Standby Screen for bedtime The backlight on the Standby Screen can be disturbing if the control panel is visible from your bed. It can be inverted for white text on black background. i. Press Tool button to access the Settings Menu (bottom right in Main Menu). Fig 5 The following options are shown as standard. Tick the box to install: • Alde Smart Control, or third party control panel (connected to JP3 on Alde control panel) This feature must be enabled to allow Swift Command system to control ALDE system. • Optional 12V circulation pump in expansion tank (connected at X4 on boiler) • Load Monitor (connected to X5 on boiler) • 12V inline circulation pump with manual 5-speed dial • Remote controlled 12V inline circulation pump • 230V inline circulation pump 5. Setup How you set up your system will depend on what accessories are installed and your user preferences. To get you started, here’s how to setup some of the more common features. Restore default factory settings Before using the system for the first time, restore default factory settings. Your control panel may have been tested by the dealer or installer, and some settings may have been changed unintentionally. i. Press Tool button to access the Settings Menu (bottom right in Main Menu). ii. Press down arrow, until Reset button is displayed. iii. Press the Reset button to proceed 130 ii. Press down arrow, until Backlight button is displayed. iii. Press Backlight button, select Invert to proceed. Setup Antimicrobial function To actively kill Legionella, setup the Antimicrobial function. At 2:00 every night, the hot water will be heated to over 65°C for 30 mins. This further reduces the risk of Legionella. i. Press Tool button to access the Settings Menu (bottom right in Main Menu). ii. Press Clock button, set the time and day. Press Return. iii. Press down arrow, until Antimicrobial button is displayed. iv. Press Antimicrobial button to proceed. ALDE HEATING TROUBLESHOOTING No central heating Any error messages will be displayed on the Standby Screen. Error messages can be cleared by switching off 12 V supply to the boiler for 10 secs. • Bleed the system of air. The system is completely dead, the control panel is blank • Check the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in the boiler. This is located under the lid of the black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic fuse holder. • Check the 12 V supply to the boiler, it should be above 12 V. • Check the 12 V cable is plugged into the boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the Alde control panel. • Check the fluid level in the expansion tank. • Check that the circulation pump is responding. • Check that hot water boost is not activated on the Alde control panel. • If electric heating is not being used, set it to “Off” on the Alde control panel. • Use gas and electric heating for best performance. • Check that vents in the furniture are not obstructed. • Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid. The boiler will not ignite on gas, but no error message • Most vehicles will reach a comfortable temperature within 40 mins, in non-extreme conditions. • The system may not need to use gas heating if also using electric heating. Circulation pump active even though system is off • The fluids in the boiler may already be at operating temperature. • 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability. The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric “Panel failure 1” & “Panel failure 2” • Check the circuit breaker and any 230 V fuses. • Moisture is trapped in the control panel. • Check that any 230 V isolator switches are on (they will often have an LED indicator and 230V fuse). • Check the 230 V supply to the vehicle. • The fluids in the boiler may already be at operating temperature. No hot water • Check that Hot Water Ignore is not activated on the Alde control panel. • Check that Continuous pumping is not activated on the Alde control panel. • Check for other conflicting settings on the Alde control panel. • Check the fresh water supply and water pump. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Troubleshooting • Remove the Alde control panel from the vehicle and air in a warm, dry place overnight. “Gas failure” • Out of gas or gas is not igniting. • Check the gas cylinder is full. Try a different gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas. • Check the gas regulator and any isolation valves are open and not frozen. “Overheat red fail” or “Overheat blue fail” • Bleed the system of air. • Check the fluid level in the expansion tank. It should be 1 cm above Min mark when cool. • Check the correct circulation pump is installed, selected and responding. • 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability. • Wait 15 mins for the fluid to cool down. 131 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE HEATING TROUBLESHOOTING “Overheat PCB” • Failsafe in boiler has triggered. • Check the fluid level in the expansion tank. It should be 1 cm above the Min mark when cool. • Check the boiler compartment is ventilated, and that the vents are unobstructed. Do not place stowage in the boiler compartment. “Fan failure” • Combustion fan speed too low. Bearing may be stiff after a period of disuse. • Automatically clears after 5 mins. Please try again. “Connection failure” • Loose connection between Alde control panel and boiler. • Unplug cable at the control panel and boiler, then carefully plug back in. • Check there is slack on the cable at the control panel, but not excessive weight from free- hanging/unmanaged cable. “Window open” • Optional window sensor has triggered, gas heating is suspended. Automatically clears and gas heating resumes when window is closed. “3rd Party Panel C. Fail” • Break in comms between Alde control panel and third party control panel. • Check the cable between the Alde control panel and third party control panel. • Third party control panel is installed in software but not fitted. • Untick “Third Party Panel” in Installed Accessories Menu. “Low battery” • 12 V supply to boiler has dropped below 10.5 V, possibly causing system brownout. • Automatically clears when 12 V supply reaches 11 V. “No match Heater/Panel” • Control panel is incompatible with boiler PCB. 132 • Check control panel part number. Control panel 3020-013 is for 3020 A-series boiler, 3020-113 is for 3020 HE-series boiler. If problems persist, please contact Alde, or your dealer or installer. For our frequently asked questions, or download all instruction manuals, please visit our website at: www.alde.co.uk ALDE HEAT EXCHANGER The Kon Tiki range of motorhomes is fitted with an Alde heat exchanger, which transfers heat from the engine of the motorhome (when available) to the heating system in the habitation area of the motorhome. The diagram below shows a typical heating circuit, with the heat exchanger highlighted. The heat exchanger provides a link, via a series of plates, between the engine coolant fluid from the base vehicle, and the glycol fluid in the Alde heating circuit: At no time though do these two fluids mix, so the levels of each fluid must be maintained separately. To use the Heat Exchanger The Alde heating system must be switched on, while the motorhome engine is running, to use the heat exchanger. The following settings on the Alde control panel are suggested: Turn Alde heating system ON using power button at bottom left of panel Press MENU button at bottom right of panel Using the MINUS ( - ) and PLUS ( + ) touch screen settings on the top row of the panel (Thermometer symbol) to select a desired room temperature. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Alde Heat Exchanger During en-route use the water temperature setting on the second row of the touch screen (Shower symbol) is not relevant, and can be left in its previous setting. Heater Exchanger Boiler Chassis Cab Engine 133 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE BOILER Alde Compact 3020 ! WARNING: Alde can accept no liability whatsoever for damage or injury resulting from failure to observe these instructions. Specific Use These instructions are approved for the Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler fitted in motorhomes in accordance with CE 0402 no. SC0653-13, and have the E5 mark for installation in vehicles in accordance with ECE R122, no. 00 001 and R10, no. 04 166, for use in central heating and hot water systems. The boiler is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and/or knowledge, unless they have been given instruction or are supervised. The term “specified use” also covers observance of the operating and installation instructions. The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler must be installed or repaired by a competent person in accordance with current local regulations. In the unlikely event that your boiler develops a fault, switch off the boiler and contact Alde, or your dealer or installer. Operating and installation instructions for the Alde control panel are supplied separately. The owner is always responsible for maintenance and arranging inspection. Boiler Design The boiler’s internal heat exchanger consists of three concentric cylinders; the combustion chamber, the central heating cylinder and the hot water cylinder. The combustion chamber is made from aluminium, and is divided into two halves by a baffle plate, with the burner head located in the top half, and the flue gases venting through the bottom half. The combustion assembly is fixed to the end of the internal heat exchanger. It consists of the burner, combustion fan, gas valve, air 134 intake and exhaust ducts, and gas line. Two electric heating elements are sealed inside the central heating cylinder, one for 1 kW, one for 2 kW. Gas Heating When gas heating is set to on, the combustion fan starts to revolve. Once the correct speed is achieved (in rpm), a signal is sent to the PCB for the burner to be lit. The gas valve opens, passing gas, and the ignition module on the PCB generates sparks at the electrode on the burner head. When the burner ignites, a flame supervision device signals the ignition module to cease sparking. The burner fires until the boiler or room thermostat reach the setpoint. Should the burner flame out unexpectedly, the FSD detects this and attempts to reignite (for about 10 seconds), before shutting down and raising a fault code. Note: Listen carefully to the ignition sequence of the boiler. You should hear the whirl of the combustion fan, the clunk of the gas valve and the tick-tick of the ignition module. Electric Heating When electric heating is set to 1, 2 or 3 kW, relays on the PCB trip, feeding the 230v supply to the electric heating elements. These are controlled by the same programme as the gas heating. Domestic Hot Water The combi-type boiler automatically produces hot water. Heat is emitted from the central heating cylinder into the hot water cylinder. If the hot water cylinder is empty, the air is heated but no damage can result. Note: In a good summer, for example, lower the desired temperature on the control panel to around 10 °C. The central heating will not circulate (unless the temperature drops to 10 °C), but you will still have hot water. •T he boiler must not be switched on if there is no heat transfer fluid (HTF) in the system. •A lways drain down the freshwater system if there is risk of frost; in winter, for example. You may continue to use the boiler with no freshwater in the system, as required; no damage can result •A lways replace the HTF in accordance with the antifreeze product’s lifespan. . If in any doubt, replace the HTF after 2 years. •O nly sterilise the freshwater system with a product suitable for stainless steel. •D o not place stowage in the boiler compartment. •D o not position awnings, tents or other enclosures around the flue terminal. When the hot water cylinder is in continuous use, it should be drained and refilled once a month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges. Tip! If continuously using the hot water cylinder in a hard water area, fit an inline scale inhibitor to minimise the effects of limescale. Target hot water temperature is greater than 50°C in normal operation, to prevent the growth of Legionella. Over 50°C , the hot water will be heated to the maximum achievable temperature at the time. This allows the hot water to achieve disinfection temperatures, and increases warm water performance. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT ! WARNING: If scalding hot water temperatures are a concern – such as with the young, elderly or infirm – thermostatic mixing valves (TMVs) can be fitted, and may be required by local regulations. •D o not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to flood the flue when washing the vehicle. •T he gas heating must not be used when refuelling the vehicle at the service station or related facility. Domestic Hot Water Being a combi-type boiler, the Alde 3020 Compact HE has an integrated, stainless steel hot water cylinder that holds approximately 8.4 litres of freshwater. The boiler can produce around 12 litres of 40°C warm water per 30 mins (at a cold water temperature of 10°C). If only the electric heating is used, this capacity is slightly reduced. The hot water should not be used for drinking or cooking. Always flush out the hot water cylinder before use, especially when it has stood empty for some time. Any steriliser products should be suitable for use with stainless steel. Avoid steriliser products containing sodium hyperchlorite, for example, as these will cause severe corrosion damage to the hot water cylinder. Read the product label or contact the product manufacturer for details. ! WARNING: Always drain down and completely empty the hot water cylinder when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by the vehicle manufacturer. Failure to drain the hot water cylinder when there is a risk of frost may result in frost damage, and is not covered under warranty. 135 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE BOILER Draining Freshwater Heat Transfer Fluid 1. Switch off the water pump. The central heating system is filled with heat transfer fluid (HTF), a solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze and 50% water. 2. Open all water taps, showers, etc. 3. Open the safety/drain valve by lifting the yellow tab (Fig 1 [M]), or by turning the blue knob (Fig 1 [K]) 90°. 4. The system will drain directly below the vehicle through the clear plastic hose on the safety/drain valve. Check that all water has emptied out (7–10 litres). Leave the valve in the open position until the next time the hot water cylinder is used. Note: Check that the red breather valve (Fig 1[N]) is allowing air to enter the hot water cylinder, when it is being drained, and that the clear plastic hose is not obstructed. Figure 1 Open the manual safety/drain valve The antifreeze manufacturer will have a maximum water hardness recommendation. Read the product label or contact the product manufacturer for details. Note: For re-filling Alde recommends antifreeze meeting VAG G12++ or G13 specification, and deionised water (0 ppm). 50:50 ethylene glycol antifreeze and water will protect against frost down to -35–37 °C. A refractometer and/or hydrometer can be used to measure the strength of the antifreeze solution. Corrosion protection will vary depending on the lifespan of the antifreeze. Read the product label or contact the product manufacturer for details. ! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in accordance with the antifreeze product’s lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF after 2 years. Opening the safety/drain valve The corrosion inhibitors found in ethylene glycol antifreeze may not be cross-compatible. When topping up or replacing the HTF, ensure the new antifreeze is compatible with the current antifreeze product. Read the product label or contact the product manufacturer for details. ! WARNING: As a rough guideline, blue and red antifreeze products are not compatible with each other, but VAG G12++ and G13 spec antifreeze (purple/magenta) is compatible with both. Failure to fill with suitable HTF may result in severe damage to your Alde system, and is not covered under warranty. 136 ALDE BOILER Central Heating The central heating system is filled with HTF through the expansion tank, either by hand, or using the Alde service pump. Any containers used for handling or storing the HTF should be checked first, and must be visibly clean to avoid introducing contaminants or foreign objects into the system. The boiler is set to an upper limit temperature of 85°C, i.e., the temperature of the heat transfer fluid (HTF) as it circulates around the pipes, radiators, convectors, et al. Alde recommends using the Alde 1900-811 or 839 twin-motor service pump to fill the system. To fill the system by hand, unscrew the expansion tank cap (Fig 2 [R]), and lift the circulation pump (Fig 2 [S]) out of the tank (if applicable). Carefully pour the HTF into the tank, and repeat until the fluid level is about 1 cm above the MIN mark when cold. Figure 2 To ensure the best performance from hydronic heating, air must be able to circulate freely around the back of the furniture (Fig 3). Air vents, cut into the top and bottom of the furniture must be unobstructed by carpets, cushions, or stowage, etc. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Filling The full length of a convector should be ventilated for best performance. Note: Use gas and electric heating simultaneously for the best performance. The boiler will only use as much energy as is needed, and is 93% efficient on a SEBDUK based test. Quick heat up While taking energy consumption and the environment into account, consider switching the Alde appliance ON when room or space heating is not required, but may be needed in the near future. This ensures the appliance is held at the same temperature as the hot water setting chosen, and this can reduce the time taken to warm the living area, when room heating is then selected. Figure 3 137 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE BOILER Bleeding Air The HTF will contain some air. This is unavoidable. Air bubbles can also be introduced when the system is filled. In a newly-filled central heating system, you will need to bleed air from the bleed points to ensure best performance. There is an automatic air bleed valve on the boiler. There is also an air vent on the expansion tank. Bleed points are installed at strategic points within the system to allow any trapped air to bleed off. Note: Contact the dealer or installer for details on where the bleed points are in your system, and how to access them. To bleed the system, set the desired temperature to 30°C and select gas heating on the control panel. If fitted set the 12v inline circulation pump on the side of the boiler to speed 5 (Fig 1 [D]),by turning the blue speed dial clockwise, on the face of the pump motor. NB: Speed is not adjustable if using the 12 V circulation pump fitted in the expansion tank. After 10 mins, set the pump back to its normal running speed (2 for a caravan, 3 for a motorhome). Now power off the Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler completely, making sure that the circulation pump is not active. Follow the flow pipe from the boiler, and bleed the system at each bleed point. If Alde bleed points have been fitted, these are metal bleed screws mounted on black EPDM rubber connectors (Fig 4). Have a cloth in hand. To open, turn the screw anticlockwise between thumb and forefinger. Air will hiss out. When fluid trickles out, close the bleed screw and mop up fluid with the cloth. Fig 4 Move on to the next bleed point and repeat, until all bleed points have been tended to. Air Lock If enough trapped air accumulates at one point, an air lock can result and prevent the circulation of hydronic heating. A ramp or steep slope can be used to raise one end of the vehicle, causing the trapped air to shift around the system. Repeat the full bleed procedure. A caravan can be slowly and carefully tilted to reproduce this effect. To clear a stubborn air lock in under 15 minutes, an Alde-certified service agent can use the Alde 1900-811 or 839 twin-motor service pump. 230v ELECTRIC The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler has two 230 V electric heating elements, outputting 1050 W and 2100 W, or 3150 W combined, and drawing 5 A, 9 A, and 14 A respectively (rounded). 230v breakers, fuses, fused spurs and isolator switches should be rated for 16 A. Before using electric heating, check the current limit on the electric supply you are hooking up to. • 6 A limit, only use 1 kW electric heating. • 10 A limit, use 1–2 kW electric heating. • 16 A limit, use 1–3 kW electric heating. Note: If the electric supply has unstable voltage, the amperage will also fluctuate. 138 BS 5482 Part 1 states, “For butane cylinders, satisfactory service might not be obtained at temperatures of less than 10°C; the most suitable temperature range is from 13 to 30°C. For temperatures less than 13°C, the use of propane should be considered.” For this reason, Alde recommends using propane gas for all year round gas heating. LPG cylinders contain both gas and liquid forms. When the cylinder is filled, high pressure transforms the gas into liquid. The liquid reverts to gas when the valve on the cylinder is opened. LPG is a flammable gas. It can be a fire and explosion hazard if stored or used incorrectly. Store cylinders vertically and securely, to prevent them from toppling. Do not mount your LPG cylinder horizontally or use liquid phase gas cylinders. Liquid–gas explosion may result. Read the product label or contact product manufacturer for details. LPG is heavier than air. Should a gas leak occur the fitted floor vents will allow the gas to escape from the motorhome. For this reason, always ensure floor vents are unobstructed. ! WARNING: The boiler compartment contains the gas connection, floor vents and the flue hoses. Do not place stowage in the boiler compartment. In the event of a gas leak, or if you smell gas: • Extinguish all naked flames • Open all doors and windows •C lose all gas valves, including the valve on the cylinder. • Do not smoke. •D o not operate any electrical appliances or switches. •A rrange for immediate inspection of the gas system by a competent person in accordance with current local regulations. LPG from the cylinder is reduced in pressure by a regulator, and is supplied to the boiler at low pressure (30 mbar). Never use an unregulated high pressure supply. Where oil and dirt in the gas supply are a concern, gas filters should be fitted to prevent blockage of the boiler gas valve. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT LPG LPG (liquefied petroleum gas) has two main variants, propane and butane gas. The gas heating in your Alde 3020 Compact boiler can use propane or butane gas as fuel. Many LPG fuels contain a mixture of propane, butane and other additives. Gas heating must not be used whilst driving your vehicle unless a safety shut-off device is fitted to the gas system. Current local regulations must be adhered to. Flue The burning of LPG produces CO² (carbon dioxide), a non-toxic, asphyxiant gas. Exhaust flue gas can cause possible burns and poisoning. Avoid inhaling exhaust flue gas. ! WARNING: Do not position awnings, tents or other enclosures around the flue terminal. Air supply is essential for clean combustion. The air intake is located in the flue terminal. For best performance, the flue terminal should be well vented. If leaving the gas heating unused for a period, ensure the flue terminal is covered to prevent pest animals nesting in the flue. ! WARNING: Do not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to flood the flue when washing the vehicle. ! WARNING: Air is sucked into the combustion chamber via the air intake. The gas heating must not be used when refuelling the vehicle at the service station or related facility. Maintenance There is no manufacturer’s service requirement for the Alde 3020 Compact boiler itself. Current local regulations must be adhered to. The installation of the boiler should be inspected annually for gas safety. 139 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ALDE BOILER LPG hoses should be regularly checked for signs of damage and should be replaced, at maximum, after 3 years of use. Bleed air from the system when newly filled, when the vehicle has been standing unused for a period, and before departing on holiday. The fluid level in the expansion tank should be about 1 cm above the MIN mark when cool. The heat transfer fluid (HTF) should be topped up if below this level, to prevent a break in circulation. Only top up with compatible HTF. Never leave the system empty of HTF. ! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in accordance with the antifreeze product’s lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF after 2 years. Failure to maintain the condition of HTF may result in frost and/or corrosion damage, and is not covered under warranty. When the hot water cylinder is in continuous use, it should be drained and refilled once a month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges. Winter When camping in the winter, always ensure the flue terminal remains unobstructed by snow and ice. Extensions for roof flue terminals, and condensate spouts for side flue terminals are available from Alde. Check the strength of the heat transfer fluid (HTF) with a hydrometer and/or refractometer. It should measure 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze, or -35-37°C. The central heating can still be used with no freshwater in the system. The air in the hot water cylinder is heated but no damage can result. ! WARNING: Always drain down and completely empty the hot water cylinder when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by the vehicle manufacturer. 140 If camping in temperatures below -10°C, consider carrying spare parts in the event of an emergency. Alde recommends a 12v circulation pump for the expansion tank (with cabling), a PCB, and 4–5 litres of ready to use antifreeze. These spare parts should be kept well insulated and in the warmest part of the vehicle; for example, in the wardrobe, near to the expansion tank pipes. If storing the vehicle for winter, ensure the flue terminal is covered to prevent pest animals nesting in the flue. Note: Air the vehicle over winter without wearing out the pump. Use the programmable Alde control panel to automatically heat the vehicle for 24 hours, once a week. ALDE BOILER TROUBLESHOOTING The Alde control panel will display any error messages. See the Operating and Installation Instructions supplied separately. The system is completely dead, the control panel is blank •C heck the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in the boiler. This is located under the lid of the black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic fuse holder. •C heck the 12v supply to the boiler, it should be above 12v. •C heck the 12v cable is plugged into the boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the Alde control panel. The boiler will not ignite on gas •C heck the gas cylinder is full. Try a different gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas. •T he system may not need to use gas heating, if also using electric heating. •T he fluids in the boiler may already be at operating temperature. The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric •C heck that any 230v isolator switches are on (they will often have an LED indicator). •C heck the 230v supply to the vehicle. •C heck that hot water boost is not activated on the Alde control panel. •U se gas and electric heating. •C heck that vents in the furniture are not obstructed. • Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid. •M ost vehicles will reach a comfortable temperature within an hour, in non-extreme conditions. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Trouble-Shooting If problems persist, please contact Alde, or your dealer or installer. WARRANTY Alde undertakes to rectify any manufacturing defect or early component failure through normal use that occurs within 12 months of the installation date. If your Alde boiler develops a fault, your first action should be to contact your dealer or installer, as they will be familiar with your installation and vehicle, and how to make a claim under warranty. Alde International (UK) Ltd Huxley Close Park Farm South Wellingborough Northamptonshire NN8 6AB Tel. 01933 677765 www.alde.co.uk •T he fluids in the boiler may already be at operating temperature. No hot water •C heck that hot water ignore is not activated on the Alde control panel. •C heck that constant pumping is not activated on the Alde control panel. •C heck for other conflicting settings on the Alde control panel. •C heck the freshwater supply and water pump. No central heating •B leed the system of air. •C heck the fluid level in the expansion tank. •C heck that the circulation pump is responding. 141 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Dometic absorption refrigerator Guide to these operating instructions Before you start using the refrigerator,please read the operating instructions carefully. These instructions provide you with the necessary guidance for the proper use of your refrigerator. Observe in particular the safety instructions. Observation of the instructions and handling recommendations is important for dealing with the refrigerator safely and for protecting you from injury and the refrigerator from damage. You must understand what you have read before you carry out a task. Keep these instructions in a safe place close to the refrigerator so they may be referred to at any time. Copyright protection The information, texts and illustrations in these instructions are copyright protected and are subject to industrial property rights. No part of these instructions may be reproduced, copied or utilised in any other way without written authorisation by Dometic GmbH, Siegen. Warranty Warranty arrangements are in accordance with EC Directive 44/1999/CE and the normal conditions applicable for the country concerned. For warranty or other maintenance, please contact our customer services department. Any damage due to improper use is not covered by the warranty. The warranty does not cover any modifications to the appliance or the use of non-original Dometic parts. The warranty does not apply if the installation and operating instructions are not adhered to and no liability shall be entertained. Limitation of liability All information and guidance in these operating instructions were prepared after taking into consideration the applicable standards and regulations as well as the current state of the art. Dometic reserves the right to make changes at any time which are deemed to be in the interest of improving the product and safety. Dometic will assume no liability for damage in the case of : • Non-observation of the operating instructions • Application not in accordance with the regulations or provisions • Use of non-original spare parts • Modifications and interferences to the appliance • Effect of environmental influences, such as - temperature fluctuations - humidity Customer services Dometic offers a pan-European customer service network. Find your authorised customer service centre by calling the phone number indicated in the EuroService Network book, EuroService Network - which accompanies every refrigerator. You can also obtain the address information of the nearest customer service from www.dometic.com. When contacting Dometic Customer Services, please state the model, product number and serial number together with the MLC code, if applicable. You will find this information on the rating plate inside the refrigerator. We recommend that you note this data in the field provided on the front page of this operation manual. Spare parts Parts can be ordered throughout Europe from our customer services. Always give the model and product number when you contact the customer service! You will find this information on the rating plate inside the refrigerator. 142 In order to ensure that the recyclable packaging materials are re-used, they should be sent to the customary local collection system. The appliance should be transferred to a suitable waste disposal company that will ensure re-use of the recyclable components and proper disposal of the rest. For eco-friendly draining of the coolant from all absorber refrigeration units, a suitable disposal plant should be used. Energy-saving tips • At an average ambient temperature of 25°C, it is sufficient to operate the refrigerator at middle thermostat setting. • Where possible, always store precooled products. • Do not expose the refrigerator to direct sunlight. • Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit is not obstructed. • Defrosting at regular intervals saves energy (see “Defrosting”). Open the refrigerator door only for a short period of time when removing products. • Run the refrigerator for about 12 hours before filling it. Safety instructions Application according to regulations This refrigerator is designed for installation in recreation vehicles such as caravans or motorhomes. The appliance has been type approval tested for this application in accordance with the EC Gas Directive. The refrigerator is to be used solely for storing foodstuffs. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Note: Refrigerators manufactured by Dometic GmbH are free of CFC/HCFC and HFC. Ammonia (a natural compound of hydrogen and nitrogen) is used in the cooling unit as a coolant. Non-ozonehazardous cyclopentane is used as a propellant for manufacturing PU foam insulation. ! WARNING: The refrigerator is not suitable for the proper storage of medication. Please observe in addition the instructions in the medication package inserts. User’s responsibility Anyone operating the refrigerator must be familiar with the safe handling and understand the advice in these operating instructions. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they are supervised or have been given instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by children. [EN 60335-2-24, 7.12] Protection of children when disposing of the equipment ! WARNING: When disposing of the refrigerator, detach all refrigerator doors and leave the storage racks in the refrigerator. In this way inadvertent entrapment and suffocation is prevented. 143 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Working upon and checking the refrigerator ! WARNING: Work on gas equipment, exhaust system and electrical facilities must be carried out by authorised personnel only. Substantial damage to property and / or injury to persons can arise through unprofessional procedures. ! WARNING: Never use an unshielded flame to check gas bearing parts and pipes for leakage! There is a danger of fire or explosion. ! WARNING: Never open the absorber cooling unit! It is under high pressure. There is a danger of injury. Information on coolant Ammonia is used as a coolant. This is a natural compound also used in household cleaning agents (1 litre of Salmiak cleaner contains up to 200g of ammonia - about twice as much as is used in the refrigerator). Sodium chromate is used for corrosion protection (1.8% by weight of the solvent). In the event of leakage (easily identifiable from the strong odour), proceed as follows: • Switch off the appliance. • Air the room thoroughly. • Inform authorised customer services. Note: For your safety it was ascertained in an expert’s report that no impairment of health exists when the coolant is discharged. Operating the refrigerator with gas It is imperative that the operating pressure corresponds to the data specified on the rating plate of the appliance. Compare the operating pressure of the rating plate with the data specified on the pressure reducing valve of the liquid gas cylinder. 144 ! WARNING: Operating the appliance with gas is not permitted • At petrol stations • On ferry boats • While transporting the motorhome by a transporter or breakdown vehicle. There is danger of fire! Leave the equipment switched off Safety instructions when storing foodstuffs Instructions for storing food in a refrigerator: No refrigerator of any kind can improve the quality of the food; refrigerators can only maintain the food’s quality for a short duration as from the time of storing it. Please observe the following particular conditions for storing food in a refrigerator that is built into a vehicle: • A change in the climatic conditions such as temperature fluctuations • High temperatures inside the vehicle when it is closed and parked in direct sunlight (temperatures are possible up to 50°C) • Use of the refrigerator during travel with the power supply of 12V DC • A refrigerator built in behind a window and exposed to direct sunlight • Storing the products too soon, i.e. shortly after starting up the appliance for use Under these particular conditions the refrigerator cannot guarantee reaching the temperature needed for perishables. Perishables include all products with a stipulated use-by date and a minimum storage temperature of +4°C or less, especially for meat, poultry, fish, sausages, pre-packed foods. • Pack raw and cooked foods separately (e.g. in containers, aluminium foil, etc.). • Do not leave cooled goods outside the refrigerator for too long. • Place the foods with the next use-by date at the front, accordingly. • Pack away any left-over food and eat at the first opportunity. • Wash your hands before and after handling any food. • Regularly clean the inside of the refrigerator. Please observe the instructions and information regarding the use-by date on the outside packaging of the food. Please observe section “Cleaning” of this instruction. Refrigerator rating plate The rating plate is to be found on the inside of the refrigerator. It contains all important details of the refrigerator. You can read off from this the model identification, the product number and the serial number. You will need these details whenever you contact the customer service centre or when ordering spare parts. 1 - Model Number 2 - Product Number 3 - Serial Number 4 - Electrical rating details 5 - Gas pressure Note: The cooling unit’s performance is influenced by ambient temperatures. Please select the medium setting for ambient temperatures between +15°C and +25°C (refer to Setting of cooling compartment temperature). The unit operates within its optimum performance range. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT • Only remove the outside packaging of single packs if all the necessary information, e.g. the use-by date, can also be read on the single packs. Dometic refrigerators work according to the absorption principle. For physical reasons, an absorption system responds slowly to changes made by the thermostat controller, by loss of cooling energy through opening the door or during storing food. The devices meet the cooling performance requirements of the Climatic Class SN acc. to EN/ISO 7371 in the temperature range of +10°C to +32°C ambient temperature. For temperatures below +10°C, winter covers should be installed. For ambient temperatures exceeding +32°C for a longer period of time, it is recommended installing Dometic additional fan (item no. 241 2985 -00). 145 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Description of refrigerator 2 1 1 8 3 4 5 9 1 - Operating controls 2 - Door locking button 3 - Freezer compartment (removable) 4 - Insertable grid shelf (available as option, to be used when freezer compartment is removed) 5 - Post-evaporator for cooling compartment 6 - Condensation water drain channel 7 - Vegetable bin 8 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf available as option may be inserted 9 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders 146 1 6 RMx 8xx1 / MES 7 Fig. 5 RMx 8xx0 / Battery igniter 1 RMx 8xx5 / AES F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Description of fridge freezer 1 2 3 7 4 5 6 8 Fig. 3 1 - Freezer compartment 2 - Operating controls 3 - Post-evaporator for cooling compartment 4 - Condensation water drain channel 5 - Data plate 6 - Vegetable bin 7 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf available as option may be inserted 8 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders 147 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Manual energy selection / automatic ignition (RM 8xx1/ RML9xx1) MES 1 2 3 4 6 7 Automatic energy selection / automatic ignition (RM 8xx5/ RML9xx5) AES 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Fig. 8 8 Fig. 9 1 - Power ON/OFF switch 1 - Power ON/OFF switch 2 - Energy selector button 230V ~ 2 - Energy selector button 230V ~ 3 - Energy selector button GAS 3 - Energy selector button GAS 4 - Energy selector button 12V = 4 - Energy selector button 12V = 6 - Temperature level selection 5 - Selector button “AUTOMATIC” 7 - Temperature level display 6 - Temperature level selection 8 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button GAS FAILURE 7 - Temperature level display Switching ON/OFF 8 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button GAS FAILURE • Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s Switching ON/OFF • Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s • Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s 230V AC operation • Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s • Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2) Manual operation • Set temperature step by pressing button (6) • Select energy source with buttons (2,3,4) 12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery) • Set temperature step by pressing button (6) • Select “Battery voltage” by pressing button (4) Automatic operation • Set temperature step by pressing button (6) Gas operation • Select “Gas” by pressing button (3) • Set temperature step by pressing button (6) • Change over to “Automatic” with button (5) Automatical energy selection (if available) Sequence of priority: 1.) Solar (12V -) 2.) 230V ~ 3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas • Set temperature step by pressing button (6) 148 Setting of cooling compartment temperature Electrical operation 1 6 7 Fig. 18 2 3 4 Fig. 16 To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2 seconds. The refrigerator starts with the last selected type of energy. 230V operation : Press button (2) : F ITTE D E QUIPME NT RM 8xx1/RML9xx1 models MES appliances (manual energy selection) Select the desired cooling compartment temperature by pressing button (6) . The LED display (7) of the selected temperature setting is illuminated. The scale starts with MIN position at the left LED position (small bar = highest temperature) and climbs up to MAX position at the right LED position (large bar = lowest temperature). Note: The temperature levels do not relate to absolute temperature values. 12V operation : Press button (4) : Gas operation RM 8xx5/RML9xx5 models Manual operation 1 3 Fig. 17 2 3 4 Gas operation : Press button (3) : The ignition process is activated automatically by means of an automatic igniter. Note: The flame extinguishes after reaching the preset cooling compartment temperature and ignites again if the cooling compartment temperature increases again. If the flame is not lit after the first ignition attempt, the automatic igniter repeats the ignition twice (duration 30 s) at time intervals of 2 minutes. If the flame is not lit afterwards, a fault is indicated. Abb. 19 To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2 seconds. The refrigerator starts with the last selected type of energy. 230V operation : Press button (2) : 12V operation : Press button (4) : Gas operation : Press button (3) : 149 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Automatic operation Refuelling while in AES mode operation 1 5 Fig. 20 To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2 seconds. The refrigerator starts with the last selected type of energy. Automatic operation : Press button(5) : A Upon switching on, the electronics automatically selects one of the three possible energy types: 230V - 12V - liquid gas. The control electronics automatically ensures that the refrigerator is supplied with the optimum source of energy in each respective case. Sequence of priority: 1.) Solar (12V -) 2.) 230V ~ 3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas Note: If sufficient mains voltage is available (more than 195 V), this power source is selected as prime option. If a solar system capable of powering the refrigerator is installed, the solar 12V supply takes priority. The 12V operation is otherwise only effective while the engine is running. According to the sequence of priority the electronics selects GAS as energy source only, if both of the electrical energy source are not available. Manual operation is possible at any time. Note: For Setting of cooling compartment temperature see point “4.7.2” 150 Note: In order to prevent unintended switching to gas operation during refuelling, the electronic system starts gas operation of the refrigerator after the motor has been turned off for 15 minutes. During this period the appliance is ready for operation (“standby”). The temperature level LEDs do not light then while all other indicators remain active. ! WARNING: The use of unshielded flames is prohibited in petrol station environments. Should the refuelling stop last longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be switched off or switched over to another energy type. Additional features (MES / AES) • The brightness of the display reduces after a WARNING! few seconds if no other buttons are pressed. The indicator lights again if a button is pressed. Press the button again to activate the required function. • Failures are indicated by flashing of the failure indicator LED. • Should the door be kept open for too long (more than 2 minutes), an acoustic signal is initiated (pulsing whistle tone). • Should the electronic control detect any failure, an acoustic signal will sound (pulsing whistle tone). At the same time the display starts flashing (for trouble-shooting, please refer to page 160). Gas operation with internal batteries (optional) An optional battery compartment in the electronics case for internal (self-contained) power supply of the electronics is available for the model variants RM 8xx1 and RM 8xx5 (appliances with electronics). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Battery compartment Fig. 21 Load the battery compartment with batteries (8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator. All operating modes can be selected while the on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The internal voltage is disconnected. If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not present or there is an interruption of the mains power supply during operation, the electronics automatically switch to the internal (battery) power supply. The refrigerator can now only be operated in the gas mode. All LED indicators except the GAS LED are not lit during operation with internal batteries. The GAS LED flashes every 15 seconds. If a button is pressed, the temperature level LEDs (7) also light. If the battery voltage . is too low, an acoustic signal (whistle tone) sounds every 15 seconds. Then replace the batteries in the battery compartment. Inserting / changing the batteries Switch off the refrigerator, as described in section “Shutting of the refrigerator”. press Opening battery compartment Fig. 22 pull out Fig. 23 Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not included! ! WARNING: • Observe the correct polarity! • Do not connect non-rechargeable batteries to a charger. • Remove rechargeable batteries from the battery compartment before charging. • Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the battery compartment! • Remove discharged batteries. • Remove the batteries from the battery compartment if the refrigerator will not be used for a long time. • Do not mix different types of batteries. 151 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Explanation of operating controls Fridge / Freezer models The control panel buttons are not accessible when the refrigerator door is closed. Open the bottom door to reach the operating buttons. Depending on the door opening direction, there are two LEDs on the left or right edge of the control panel. The outer LED (1) indicates that the refrigerator is operational (blue). The other LED (2) lights red in the event of a fault. 2 9 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button GAS FAILURE Switching ON/OFF • Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s • Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s 230V AC operation • Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2) • Set temperature step by pressing button (7) 12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery) 1 • Select “Battery voltage” by pressing button (4) Fig. 4 Indicator LEDs 8 - Temperature level display Refrigerators for self-contained (gas) operation contain two battery compartments in the control panel which are located on the left and right next to the button bar. • Set temperature step by pressing button (7) Gas operation • Select “Gas” by pressing button (3) • Set temperature step by pressing button (7) Automatic energy selection / automatic ignition (RMD 8xx5) AES Fig. 5 Operating controls without battery compartments L R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fig. 8 1 - Power ON/OFF switch Operating controls with battery compartments (L, R) 2 - Energy selector button 230V ~ Manual energy selection / automatic ignition (RMD 8xx1) MES 3 - Energy selector button GAS 4 - Energy selector button 12V = 5 - Selector button “AUTOMATIC” 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Fig. 7 1 - Power ON/OFF switch 2 - Energy selector button 230V ~ 3 - Energy selector button GAS 152 6 - Frameheating 7 - Temperature level selection 8 - Temperature level display 9 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button GAS FAILURE Switching ON/OFF 4 - Energy selector button 12V = • Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s 6 - Frameheating • Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s 7 - Temperature level selection 9 • Select energy source with buttons (2,3,4) • Set temperature step by pressing button (7) Automatic operation • Change over to “Automatic” with button (5) Automatical energy selection (if available) Sequence of priority: 1.) Solar (12V -) 2.) 230V ~ 3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas If the battery voltage is too low, an acoustic signal (whistle tone) sounds every 15 seconds. Then replace the batteries in the battery compartment. 1 open press F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Manual operation Fig. 15 Opening left battery compartment 1 press • Set temperature step by pressing button (7) open Gas operation with internal batteries (optional) An optional battery compartment in the electronics case for internal (self-contained) power supply of the electronics is available for the model variants RMd 85x1 and RMD 85x5 (appliances with electronics). Opening right battery compartment Fig. 16 2 Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not included! Left battery compartment Fig. 14 Load the battery compartment with batteries (8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator. All operating modes can be selected while the on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The internal voltage is disconnected. If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not present or there is an interruption of the mains power supply during operation, the electronics automatically switch to the internal (battery) power supply. The refrigerator can now only be operated in the gas mode. All LED indicators except the GAS LED are not lit during operation with internal batteries. The GAS LED flashes every 15 seconds. If a button is pressed, the temperature level LEDs (7) also light. ! WARNING: • Observe the correct polarity! • Do not connect non-rechargeable batteries to a charger. • Remove rechargeable batteries from the battery compartment before charging. • Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the battery compartment! • Remove discharged batteries. • Remove the batteries from the battery compartment if the refrigerator will not be used for a long time. • Do not mix different types of batteries. 153 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Frame heating All models are equipped with a frame heating (12VDC/3,5W) around the freezer compartment. During summer months with high temperatures and humidity the metal frame may have water droplets forming. To evaporate these droplets switch on the frame heating with button (6). 6 8 Fig. 18 The operating time of the frame heater can be set to 2 hours, 5 hours or continuous operation. After selecting the operating time using the button (6), the temperature level indicator (8) is extinguished for a short time to show the set operating time for a few seconds. The display then returns to the temperature level indicator. Operating time: 2 hours Press button (6) once Display 1x Operating time: 5 hours Press button (6) twice Display 2x Permanent Operation Press button (6) three times Display 3x ! WARNING: In order to prevent discharge of the onboard battery, change the frame heater from continuous operation to another operating time or switch it off. Note: The frame heater is active for 30 minutes after switching on and then switches itself off and on again at time intervals of 5 minutes. 154 To enlarge the cooling compartment, just remove the freezer compartment. 1. Unlock the freezer compartment on both sides. 5 2. Pull the freezer compartment out. 1 Store the freezer compartment safely in order to prevent damage 6 2 Note: Once the freezer compartment is removed, an additional storage rack (3.) may be installed. The storage rack is a piece of extra equipment and may be obtained from Dometic. 3 7 4 Fig. 37 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Refrigerator compartments Door locking ! WARNING: As a basic rule, shut 1 - Freezer compartment : already frozen food (deep-frozen food) and lock the refrigerator before you start your journey! 2 - Middle compartment: Dairy products, convenience food 3 - Bottom compartment: Meat, fish, food for defrosting 4 - Vegetable compartment: Salads, vegetables, fruit 5 - Top door shelf: Eggs, butter 6 - Middle door shelf: Cans, dressings, ketchup, jam Fig. 24 7 - Bottom door shelf (drinks compartment): Drinks in bottles or bags Removable freezer compartment Fig. 25 Open the door by pressing the locking button and pull open (see Fig. 24). Shut the door again by pushing it to close. The snapping into the lock can be heard. While the vehicle is parked, the locking hook may be fixed to facilitate opening of the door (Fig. 26-27). Fastening and releasing the, door lock hook when parking the vehicle Fig. 32 If the vehicle is parked for a longer period of time, the locking hook may be clamped by means of a lockbar. The door may now be opened by just pulling it without need of pressing the locking button. 155 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Positioning the storage racks Fastening Fig. 27 Fig. 26 Fig. 31 The storage racks may be pulled out by smoothly lifting them and may be positioned as desired. Refrigerator compartments Releasing Fig. 29 Fig. 28 1 Lighting The interior lighting is controlled using a door contact. Should the door be kept open more than 2 minutes, an acoustic signal is initiated (pulsing whistle tone). (except for models with battery igniter). 6 2 7 3 4 5 8 Fig. 29 Fig. 30 Note: Please contact the authorised Dometic Service if a failure occurs. 1 - Freezer compartment : already frozen food (deep-frozen food) 2 - Top compartment: convenience food 3 - Middle compartment: Dairy products, convenience food 4 - Bottom compartment: Meat, fish, food for defrosting 156 5 - Vegetable compartment: Salads, vegetables, fruit 7 - Middle door shelf: Cans, dressings, ketchup, jam 8 - Bottom door shelf (drinks compartment): Drinks in bottles or bags Shutting off the refrigerator • Switch off the refrigerator by pressing button (1) (s. 4.5). Keep button (1) pressed for 3 seconds. The display disappears and the appliance is fully switched off . • Release the locking mechanism (Fig. 30-31) of the door lock by pushing it and shift it to the front. If the door is shut in this position, a small gap is nevertheless kept open to prevent formation of mildew. Storing products in the cooling compartment • Switch the refrigerator on approx. 12 hours before filling it. • Always store pre-cooled foods in the refrigerator. Make sure that the food is well cooled when it is bought and also when transporting it. Use insulated cooling bags. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Storing food and making ice cubes 6 - Top door shelf: Eggs, butter • Open the refrigerator door only for a short period of time when removing products. • Products must be packed - best of all in closed containers, wrapped in aluminium foil or similar - and stored separately from each other, in order to prevent drying out or odours. • Allow foods that have been warmed up to cool down before storing. • Avoid storing products in the refrigerator that could emit volatile flammable gases. Fig. 30 Fig. 31 • If the refrigerator is to be taken out of service for an extended period of time, close the onboard shut-off valve and the cylinder valve. Defrosting As time goes by, frost builds up on the fins inside the refrigerator. A layer of frost thicker on one side may occur and does not represent a malfunction. When this layer of frost is about 0.118 inches (3 mm) thick, the refrigerator should be defrosted. • Switch off the refrigerator, as described in section 4.14 Shutting of the refrigerator. • Remove all food and the ice cube tray. • Leave the refrigerator door open to allow air to enter and to prevent formation of mildew. •Do not overfill the storage grids and compartments to prevent obstructing the internal air circulation. • Maintain a clearance of approx. 5 - 10 mm between chilled products and postevaporator (“cooling fins”). • Do not expose the refrigerator to direct sunlight. Please bear in mind that the temperature inside a closed vehicle increases sharply if exposed to sunlight and that this can reduce the efficiency of the refrigerator. • Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit is not obstructed. Keep the ventilation grilles free from obstructions. • The freezer compartment is suitable for making ice cubes and for short-term storage of frozen food. It is not suitable as a means of freezing foods. • After defrosting (freezer compartment and fins free of frost), wipe both cooling compartments dry with a cloth. 157 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR When ambient temperatures are lower than +10°C and the refrigerator is exposed to these temperatures for extended periods of time, an even regulation of freezer temperature cannot be guaranteed for system related reasons. This can cause the temperature in the freezer to rise and the stored goods to melt. Shutting off the refrigerator Making ice cubes Fig. 41 Ice cubes are best frozen overnight. At night, the refrigerator has less work to do and the unit has more reserves. Fig. 42 Fig. 43 • For battery igniter models, set energy selector switch (1) to position “OFF”. The appliance is switched off (Fig. 41). Fig. 27 1. Fill the ice cube tray with drinking water. • Switch off MES and AES models by pressing button (2). Keep button (2) pressed for 3 seconds. The display disappears and the appliance is fully switched off (Fig. 41). • Release the locking mechanism of the door lock by pushing it and shift it to the front. If the door is shut in this position, a small gap is nevertheless kept open to prevent formation of mildew. Fig. 28 2. Place the ice cube tray in the freezer compartment. ! WARNING: Only use drinking water! 158 • If the refrigerator is to be taken out of service for an extended period of time, close the onboard shut-off valve and the cylinder valve. CAUT Check that the ventilation grilles and the exhaust (1) duct system (2) have not been blocked by snow, leaves, etc. Cold air can restrict the performance of the unit. Install the winter covers (3) if you discover any loss of cooling performance when outdoor temperatures are low. This protects the unit against excessively cold air. The following ventilation grille combinations can be installed on your vehicle : LS 100 and LS 200 or two LS 200 for refrigerators up to 130 I capacity: two LS 300 (not sown) for refrigerators with more than 130 I capacity. Pay attention to this when purchasing winter covers. For ventilation grille LS 300, domestic provides the winter set EWS 300, which can be used at a very low temperatures from +5°C to 30°C. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Operating during low outside temperatures 1 Fig. 35 Ventilation grille LS100 2 Fig. 36 Ventilation grille LS200 + winter cover ! WARNING: Refrigerators up to 130 l capacity*: Do not install the top winter cover during gas operation. You should also attach both winter covers if the vehicle is taken out of service for a longer period of time or while it is being cleaned from the outside. 159 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Troubleshooting Failure: The refrigerator does not cool sufficiently. Possible cause Action you can take Inadequate ventilation to the unit Check that the ventilation grilles are not covered Thermostat setting is too low Set thermostat to a higher level The condenser is heavily frosted Check that the refrigerator door closes properly Too much warm food has been stores inside within a short period of time Allow warm food to cool down before storage The appliance has been running for only a short period of time Check whether the cooling compartment works after approx 4-5 hours Ambient temperatures too high Regularly remove ventilation grilles. Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in gas operation mode. Possible cause Action you can take Gas cylinder empty Change gas cylinder Is the upstream shut-off device open? Open shut-off device Air in the gas pipe? Switch off the appliance and start again. Repeat this procedure 3-4 times, if necessary. Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in 12 V operation. 160 Possible cause Action you can take On-board fuse defective Fit new fuse On-board battery displaced Check battery, charge it Engine not running Start engine Heating element defective (please refer to failure indication) Please inform the Dometic Customer Services. Possible cause Action you can take On-board fuse defective Fit new fuse Vehicle not connected to mains supply voltage Make a connection to a mains power supply AES: Gas operation despite connection to the mains supply voltage? Appliance switches to gas operation due to insufficient mains supply voltage (automatically switches back to 230 V operation) Heating element defective (please refer to failure indication Please inform Dometic Customer Services Information on failure display and trouble-shooting • Refrigerators with an electronics system (MES, AES) indicate the occurence of a malfunction by the LED or display flashing. • If a malfunction occurs, the indicator LED “Failure” (8) flashes simultaneously. In the case of AES models an acoustic alarm sounds. Before notifying the authorised Service Center, please check whether: • the instructions in section “Operating the refrigerator” have been observed. • the refrigerator stands level. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in 230 V operation. Status indicators 1 2 3 4 6 7 MES 8 Fig. 51 1 - Button ON / OFF 2 - Energy selector switch 230 V AC 3 - Energy selector switch GAS 4 - Energy selector switch 12V DC 6 - temperature level button 7 - temperature level display 8 - fault LED / GAS FAULT reset button • it is possible to operate the refrigerator with any available power source. 161 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR Operation with on-board 12 v power supply Indicator Fault Remedy (2) and (8) 230 V mode: "230V" not available or voltage too low Check mains power connection, mains voltage, fuse 12 V mode: "12V" not available or voltage too low Check 12V connection, on-board battery, fuse Gas mode: Flame not ignited Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve) Acoustic signal, 15s at two minute intervals Interior lighting is switched on Close door, check door contact (2) and (7) 230 V mode: 230V heating element defective Arrange replacement of 230V heating element, contact Customer Service 12 V mode: 12V heating element defective Arrange replacement of 12V heating element, contact Customer Service flashing and acoustic signal 20s (4) and (8) flashing and acoustic signal 20s (3) and (8) flashing and acoustic signal 20s flashing and acoustic signal 20s (4) and (7) flashing and acoustic signal 20s (7) flashing and acoustic signal 20s (3) and (7) flashing and acoustic signal 20s 162 Press the (8) button after clearing the fault Temperature sensor Contact Customer Service without contact or defective Burner defective or cooling unit defective Check burner, burner nozzles, if necessary contact Customer Service and arrange replacement Indicator Fault Remedy (3) and (8) Flame not ignited Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve) Press the (8) button after clearing the fault flashing brightly (3) and (7) Burner defective or cooling unit defective Check burner, burner nozzles, if necessary contact Customer Service and arrange replacement Acoustic signal at 15 second intervals Undervoltage detection (internal batteries) Replace batteries Automatic switching from external to internal power supply does not function (absence of the onboard 12V power supply for the electronics) Refrigerator does not function, gas operation not possible although the batteries are inserted Switch off the refrigerator and start again flashing brightly F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Operation with batteries (internal power supply) The onboard power supply was interrupted during the starting of the gas operation Note: No automatic switching is performed during the ignition. 163 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD COOKERS Thetford Cookers Cooker 3 burner with combined grill and oven / cooker 3 burner + electric hotplate with separate grill and oven Burner operation Fig. 1 Important • Although each burner will support pans from 10 to 22cm, care should be taken not to overload the appliance as performance may be reduced. • The following pan sizes are the maximum: - Auxiliary Burner:- Ø200mm Semi-Rapid Burner:- 2x Ø200mm or 1x Ø220mm with 1x Ø180mm Electric Hotplate:- Ø180mm • When using small pans the flames should not spread beyond the base of the pan as this will reduce the efficiency of the burner. • Avoid old or misshapen pans as these may cause instability. • The lid must be opened fully prior to using the hotplate burners. Using the Hotplate Gas Burners 164 1. Ensure gas cylinder is connected and turned on and the shut off valve at the manifold is open. In the event of a gas smell turn off at gas cylinder and contact supplier. 2. Flame supervision: Each burner is controlled individually and is monitored by a thermocouple probe. In the event of the burner flames being accidentally extinguished, turn off the burner control and do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at least one minute. 3. To light: Push in the control knob and turn to full rate – see Fig.1. Hold a lighted match or taper to the burner and push the control knob in and hold. It is necessary to hold the knob depressed after the burner has ignited for approximately 10 - 15 seconds, to allow the thermocouple probe to reach temperature, before releasing the knob. Should the flame go out when the knob is released, the procedure should be repeated holding the knob depressed for slightly longer. 4. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the procedure is similar except that the burner can be ignited by depressing the ignition button, which is located on the fascia. If the burner has not lit within 15 seconds the control knob should be released and the burner left for at least 1 minute before a further attempt to ignite the burner. 5. For simmering, turn the knob further anticlockwise to the low rate position. 6. To turn off: Turn the control knob until the line on the control knob is aligned with the dot on the control panel. Always make sure the control knob is in the off position when you have finished using the hotplate burners. • Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn off the hotplate and allow it to cool before closing the glass lid. • Remove all spillage from the surface of the glass lid before opening. • The glass lid has the tendency to snap shut towards the end of lowering. This is caused by the travel lock action of the hinges as it is activated. Make sure all fingers are removed from appliance when closing the lid. ! WARNING: The use of the gas hobs will generate heat. We recommend, to avoid excess build-up of heat around the cooker area, the window is left opened when cooking to allow for additional ventilation. IMPORTANT • Depending on specification, your appliance may be fitted with a glass lid shut-off system, which cuts off the power to all hotplate burners (gas and electric) if the lid is closed. • Ensure the glass lid is in the open and upright position before turning on the hotplate burners. • Not all models are fitted with the shut-off system. Operation ! WARNING: • The grill must only be used with the door open. • On combined grill and oven cookers the heat deflector below the fascia should be pulled out prior to lighting the grill. Never adjust the heat deflector position without using hand protection i.E. Oven gloves. See fig 3 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT ! WARNING: On separate grill and oven cookers the grill area can get hot when the oven is in use, even if the grill is switched off. • Care should be taken when removing pans from the grill, i.e. use of oven gloves, and by making use of the removal grill pan handle. Important • The grill pan supplied is multi functional, for use in grill or oven. • The handle design allows removal or insertion whilst the pan is in use. • Always remove the handle when the pan is in use. • The grill MUST only be used with the door open. 165 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD COOKERS Using the Grill 8. It is normal for the flames on this burner to develop yellow tips as it heats up. 9. A reversible grill pan trivet enables the correct grilling height to be achieved. 1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected and turned on. In the event of a gas smell turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact supplier. Fast Toasting trivet in high position Grilling Sausages trivet in high position 2. To light: Open door, push in the control knob and turn to full rate – see Fig 1 (page 164). Hold a lighted match or taper to the burner and push the control knob in and hold. The burner should ignite and the control knob should be held in for 10 -15 seconds before release. Grilling Chops, etc trivet in low position If the burner goes out, repeat procedure holding control knob for slightly longer. 3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the procedure is similar except that the burner can be ignited by depressing the ignition button, which is located on the fascia. Ignition must be carried out with the door open, and if the burner has not lit within 15 seconds the control knob should be released and the grill left for at least 1 minute before a further attempt to ignite the burner. 4. N ote: the grill must only be used with the door open. 5. On first use of the grill, it should be heated for about 20 minutes to eliminate any residual factory lubricants that might impart unpleasant smells to the food being cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur when using for the first time so open any windows and turn on mechanical ventilators to help remove the smoke. 166 automatically cut off the gas supply in the event of the flame going out. In the event of the burner flames being accidentally extinguished, turn off the burner control and do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at least one minute. Grilling Steak/Bacontrivet in high position Slow Grilling trivet removed 10. To turn off: turn the control knob until the line on the control knob is aligned with the dot on the control panel. Always make sure the control knob is in the off position when you have finished grilling. Important: • The pan supplied with the appliance is multi functional, for use either whilst grilling or when using the oven. • The handle design allows removal or insertion whilst the pan is in use. ! WARNING: Pans must not touch the glass lid. Note: To avoid heat build up around the hob open the kitchen window slightly to allow the heat to dissipate. Operation Important 6. Although the grill does heat up quickly, a few minutes preheat is recommended. • If the appliance is fitted with a cooling system. The cooling fans should automatically switch on a couple of minutes after the grill and/or oven is turned on, and will remain on even after the appliance has been switched off. 7. Flame Failure Device (FFD): the grill burner is fitted with a flame sensing probe, which will • The fans should automatically switch off a few minutes after the appliance has been • A constant 12V supply is necessary at all times to ensure the cooling system operates correctly. Using the Oven 1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected and turned on. In the event of a gas smell turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact supplier. 2. To light: Open door, push in the control knob and turn to full rate (240°C). Hold a lighted match or taper to the burner and push the control knob in and hold. The burner should ignite and the control knob should be held in for 10 -15 seconds before release. If the burner goes out, repeat procedure holding control knob for slightly longer. 3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the procedure is similar except that the burner can be ignited by depressing the ignition button, which is located on the fascia. Ignition must be carried out with the door open, and if the burner has not lit within 15 seconds the control knob should be released and the oven left for at least 1 minute before a further attempt to ignite the burner. 4. Place the oven shelf in the required position and close the door. Set control knob to approximately 200°C and heat the oven for about 30 minutes to eliminate any residual factory lubricants that might impart unpleasant smells to the meals being cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur when using for the first time so open any windows and turn on mechanical ventilators to help remove the smoke. 5. Although the oven does heat up quickly, it is recommended that a 10 minute preheat be allowed. The oven should be up to full temperature in about 15-20mins. 6. To turn off: turn the control knob until the line on the control knob is aligned with the dot on the control panel. 7. Shelf: the shelf has been designed to allow good circulation at the rear of the oven and is also fitted with a raised bar to prevent trays or dishes making contact with the back of the oven. To remove a shelf, pull forward until it stops, raise at front and remove. ! WARNING: The pans and trays supplied with this appliance are the maximum sizes recommended for use. Larger pans and trays may restrict good circulation of heat, increasing cooking times. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT switched off, when the front of the appliance has cooled sufficiently. Oven Temperature Control The temperature in the oven is controlled by a thermostatic gas tap and is variable over the range 130°C to 240°C. Approximate temperatures for the settings on the control knob are shown in the table below. The temperatures indicated refer to the centre of the oven and at any particular setting the oven will be hotter at the top and cooler towards the base. The variation between top and centre, and centre to bottom is approximately equivalent to one gas mark. Good use can be made of the temperature variation in several dishes requiring different temperatures may be cooked at the same time. In this way maximum benefit can be obtained from the gas used to heat the oven. Care should be taken not to overload the oven, adequate spacing being used to allow free circulation for heat. Operation Cooking Guidelines Best results will be obtained by the shelf positions in this guide. It is not necessary to preheat the oven but advisable for a range of dishes. The oven is capable of full temperature in 15-20 minutes. Most cookery books give details of the shelf positions and gas mark settings for each recipe. If in doubt about a recipe you intend to use, study the recipe carefully then find a similar dish in our guide and use our shelf position and gas mark setting recommendation. Shelf positions are from the top down. When 167 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD COOKERS roasting with aluminium foil care must be taken that the foil does not impair circulation or block the oven flue outlet. Gas Mark 1/4 - 1/2 Temperature (Centre - Shelf Pos. 2) 265 - 275°F 130-135°C 1 285 140 2 300 150 3 330 165 4 355 180 If a smell of gas becomes apparent, the supply should be turned off at the cylinder IMMEDIATELY. Extinguish naked lights including cigarettes and pipes. Do not operate electrical switches. Open all doors and windows to disperse any gas escape. LPG gas is heavier than air; any escaping gas will therefore collect at a low level. The strong unpleasant smell of gas will enable the general area of the leak to be detected. Check that the gas is not escaping from an unlighted appliance. Never check for leaks with a naked flame, leak investigation should be carried out using a leak detector spray. 5 385 195 6 410 210 7 430 220 8 445 230 Maintenance & servicing 9 465 240 Important Do’s and don’ts • Shut off gas supply at isolating valve, switch off electric supply and ensure all parts are cool before cleaning or servicing Do read the user instructions carefully before using the appliance for the first time. • All servicing must be carried out by an approved competent person. Do allow the oven to heat before using for the first time, in order to expel any smells before the introduction of food. • After each service the appliance must be checked for gas soundness Do clean the appliance regularly. Do remove spills as soon as they occur. Do always use oven gloves when removing food shelves and trays from the oven. Do check that controls are in the off position when finished. Don’t allow children near the cooker when in use. Turn pan handles away from the front so that they cannot be caught accidentally. Don’t allow fats or oils to build up in the oven trays or base. Don’t use abrasive cleaners or powders that will scratch the surfaces of the appliance. Don’t under any circumstances use the oven as a space heater. Don’t put heavy objects onto open grill and oven doors. 168 Leaks • This appliance must not be modified or adjusted unless authorized and carried out by the manufacturer or his representative. No parts other than those supplied by the manufacturer should be used on this appliance. • If the supply cord is damaged, it must only be replaced by the manufacturer or his representative in order to avoid a hazard. This appliance needs little maintenance other than cleaning. All parts should be cleaned using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive cleaners, steel wool or cleansing powders. When cleaning the burner ring it is essential to ensure that the holes do not become blocked. The control knobs are a push fit and can be removed for cleaning. They are interchangeable without affecting the sense of operation. DOMETIC OVENS General safety instructions The manufacturer does not assume any liability for damages in the following cases: • Damage to the product resulting from improper use • Changes to the product without express permission from the manufacturer • Use for purposes other than those described in the operating manual F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Dometic C600 Oven (where fitted) • Non-compliant installation and/or connections ! WARNING: Please read this instruction manual carefully before using the appliance. If the appliance is given to another party, the instruction manual must also be provided. Explanation of symbols WARNING Security warning: Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or death. IMPORTANT! Failure to observe this note can cause material damages and affect the operation of the product. NOTE Fig. 1 Fig. 1 Fig. 1 Fig. 1 NOTE Additional information relative to the use of the product. Action This symbol indicates that action is required on your part. The required action is described step-by-step. Fig. 1 5 This information refers to an element in a figure; in this case, the figure is found in “position 5 in figure 1”. • This warning is located on the appliance. • This appliance must be installed according to the regulations in force and used only in a well ventilated area. • Refer to the instructions before installing and using this appliance. • The appliance must be installed by specialised technicians. ! WARNING: The appliance and its accessible components become very hot during use. Be extremely careful not to touch the heating elements. Keep children aged under 8 at a safe distance from the appliance unless they are constantly supervised. This appliance can be used by children aged 8 or over and by people with reduced physical, sensory or mental capacities or who are not familiar with the appliance or have no experience in using it, provided they are supervised or have been trained to use the appliance safely in order to understand the inherent risks. Children must not play with the appliance. ! WARNING: This appliance must not be cleaned or serviced by children unless they are supervised. 169 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC OVENS ! WARNING: When cleaning, do not use rough abrasive materials or sharp metal scrapers to clean the glass doors of the oven as these products may scratch the surface and cause the glass to shatter. Do not use steam cleaners to clean the appliance. ! WARNING: This appliance has not been designed to operate with an external timer or with a remote control system. If the power cable is damaged, have it replaced by the manufacturer, a technical service centre or a person with similar qualifications, in order to prevent all risks. ! WARNING: Use the appliance in accordance with the intended use. Leaving a cooker unsupervised with grease or oil can be dangerous and may cause a fire. Never attempt to extinguish a fire with water; switch off the appliance and smother the flames with a towel or fire blanket. Fire hazard: Do not keep objects on the cooking surfaces. Intended Use ! WARNING: This appliance can only be used to cook food. Any other use is deemed incorrect and therefore hazardous. The manufacturer declines liability for damage to property and injury to persons caused by improper, incorrect or irresponsible use. 170 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Technical Description Fig 5 Control Panel The following table shows all the buttons and symbols on the appliance. NOTE: Buttons and symbols may vary depending on the model. Ref 1 2 Symbol Description LED light indicating that the electric hotplate is in operation. Indicates the control knob of a hob burner. Ref 1-2-3-4-5-6 8 9 4 Button to turn on the oven light. 10 5 Indicates the grill control knob. 11 1-2-3-4-5-6 Indicates the oven 0 1-2-3-4-5-6 0 0 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6 0 Button to actuate electronic ignition. 1-2-3-4-5-6control knob. 1-2-3-4-5-6 0 1-2-3-4-5-6 Description LED light indicating that the fans are on. 7 3 6 Symbol 12 Oven or electric hotplate temperature. 0 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6 Electric hotplate turned 1-2-3-4-5-6 0 off. 01-2-3-4-5-6 0 Maximum adjustment 0 of the flame. Gas turned off. Minimum adjustment of the flame. 171 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC OVEN Burners Heat Output Model CU601PE Semrapid Auxiliary Ø 62mm Ø 47mm Rated Power Grill Electric Hotplate No. kW gr/h No. kW gr/h No. kW gr/h No. kW gr/h No. W gr/h 2 1.8 131 1 1 73 1 1.6 116 1 2 146 1 800 200/240 Use (additional safey warning) ! WARNING: This appliance must only be used by responsible adults. The accessible parts may be hot during and immediately after use; do not touch them and keep children away. After cooking, return the knob(s) to the closed position(s). After use, close the main gas line tap. This warning is clearly shown on the glass cover of the hob. The glass covers may break if heated. Ignition of any of the burners (hob, oven and grill) must always be done with the cover raised, and always turn off all the burners (hob, oven and grill) and leave them to cool down before closing the cover. ! WARNING: This appliance may not be used by people (including children) with impaired physical and mental capacities, or with no experience in using electrical appliances, unless they are supervised and instructed by a person who is responsible for their safety. Children must be controlled to make sure they do not play with the appliance. The use of a gas cooking appliance leads to the generation of heat and moisture in the room in which it is installed. Make sure to provide good ventilation in the kitchen: keep natural ventilation openings open or install a mechanical ventilation device (mechanical extractor hood). Intense and prolonged use of the appliance may require supplementary aeration such as the opening of a window or more effective ventilation such as an increase in the power of the possible mechanical extractor hood. NOTE: When cooking food for the first time, leave the oven and the grill on at maximum capacity. The oven must be kept on for at least 30 minutes and the grill must be kept on for 15-20 minutes. Remove any liquids overflowing on the cover before opening. 172 Oven Models bearing this label on the lid have a device that only allows for gas flow when the lid is fully open. Hob Selecting the burner ! WARNING: The flame must not spread over the edges of the cookware. Place the cookware centrally on the burner, so that it is stable on the support grid. Burner Cookware Diameter Auxiliary Ø 47mm from 60mm to 160mm Semrapid Ø 62mm from 160mm to 220mm ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: • check that there is gas in the cylinder. Fig 6 Electric ignition of the hob ! WARNING: Ignition must be done without any cookware or other object on the burners. • To generate the flame, fully press down the control knob (Fig. 6 1) and turn it to the large flame position (Fig. 6 2). • Simultaneously push down the electronic ignition button (Fig. 6 3). • Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. If the device does not work, close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT • Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. Regulation the hob flame • To adjust the flame, turn the knob to the desired position (Fig. 6 1). Oven ! WARNING: The burner must only be ignited when the door is fully open. The rack, drip pan (tray) or the pan must be positioned in the oven in a way that they are not directly in contact with the flames. If the burner flame accidentally goes out, close the gas knob and wait a minute before relighting. ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: • turn the knob to the small flame position (Fig. 6 4) • proceed with manual ignition; • check that there is gas in the cylinder. If the device does not work. close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. Manual ignition of the hob If the electronic ignition does not work, the manual ignition is used as a substitute. ! WARNING: Ignition must be done without any cookware or other object on the burners. Fig 7 Electronic ignition of the oven • To generate the flame, fully press down the control knob (Fig. 7 1) and turn it from position 1 to 6 (Fig. 7 2). • Simultaneously push down the electronic ignition button (Fig. 7 3). • Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. • To generate the flame, fully press down the control knob (Fig. 6 1) and turn it to the large flame position (Fig. 6 2). • Simultaneously ignite the burner with a match or gas lighter. 173 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC OVEN Grill ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: • proceed with manual ignition; • check that there is gas in the cylinder. If the device does not work, close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. Manual ignition of the oven If the electronic ignition does not work, the manual ignition is used as a substitute. •T o generate the flame, fully press down the control knob (Fig. 7 1) and turn it from position 1 to 6 (Fig. 7 2). • Simultaneously ignite the burner with a match or gas lighter. • Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. ! WARNING: The burner must only be ignited when the door is fully open. If the burner does not light immediately, release the knob and repeat the operation after 10 seconds. The door must always be opened during operation. Never use the grill for more than 25 minutes. The grill cannot be used as an oven. If the burner flame accidentally goes out, close the gas knob and wait a minute before relighting. Accessible parts may be hot when the grill is used, keep children away. ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: • check that there is gas in the cylinder. If the device does not work, close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. Regulating the oven flame •T o adjust the flame, turn the knob to the desired position (Fig. 7 1). Electronic ignition of the grill • To generate the flame, fully press down the control knob (Fig. 8 1) and turn it to the large flame position (Fig. 8 2). • Simultaneously push down the electronic ignition button (Fig. 8 3). Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. Position Temperture 1 120oC 2 150oC 3 180oC 4 200oC • proceed with manual ignition; 5 220oC • check that there is gas in the cylinder. 6 240oC If the device does not work, close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. NOTE: As soon as the oven burner flame is turned on, it remains at the maximum flow rate in all potions of the knob and then automatically decreases to the minimum flow rate when the set oven temperature is reached. 174 Fig 8 ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: Manual ignition of the grill If the electronic ignition does not work, the manual ignition is used as a substitute. • To generate the flame, fully press down the Electric hot plate (depending on model) • Simultaneously ignite the burner with a match or gas lighter. • Once the flame has been generated, press the knob down for a few seconds so that the flame remains lit. ! WARNING: Fig 9 Regulating the grill flame NOTE: When the electric hot plate is turned on for the first time, or if it has not been used for some time, the absorbed humidity must be removed by turning the plate on for 30 minutes on position 1 of the knob (Fig. 9 1). Use cookware with a flat bottom and with a diameter smaller than the diameter electric hotplate. • To adjust the flame, turn the knob to the desired position (Fig. 8 1). ! WARNING: If the burner does not turn on: • check that there is gas in the cylinder. If the device does not work, close the gas inlet tap and contact your dealer. Visual inspection of the flame Depending on the type of gas used, the flame appears as follows: • Propane (G31): flame with blue internal pin point and clear outline. • Butane (G30): flame with slight yellow tips when igniting the burner; these tips intensify as the burner heats. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT control knob (Fig. 8 1) and turn it to the large flame position (Fig. 8 2). Dry the bottom of the cookware before placing it on the electric hotplate. When using the hot plate, do not leave the appliance unattended and make sure children are not nearby. The electric hot plate is controlled by a 7position knob (Fig. 9 2 : the off position is represented by the 0 (zero), while the positions from 1 to 6 are used to operate the electric hot plate. The scale from 1 to 6 corresponds to the increasing heat intensity generated by the electric hot plate. There is a red LED light near the knob that lights up when the electric hot plate is in operation (Fig. 9 3). Accessories Fig 10 The rack and drip pan have a block that prevents accidental extraction (Fig.10 1). For a correct insertion, the blocks must be facing upwards and toward the inside of the appliance. To extract, slightly lift the front of the rack or the drip pan. 175 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC OVEN Gas cylinders ! WARNING: The use of gas and/or a pressure different from those indicated by the manufacturer could cause irregular and incorrect operation of the appliance. The manufacturer declines all liability for the incorrect or improper use of the appliance. The gas cylinders to be used are the most common in the country where the appliance is used. The gas to be used is clearly indicated on the outside of the packaging and on the indelible label attached on the back of the appliance. In any case, observe the following: gas cylinders with valve and pressure reducer must be placed in an upright position and in the appropriate compartment, and access should not be impeded. Replacement of the cylinders must be performed without impediment and with ease. Replacing the gas cylinder •C lose the taps of the appliance. • Make sure no flames or fire are nearby. • Close the valve of the cylinder to be replaced. • Unscrew the pressure reducer of the empty cylinder, take it out of the compartment. • Proceed in reverse order for replacement. • Check for gas leaks with the use of a non-corrosive fluid. ! WARNING: • Do not use a soap and water solution. • Do not use an open flame. • Turn on the burners and check for proper operation, otherwise contact an authorised technician. CLOSE THE CYLINDER GAS SUPPLY AFTER USE 176 Gas leaks We recommend using a certified electronic gas leak detector. If you smell gas: • open the windows and immediately get all people out of the camper, caravan etc. • Never touch electrical switches, light matches or do anything that could ignite the gas. • Extinguish any open flame. • Close the cylinder valve or gas tank, and do not open the valve until the gas leak has been detected and eliminated. • Contact an authorised technician. Removing the door Cleaning the appliance ! WARNING: Before cleaning, switch off the appliance, disconnect it from the mains power supply and wait for it to cool down. Note: Hot surfaces could be damaged if they come into contact with cold water or a damp cloth. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Cleaning and maintenance Do not use abrasive, corrosive, chlorinebased products, scourers or steel wool. Do not leave acid or alkaline substances (vinegar, salt, lemon juice, etc.) on appliance surfaces. For stainless steel surfaces and enamelled parts: wash with soap and water or mild detergent, rinse and dry. Use clean sponges and cloths. ! WARNING: Do not use rough abrasive material or sharp metal scrapers to clean the glass oven doors as these products may cause the glass to shatter. Do not use steam cleaners to clean the appliance. Fig 11 To facilitate cleaning, you can remove the door from the oven as follows: • fully open the oven door (Fig. a 1). • Position the hooks of both hinges as indicated (Fig. a 2). • Slightly raise the front of the door (Fig. a 1) and pull it out. To replace the door follow the procedure in reverse. • Clean surfaces with soap and water or mild detergent, rinse and dry. In particular, remove oil residues and encrusted grease. 177 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T DOMETIC OVEN Warranty Disposal The statutory warranty period applies. If the product is defective, please contact the local manufacturer in your country (the address is on the back of the instruction manual) or your reference specialised dealer. Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE) For repair and warranty processing, the following documents must be included when sending the appliance: • a copy of the receipt showing the date of purchase; • a reason for the claim or a description of the fault. 178 Information to users This information notice is addressed exclusively to owners of appliances accompanied by this symbol on the label bearing the technical data applied to the product (serial number label). This symbol indicates that the product is classified, according to current regulations, as electrical or electronic equipment and complies with EU directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE). Therefore, at the end of its useful life, it must be handled separately from household waste by delivering it, free of charge, to a recycling centre for electrical and electronic equipment or by returning it to the dealer when buying a new equivalent appliance. The user is responsible for delivering the appliance to appropriate collection facilities at the end of its working life or face the penalties provided for by current waste management legislation. A correct waste disposal of the appliance and its subsequent recycling, handling and environmentally compatible disposal helps avoid possible negative effects on the environment and health, and promotes the reuse and/or recycling of materials that make up the product. Contact your local waste disposal service or the shop where the appliance was purchased for further information regarding the collection systems available. Manufacturers and importers comply with their responsibilities for recycling, handling and environmentally compatible disposal either directly or by participating in a collective system. MICROWAVE OVEN Note: Always refer to the microwave operating instructions supplied with the vehicle. Note: Take precautions to avoid possible exposure to excessive microwave energy ! WARNING: a. D o not attempt to operate this oven with the door open since open door operation can result in harmful exposure to microwave energy. It is important not to defeat or tamper with the safety interlocks. ! WARNING: b. D o not place any objects between the oven front face of the door or allow soil or cleaner residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces. ! WARNING: c. If the door or door seals are damaged, the oven must not be operated until it has been repaired by a competent person. ! WARNING: d. It is hazardous for anyone other than a competent person to carry out a service or repair operation. ! WARNING: Important safety guidance ! WARNING: To prevent fire, burns, electric shock and other warnings. Listed below are, as with all appliances, certain rules to follow and safeguards to assure high performance from this oven. Important instructions 1. Do not use the oven for any reason other than food preparation, such as for drying clothes, paper, or any other non food items or for sterilizing purposes. 2. Do not use the oven when empty, this could damage the oven. 3. Do not use the oven cavity for any type of storage, such as papers, cookbook, cookware etc. 4. Do not operate the oven without the glass tray in place. Be sure it is sitting properly on the rotating base. 5. Make sure you remove caps or lids prior to cooking when you cook food sealed in bottles. 6. Do not put foreign material between the oven surface and door. It could result in excessive leakage of microwave energy. 7. Do not use recycled paper products for cooking. They may contain impurities which could cause sparks and/or fires when used during cooking. ! WARNING: 8. Do not pop popcorn unless popped in a microwave approved popcorn popper or unless it’s commercially packaged and recommended especially for microwave ovens. Microwave popped corn produces a lower yield than conventional popping; there will be a number of unpopped kernels. Do not use oil unless specified by the manufacturer. ! WARNING: 9. Do not cook any food surrounded by a membrane, such as egg yolks, potatoes, chicken livers, etc., without first piercing them several times with a fork. e. L iquids or other foods must not be heated in sealed containers since they are liable to explode. f. O nly allow children to use the oven without supervision when adequate instruction has been given so that the child is able to use the oven in a safe way and understands the hazards of improper use. g. When the appliance is operated in the combination mode, children should only use the oven under adult supervision due to the temperature generated. (if provided) F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Microwave oven general user instructions 10. Do not pop popcorn longer than the manufacturer’s directions. (Popping time is generally below 3 minutes). Longer 179 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T MICROWAVE OVEN cooking does not yield more popped corn it can cause scorching and fire. Also, the cooking tray can become too hot to handle or may break. 11. If smoke is observed, switch off or unplug the appliance and keep the door closed in order to stifle any flames. 12. W hen heating food in plastic or paper containers, keep an eye on the oven due to the possibility of ignition. 13. T he contents of feeding bottles and baby food jars shall be stirred or shaken and the temperature checked before consumption, in order to avoid burns. 14. A lways test the temperature of food or drink which has been heated in a microwave oven before you give it to somebody, especially to children or elderly people. This is important because things which have been heated in a microwave oven carry on getting hotter even though the microwave oven cooking has stopped. 15. E ggs in their shell and whole hard-boiled eggs should not be heated in microwave ovens since they may explode, even after microwave heating has ended. 16. K eep the waveguide cover clean at all times. Wipe the oven interior with a soft damp cloth after each use. If you leave grease or fat anywhere in the cavity it may overheat, smoke or even catch fire when next using the oven. 17. N ever heat oil or fat for deep frying as you cannot control the temperature and doing so may lead to overheating and fire. 180 18. Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling due to surface tension of the Iiquid. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present. This could result in very hot liquid suddenly boiling over when a spoon or other utensil is inserted into the liquid. To reduce the risk of Injury to persons: a. Do not overheat the liquid. b. Stir the Iiquid both before and halfway through heating it. c. Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks. d. After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container e. Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container. EXTRACTOR HOOD Extractor hood 524 1. Turn the oven off before cleaning 2. Keep the inside of the oven clean. When food spatters or spilled liquids adhere to oven walls, wipe with a damp cloth. Mild detergent may be used if the oven gets very dirty. The use of harsh detergent or abrasives is not recommended. 3. The outside oven surface should be cleaned with soap and water, rinsed and dried with a soft cloth. To prevent damage to the operating parts inside the oven, water should not be allowed to seep into the ventilation openings. 4. If the Control Panel becomes wet, clean with a soft dry cloth. Do not use harsh detergents or abrasives on the Control Panel. 5. If steam accumulates inside or around the outside of the oven door, wipe with a soft cloth. This may occur when the microwave oven is operated under high humidity conditions and in no way indicates malfunction of the unit. 6. It is occasionally necessary to remove the glass tray for cleaning. Wash the tray in warm sudsy water or in a dishwasher. 7. The roller guide and oven cavity floor should be cleaned regularly to avoid excessive noise. Simply wipe the bottom surface of the oven with mild detergent water or window cleaner and dry. The roller guide may be washed in mild sudsy water. 8. The oven should be cleaned regularly and any food deposits removed; 9. Failure to maintain the oven in a clean condition could lead to deterioration of the surface that could adversely affect the life of the appliance and possibly result in a hazardous situation. 1 2 3 1 2 3 F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Care of the microwave Operating panel Light Filter holder with grease filter The extractor hood 524 serves to extract water vapour from cooking areas in motorhomes. The integrated halogen lamps (2) serve to illuminate the work surface. The fan and the lighting (2) can be switched independently via the operating panel (1). At the same time. The integrated grease filter (3) prevents the extraction system from being contaminated from inside. Note: Safety information, always refer to the user instructions provided with your motorhome. Replacing the lamps on the extractor Lamp type: max. 10W /12V halogen with UVStop Always switch off the lights before replacing the lamps! The lamps get very hot during operation. There is a risk of being burnt. Wait until the lamp has cooled down. There is a risk of injury if the lamp is broken. Remove the remainder of the lamp using suitable tools only. 181 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET Introduction s. Waste holding tank mult-level indicator The Thetford cassette toilet is a high quality product. The functional design combines modern styling and ease of use and the toilet forms an integrated part of your motorhome bathroom. The Cassette toilet is manufactured from high quality synthetic material. This makes it a durable, user and maintenance friendly toilet. t. Flush water tank level indicator The toilet is made up of two parts, a permanently fixed part and a waste tank that is accessible from the outside. The removable waste tank is located, under the toilet bowl and can be removed via a door on the outside of the motorhome. g f Parts a. Removable Seat and Lid b. Swivelling Toilet Bowl c. Blade Handle d. Flush Button e. Waste Holding Tank Level Indicator f. Rotating Emptying Spout g. Automatic Pressure Release Vent h. Sliding Cover i. Removable Mechanism j. Vent Plunger k. Pull-Out Handle l. Wheels m. Blade Opener n. Access Door to Waste Holding Tank p. Electric blade opener q. Electric ventilator 182 r. Waste pump-out system h m i l k Thetford C260CS & C260S cassette toilet The toilet is made up of two parts: a permanently fixed part and a Waste Holding Tank that is accessible from the outside. The removable Waste Holding Tank is located under the toilet bowl and can be removed via a door on the outside of the motorhome. j n Using the toilet 1. Open the access door on the outside of your motorhome. 7. Turn the bowl to the desired position with the lid closed and using both hands. 2. Remove the Waste Holding Tank by pulling the safety catch (which holds the tank in place) upwards. 8. To activate the control panel, press the flush-button once. The control panel display will stay activated for approximately 5 minutes. Run some water into the bowl by pressing the flush button again briefly. 3. Pull the Waste Holding Tank outward to the stop. Tip it slightly and take the tank fully out. 4. Place the tank upright and turn the rotating emptying spout upwards. The emptying spout ensures that the tank can be easily and hygienically emptied. 5. Remove the cap, with the measuring cup inside, from the emptying spout and pour the correct dosage of Thetford toilet fluid (see product label) into the holding tank. This avoids unpleasant smells and keeps the inside of the tank clean. Next add approximately 2 litres of water enough to ensure that the bottom of the Waste Holding Tank is covered. For more information on Thetford toilet fluids, see last page of the Thetford user manual. Screw the cap back onto the emptying spout and turn back to its original position. Note: The Emptying Spout Measuring Cap is supplied in the same packaging as the Thetford user manual. ! WARNING: Never add toilet fluid directly via the blade or the toilet bowl as this could damage the lip seal of the Waste Holding Tank. Always pour the fluids via the emptying spout. 6. Slide the Waste Holding Tank back into its original position via the access door. Make sure that it is secured with the safety catch. Close the access door and lock it. Your Thetford toilet is now ready to use. ! WARNING: Never use force if you cannot get the tank back into place easily. This may cause serious damage. If blockage occurs, always check if the blade handle is in the correct (closed) position. 9. The toilet may be used with the blade open or closed. To open the blade, slide the blade handle under the toilet bowl sideways. After use, open the blade (if still closed) and flush the toilet by pressing the flush button for several seconds (if necessary re-activate the control panel). Close the blade after use. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Preparing for use Emptying The Waste Holding Tank has a capacity of 18 litres and requires emptying when the red light (LED) on the toilet control display lights up, when the Waste Holding Tank only has capacity for approximately 2 more litres, which is no more than two to three further uses. Make sure that the blade is closed. Open the access door located outside the vehicle, pull the safety catch upwards and remove the Waste Holding Tank. 10. Place the Waste Holding Tank in an upright position (Pull-Out Handle at the top, Wheels at the bottom). Slide the handle sideways - to the front of the tank until it snaps out of its locked position. 11. Pull the handle up and wheel the Waste Holding Tank to an authorised waste disposal point. 12. Push the handle back into its locked position. Turn the emptying spout upwards and remove the cap from the spout. Hold the Waste Holding Tank in such a way that during emptying you can operate the vent plunger with your thumb. To empty the tank without splashing, depress the vent plunger while emptying the tank. After emptying, rinse the tank and blade thoroughly with water. 183 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET ! WARNING: Do not seriously shake the tank or use high pressure water cleaners. This may cause damage to the tank’s interior. Note: The vent plunger should only be depressed once the emptying spout is pointing downwards. Prepare the toilet for re-use if required. Slide the Waste Holding Tank into the toilet and close the access door. Cleaning and maintenance The toilet should be cleaned and maintained regularly, depending on the amount of use. To clean Thetford toilets, we advise using water and Thetford Bathroom Cleaner. Note: Never use bleach, vinegar or other powerful household cleaners that contain these substances. These may cause permanent damage to the seals and other toilet components. Toilet bowl • Squirt Thetford Bathroom Cleaner into the toilet bowl. • Flush the toilet bowl with water and wipe down the rest of the toilet with a damp cloth. • Clean seat and lid The seat and lid can easily be removed: Lift the seat and lid assembly and pull the round pins (inside the assembly) outwards from the pin holes. After cleaning, replace the seat and lid by positioning the round pins in front of the pin holes and push the lid and seat downwards. • To keep your flush water fresh and to prevent deposits from forming in your toilet bowl, add a correct dosage of Aqua Rinse in your flush water tank, if present, on your toilet. Tip! For a really shining toilet, dry with a soft dry cloth after cleaning. 184 Waste holding tank To keep your Waste Holding Tank fresh and clean, Thetford has developed a number of different toilet fluids. Thetford toilet fluids suppress smells, reduce formation of gas, promote breakdown of toilet waste and increase the life span of a mobile toilet. See page 50 of the Thetford user manual for more information. We advise a thorough cleaning of the Waste Holding Tank once each season, using Thetford’s Cassette Tank Cleaner. • Remove the removable mechanism from the Waste Holding Tank by turning it anticlockwise and rinse it under a tap. • Remove the cover plate from the Automatic Pressure Release Vent by prising it up using a small screwdriver. Use one hand to push the Automatic Pressure Release Vent open while holding the float of the Automatic Pressure Release Vent on the inside of the tank with the other hand. Push the float upwards, turn it 180 degrees and remove it from below. Remove the rubber seal underneath the float. Rinse the float and rubber seal under a tap. Replace the Pressure Release Vent using the same method in reverse. The rubber seals in the toilet (the lip seal, the mechanism seal, the automatic pressure release vent seal and the cap seal) should be regularly cleaned with water and treated with Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant. This will ensure that the seals remain flexible and in good condition. If the toilet is not to be used for any length of time, it is important to treat the seals with Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant after cleaning. Note: Never use Vaseline or any vegetable oil except olive oil. These may cause leakage or malfunction. The lip seal is a part of the toilet that is subject to wear. Depending upon the extent and manner of use, the seals will become less effective and will need replacing periodically. You can use your Thetford Cassette Toilet as normal in cold weather as long as the toilet is situated in a heated location. If there is a risk of freezing we advise that the toilet is drained by following the instructions under ‘Storage’. For environmental reasons the use of antifreeze, such as that used in car radiators, is not recommended. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Winter operation Storage It is important that you follow the instructions below if you do not expect to use your Thetford toilet for a long (winter) period. • With the vehicle fresh water tank drained, (See “Fresh Water System” on page 51 for how to drain the tank), press the toilet flush button until water stops flowing into the bowl. Close the blade. Open the access door on the outside of your motorhome and empty the Waste Holding Tank at an authorised waste dump. Follow the instructions for cleaning and maintenance. To allow the Waste Holding Tank to dry, do not place the cap back on the emptying spout of the tank. Thetford warranty refer to the Thetford user handbook. 185 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET Cassette toilet fault finding Fault Remedy Bowl does not drain when toilet is flushed. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl. Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal removal and emptying procedure. Cassette is overfilled Odours Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle. Soiled bowl after flushing Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste. Tip: Leave valve blade open during use. No power to add water to toilet bowl Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement and operation. Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse. Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl. Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise to close valve blade. Cassette cannot be removed Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise. CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the cassette tank. 186 Valve blade mechanism sticks or is hard to open Spray light film of silicone on blade. Major unit malfunction Contact your original Motorhome Dealer. THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET These operating instructions cover Thetford cassette toilet models C-402C, C-402X and C-403L. There are a few differences in the use of these models. Make sure that you follow the instructions that apply to your toilet model. The parts and functions that are referred to by letters are illustrated in later pages. The actions to be taken, referred to by numbers, are illustrated are also illustrated in page 192. Parts and functions C-402C and C-402X a. Handle: opens and shuts the valve blade b. F lush knob: when this pressed, an electric pump fills the bowl with water c. L evel indicator display: the red LED on the display lights up when the waste tank is full (C-402C and C-402X). When the flush know is pressed briefly, the display shows the level in the waste tank and the level in the water tank (C-402X). d. R emovable seat and cover e. C over plates f. S torage compartment for toilet fluids (only the tall model) g. Safety catch: holds the waste tank in place h. Water filling tunnel: for easy filling of the water tank. i. Cover: guarantees optimal hygiene. Opens when the waste tank is located in the toilet and closes when the waste tank is removed. o. Automatic pressure release valve: ventilates the waste tank when this located in the cassette toilet. Avoids excessive pressure in the waste tank. p. Pull-out handle: for easy transport of the waste tank. q. Wheels r. Rotating emptying spout: ensures that the waste tank can be easily and hygienically emptied. s. Water filling extension t. Access hatch to waste tank and water filling funnel: lockable from the outside of the vehicle. C-402L a. Handle: opens and shuts the valve blade. b Flush knob: when pressed a central electric pump in the vehicle pumps water into the bowl. c. Level indicator display: the red LED on the display lights up when the waste tank is full. When the flush knob is pressed briefly, the display shows the level in the waste tank. d. Removable seat and cover e. Cover plate f. Storage compartment for toilet fluids (only the tall models) g. Safety catch: holds the waste tank in place. h. Cover: guarantees optimal hygiene. Opens when the waste tank is located in the toilet. i. Removable mechanism j. Valve blade opener j. Removable mechanism k. Valve blade / Valve seal k. Valve blade opener l. Vent plunger: for emptying without splashing. l. Valve blade / valve seal m. Automatic pressure release vent: ventilates the waste tank when this is located in the cassette toilet. Avoids excessive pressure in the waste tank. m. Vent plunger: for emptying with splashing. n: Upper handle F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Thetford C400 Cassette Toilet n. Upper handle: for easy emptying o. Pull-out handle: for easy transport of the waste tank. p. Wheels 187 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET q.Rotating emptying spout: ensures that the waste tank can be easily and hygienically emptied. r.Access hatch to waste tank: lockable from the outside of the vehicle. Preparing for use C-402C, C-402X and C-403L 1. Open the access door on the outside of your motorhome. C-402C and C-402X 2. Rotate the waste tank emptying spout 90 degrees and remove the water filling extension (you will find it positioned beneath the handle closest to the emptying spout). 3. Rotate the waterfill funnel outwards, remove the cap and place the extension on the waterfill funnel. Add the stated amount of Thetford fresh water additive to the water tank. This ensures a better and cleaner flush and keeps the water in the flush tank fresh. 4. Fill the water tank with clean water. Warning: keep water level below the top of the water filling funnel. 5. Remove the extension and return to its original position on the waste tank. Note: depending on the space between the door and waste tank, this extension part may also be fixed on the door with a hook. Screw the cap back onto the water filling funnel and push back inwards towards the side of the flush water tank. Note: 150ml of water will remain in the waterfill funnel when the water tank is empty. C-402C, C-402X and C-403L 6. Remove the waste tank by pulling the safety catch upwards. 7. Pull the waste tank outward to the stop. Tip it slightly and take the tank fully out. 8. Place the tank upright and turn the emptying spout upwards. 9. Remove the cap, with the measuring cup inside, from the emptying spout and pour 188 the stated quantity of toilet fluid into the waste tank. This avoids unpleasant smells in the waste tank and keeps the inside of the waste tank clean. Next add approximately 2 litres of water - enough to ensure that the bottom of the waste tank is covered. Screw the cap back onto the emptying spout. Turn the emptying spout back to its original position. N.B. The emptying spout measuring cap is supplied in the same packaging as this manual. ! WARNING: Never add toilet fluid via the valve blade or via the toilet bowl. 10. Slide the waste tank back into its original position via the access door. ! WARNING: Never use force if you cannot get the tank back into place easily. This may cause serious damage. 11. Made sure that the waste tank is secured with the safety catch. Shut the access door and lock it. 12. R un water into the bowl by pressing the flush knob briefly or open the valve blade by turning the handle anti-clockwise. Your Thetford toilet is now ready for use. 13. A fter us, open the valve blade (if still closed) by turning the handle anticlockwise. Flush the toilet by pressing the flush knob for several seconds. Close the valve blade after use. Note: Do not leave water in the bowl if the toilet is not being used. This does not help to reduce unpleasant smells and only leads to flooding. Note: To prevent clogging, we recommend using Aqua soft, Thetford’s quickly dissolving toilet paper. ! WARNING: Please do not travel with a flush water tank that is too full (we advise empty) but not filled more than half full. Do not travel with water in the toilet bowl. Failure to adhere to this notice may result in water damage to yxour motorhome. Emptying The waste tank has a capacity of 19 litres and must be emptied at the latest when the red light in the level display lights up. The indicator lamp will light up when the waste tank can still take about two litres, which is about three uses. Note: Do not allow the waste tank to become too full. Use C-402C, C-402X and C-403L 14. M ake sure that the valve blade is closed. Open the access door located outside the vehicle. Pull the safety catch upwards and remove the waste tank. 15. R emove the water filling extension first to avoid it getting lost during the emptying of the waste tank. 16. Stand the waste tank upright (pull out handle at the top, wheels at the bottom). Press the handle down and move it away from the waste tank until it snaps out of its locked position. 17. Pull the handle up and wheel the waste tank to an authorised waste dump. 17. Pull the handle up and wheel the waste tank to an authorised waste dump. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Use C-402C, C-402X and C-403L 18. Push the handle back. Turn the emptying spout upwards and remove the cap from the spout. Hold the waste tank by the upper handle with one hand, while placing your other hand by the rear handle so that during emptying you can operate the vent plunger with your thumb. To empty the tank without splashing, depress the vent plunger while emptying the tank. After emptying, flush the tank thoroughly with water. Also clean the valve blade with water. Note: The vent plunger should only be pressed once the emptying spout is pointing downwards! 19. If required make the toilet ready for use once again. Return the water filing extension to its original position on the waste tank. Slide the waste tank into the toilet and close the access door. Storage It is important that you follow the instructions below if you do not expect the Thetford toilet for a long period. Completely empty the water tank through the drain tube, which also serves as a level indicator. Take the drain tube out of the clamp and carefully pull it downwards from the upper plug. Direct the drain tube out through the access door opening to allow water to flow out. Afterwards, be sure the drain tub is placed back into the clamp first and then pushed into the upper plug. 189 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET C-403L Waste tank Drain the central water system of the motorhome. We advise a thorough cleaning of the waste tank once each season. C-402C, C-402X and C-403L • Remove the mechanism from the waste tank by turning it anti-clockwise, as shown on the waste tank. Rinse the complete mechanism under a tap. 20. O pen the valve blade by turning the handle on the toilet anti-clockwise. Press the blue knob until water stops flowing into the bowl. Close the valve blade. C-402C and C-402X 21. O pen the access door on the outside of your motorhome and turn the water filling funnel outwards. Remove the cap and empty the water filling funnel by turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise. C-402C, C-402X and C-403L 22. R emove the waste tank and empty this at an authorise waste dump. Follow the instructions for cleaning and maintenance. 23. R eplace the waste tank and open the valve blade by moving the handle on the toilet to the left. Cleaning and maintenance The toilet should be cleaned and maintained regularly, depending on the amount of use. To clean Thetford toilets, we advise using water and Thetford Plastic Cleaner. Note: Never use household cleaners (bleach, solvents or other powerful cleaning agents). These may cause permanent damage to the seals and other toilet components. Toilet • Squirt Thetford Plastic Cleaner in the toilet. • Flush the bowl with water and wipe down the rest of the toilet with a damp cloth. Tip! For a really shining toilet, dry it with a soft dry cloth after cleaning. • Clean seat and lid. The seat and lid can easily be removed. Lift the lid and seat together and pull upwards. After cleaning, replace the seat and lid by positioning the round pins above the holes and then pushing the lid and seat downwards. 190 • Remove the cover plate from the automatic pressure release vent by prising it up using a screwdriver. Use one hand to push the automatic pressure vent open, while holding the float of the automatic pressure release vent on the inside of the tank with the other hand. Push the float upwards, turn the float half a turn and remove it from below. Remove the rubber seal that is under the float. Rinse the float and the rubber seal under a tap. Replace the rubber seal and float for the automatic pressure release vent in the same way. The rubber seals in the toilet(the valve blade seal, the mechanism, seal and the automatic pressure release vent seal and the cap seal) should be regularly treated with Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant. This will ensure that the seals remain supple and in good condition. If the toilet is not to be used for any length of time, it is important to treat the seals with Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant after cleaning. Note: Never use Vaseline or any vegetable oil except olive oil. These may cause leakage. Note: The valve blade is part of the toilet that is subject to wear. Depending on the extent and manner of service, after a certain period the seal will become less effective and must be replaced. Winter operation You can use you Thetford cassette toilet as usual in cold weather, as long as the toilet is situated in a heated location. If this is not the case there is a risk of freezing. In that case we advise that the toilet is drained by following the instructions under ‘Storage’. Thetford Warranty Thetford B.V. offers the end users of its products a three year guarantee. In the case of defects within the guarantee period Thetford will replace or repair the product. In this instance, the costs of replacement, labour costs for the replacement of defective components and/or the costs of the parts themselves will be paid by Thetford. 1. To claim under this guarantee, the user must take the product to a Service Centre recognised by Thetford. The claim will be assessed there. 2. Components replaced during repair under guarantee become the property of Thetford. Customer service Please visit the Thetford web site if you require further information or have questions about your toilet, www.thetford.eu The information available includes frequently asked questions, problems and solution, instructions for repair, tips and a list of Thetford dealers near you. If you still have questions or remarks, please contact the Customer Service Department in your country (see the addresses at the back of this manual). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT For environmental reasons the use of antifreeze, such as that used in a car radiator, is not advised. Liability Thetford is not liable for loss and/or damage caused directly or indirectly by use of the toilet. Flush water tank contents Waste tank contents 15 L 19.3 L 3. This guarantee does not prejudice current consumer protection law. 4. This guarantee is not valid in the case of products that are for, or are used for, commercial purposes. 5. Guarantee claims falling into one of the following categories will be honoured: - the product has been improperly used or the instructions in the manual have not been followed; - the product has not been installed in accordance with the instructions; - alterations have been made to the product; - the product has been repaired by a Service Centre not recognised by Thetford; - the serial number or product code has been changed; - the product has been damaged by circumstances outside the normal use of the product. 191 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET 192 THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET TROUBLESHOOTING Fault Remedy Bowl does not drain when toilet is flushed. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl. Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal removal and emptying procedure. Cassette is overfilled Odours Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle. Toilet tissue does not fit into compartment. Since some tissues are supplied on larger rolls, it may be necessary to use some tissue before storing into compartment. Soiled bowl after flushing Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste. Tip: Leave valve blade open during use. No power to add water to toilet bowl Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement and operation. Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse. Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl. Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise to close valve blade. Cassette cannot be removed Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Cassette toilet fault finding CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the cassette tank. Valve blade mechanism sticks or is hard to open Spray light film of silicone on blade. Major unit malfunction Contact your original Motorhome Dealer. 193 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T WINDOWS Windows Seitz Window Systems To open, depress the button on the handle (not on Kon-Tiki) and turn the handle, the majority rotate anti-clockwise with one handle on the right stay that will rotate clockwise. Once all catches are open swivel the window pane open to the desired position. These positions are set by a ratchet on the stay, it has 3 pre-set positions. To close, open the window all the way past the last position and it will then close. The same phenomenon may also occur when washing your vehicle on a hot day. The condensation should clear itself when the ambient conditions return to normal and the air between the panes dries. However, if this is taking a longer time than required, the breathable plug (normally located in the top corner of the window) can be removed, with a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the panes are dry. Care should be taken when doing this. All opening windows have two catch positions. The first position is for ventilation the second seals the window from ventilation and rain. Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning Kon-Tiki Polyvision Acrylic Windows To open, turn knobs anti-clockwise and open catches. Swivel the window pane open to the desired position and close knobs clockwise to lock in the open position. Equally, care should be taken when using a drying cloth that it is clean and free from grit. To close, reverse the operation. Plastoform Window System All opening windows have two catch positions. The first position is for ventilation the second seals the window from ventilation and rain. Within these instructions you will be able to find information to most common questions about correct usage of PLASTOFORM Blanca windows. If you can’t find the information you need here, please contact us directly on email: [email protected] Window Condensation Kon-tiki windows are not vacuum sealed. Instead the double panes of acrylic plastic are fitted with a breathable plug on the inner pane. It is possible, in weather where extremes in temperatures occur between night and day, that customer will notice condensation between the panes. 194 The material used to produce most motorhome windows is acrylic plastic. While the acrylic used is very durable, it is able to be scratched with relative ease and therefore, care must be taken when cleaning your vehicle not to use aggressive cleaning products. While Driving When vehicle is in motion all windows must be fully closed. WINDOWS Never use blind on direct sunlight. If you use the blind on direct sunlight, also for a shorter period, heat will accumulate between window and blind and window may get damaged (will start bending, ballooning…). Cleaning Never use abrasive and corrosive substances or solvents on windows, such as turpentine, spirit, dishwasher detergents, as they will damage acrylic and/or print. We recommend cleaning with generous amount of water or mild cleaner intended for use on acrylic. Even cleaning with dry cloth can damage the acrylic and leave scratches; always use moist sponge or moist soft cloth. Never clean windows with high pressure washer. Also carwash can damage windows and cause scratches or other damages. Note: Acrylic material can get scratched very easily, please consider above instructions for cleaning, so that you will not cause scratches or other damages while cleaning. Condensation Condensation can appear on the window or between both panes. This is a normal occurrence that appears because of different temperatures inside and outside and properties of acrylic itself. Condensation will disperse after some time. This doesn’t mean that there is something wrong with the window or that it is leaking. With properly ventilating the vehicle, you can in most cases prevent also condensation. Handles with button: Always push the button when opening/closing handle. Stays with click stops: You will hear clicks when opening the window. Every click represents position in which a window can stay opened. When closing the window, you must open to it’s widest opening and then close. Do not try to close it without first opening it as wide as it goes, as this will damage the stays. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Sun blinds Stays with knob screw: Always make sure to unscrew the knob before closing the window. Catcher enables three positions of the window. Open position is where the handle is open placed on the outer part of the catcher. If the handle is placed in the middle of the catcher, this is position for ventilating. Closed position is position where the handle is closed on the inner part of the catcher. Opening and closing the windows Your windows are equipped with either handles with button or handles without button and stays. Consider the following instruction to avoid the most common damages that can occur: 1.1 open position 1.2 ventilation 195 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T WINDOW BLINDS screen does not cause an obstruction. Blinds that shade from the top downwards must be kept completely open, or be opened regularly to allow the heat to escape. Keeping the windows in ventilation position allows heat to escape. 1.3 closed position Plastoform Blanca windows are top quality windows from acrylic material. If you consider above instructions, your windows can stay in good shape for a long time. Windows also require periodic maintenance and check by your dealer at least once per year. Never fully close a roller blind system when storing the vehicle or when not in use for longer periods! or vehicles containing blinds from the top F downwards or with other types of reflective blinds / curtains, please make sure that these blinds are also ventilated or not fully closed. Horrex Window Blinds Ensure that all windows and roof vents are closed when the vehicle travels on the road. To operate, pull down or up by holding the finger bar. To adjust the tension of the Horrex blind: • The blind will come up from the bottom of the cassette to close and the flynet will come down from the top • Only operate by holding the fingergrip(s) pulling on one side will cause uneven running and snagging. • It is not recommended that blinds and/or flyscreens are left in the down position for long periods, or when travelling, as this can result in fatigue of the spring. • Clean the cassette, side track and fabrics with mild detergent and water. • Lubrication of mechanism or spring is not required or recommended. For more detailed information, see manufacturer’s instructions. Blind Advice In case of prolonged exposure to the sun roller blinds should not be completely closed as this could cause excessive heat concentration at the top of the window, due to characteristics of the glazing material the windows could be adversely affected. Blinds that shade from the bottom upwards it is necessary to leave a gap of a few centimetres open at the top, this way the heat between window and blind can escape. A fly 196 In each corner piece there is an cord tensioner (see photo). By unscrewing the hexagon screw, the cord can move through the cord tensioner. When you pull the cord, the tension will get higher, when you let it move back the tension will get less. Care instructions: Clean the blind only with a damp sponge. Clean on a regular basis to avoid dirt particle build up as this can damage the blind material. Use only water or with mild suds or a vacuum cleaner. In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave the flynet closed for a long time. SKY VIEW F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Skyview operating instructions Safety and care instructions Note: Before opening the dome please check if all handles are disengaged and no objects are in the opening area of the rooflight. For Manual Skyviews To open, turn the handle anti-clockwise to the required opening position. To close, turn the handle clockwise until the dome lies on the seal and a resistance is noticeable. Note: Before you start your journey, close the rooflight by turning the handle to the closed position. Electric Skyviews Release the retaining catches on either side of the skyview. Opening/closing the blind and fly net Pull the end rod from the recessed part and push it in a position you desire. You can adjust the incidence of light with the second operating bar. Safety precautions Repairs should be carried out only by trained personnel. Inform an approved dealer in case of defects and malfunctions. Before starting off, check the roof light for damage in the dome (tension cracks) and the opening mechanism which could arise owing to, for example, branches and other natural causes. Do not step on the screen. Do not leave the vehicle with the roof light open (danger of burglary and water penetration). To open and close the window press the button positioned below the window in the centre of the moulded surround. Do not open in strong wind, rain or snowfall. Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt etc. from the dome. Keep the button depressed until the desired opening angle. Malfunctions must be repaired by an approved dealer at once. Do not use caustic detergents (danger of tension cracks in the dome). To close press the button until the window sits in the seals and engages catch. Please make sure that no persons or objects are in the closing area of the rooflight. Before setting off close the dome and check the locking mechanism. Avoid high speed (maximum speed recommended is 130 km/h). Do not close the blind more than 2/3 during the day (danger of heat build up). Before starting off, open the blind. 197 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T SKYVIEW / ROOFLIGHTS Care instructions Mini Heki rooflight (when fitted) Clean the dome with the Seitz acrylic cleaner. Opaque spots and light scratches on the dome can be removed with the Seitz Acrylic Polish and the Seitz Special Polishing cloth. Use talcum powder regulary (4 times yearly) to care for the rubber seals. Clean the blinds only with water and mild soap suds or a vacuum cleaner. Note: The guarantee becomes null and void if the care and safety instructions are not followed. Roof lights To open depress the button (Fig. A). When opening the roof lights, care must be taken to release the locking mechanism as the unit is raised. Roof lights must be fully closed when driving. Roof lights provide essential fixed levels of ventilation. Pull the bar down and forwards (Fig. B). By pushing the bar in to the marked rest positions (Fig. C). 198 ROOFLIGHTS Two extra opening angles apart from the one in which the dome is fully opened can be chosen. The intermediate position can be fixed with a slide marked with the arrows. Care should be taken to ensure the dome is closed and locked for transit with the bar located behind the locking button (Fig. D). F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Roof light blind and flyscreen The blind and flyscreen operate Independently of each other and are engaged by connecting to each other and sliding. Safety precautions: 1. Repairs should be carried out only by trained personnel. 2. Inform an approved dealer in case of defects and malfunctions. 3. Before starting off, check the rooflight for damage in the acrylic dome (tension cracks) and the winding mechanism which could arise owing to, for example, branches and other natural causes. 4. Do not step on the acrylic dome. 5. Close the roof light before starting off (check whether it is locked). The blind flynet operate together and engage via the clips in the bar, then slide to gain the desired blackout or ventilation (Fig. E). Heki care instructions 6. Do not leave the vehicle with the rooflight open (danger of burglary or from rain). 7. Do not open in strong wind or rain. 8. Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt, etc. from the acrylic dome. Clean the blind only with a damp sponge. Clean on a regular basis to avoid dust/ dirt particle build up as this can damage the blind material. Use only water or with mild suds or a vacuum cleaner. 9. Malfunctions are to be repaired by an approved dealer at once. In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave the flynet closed for a long time. 11. Do not operate whilst the vehicle is moving. 10. Do not use caustic detergents (danger of tension cracks in the acrylic dome). 199 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T ROOFLIGHTS Midi-Heki rooflight Opening the Dome Closing the Dome (drive and rest position) Push the bar with both hands on the right and the left side in such a way that the hook bolt (1) the dome on the left and the right side and the bar lies on the push button (2). Check if the dome is locked. Intermediate position for the dome By pushing the bar into the marked rest position, two extra opening angles, apart from the one in which the dome is fully opened, can be chosen. 200 ROOFLIGHTS are designed to hold the skylight open to the selected position. In gusty or windy conditions the Skylight should be closed to prevent it from being blown fully open or slamming shut. • Clean the blinds only with water and mild soap suds • The guarantee becomes null and void if these instructions are not followed. Doors In order to provide customers with the latest designs of door furniture it is possible, due to the use of natural wood, that warping may occur. This should not detract from the correct functioning of items fitted in the motorhome. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT ! WARNING: The retaining catches Information During the normal travelling vehicle vibration and flexing may cause some of the furniture doors to become out of alignment. With crank To open, rotate the crank until a resistance is noticeable during the operation. For your convenience many hinges are adjustable. To close, reverse the operation and then check if locked into position. Electric version To open, push button until desired position is reached or the electric motor switches off. To close, reverse the operation and then check if locked into position. Care instructions: • Please clean the acrylic panes with the Seitz Acrylic Cleaner. • Stains and light scratches on the acrylic pane can be removed by using the Seitz Acrylic Polish and the Seitz special polishing cloth. • Use talcum powder (4 times yearly) to care for the rubber seals 201 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T OMNISTEP / AWNINGS Omnistep single step Operation The OMNISTEP is operated by the lever switch. Important: when extending the step, hold the switch until the step is completely extended. Never mount the step if retracted of if not fully extended, because then the blocking is not working and the motor can be damaged. Check if the step is retracted before departure. Maintenance Fiamma F45S/F45L side awning In order to avoid unnecessary strain on the awning as well as on the vehicle side, we suggest that the legs be extended about 1m from the opening. nscrew the leg knob U to slide the leg out of its seat. Dirt and frost can prevent the step from operating properly. In this case the moving parts should be cleaned or defrosted. All points of movement are layered in maintenance-free bearings. In case of electrical failure If the step does not retract by motor: Loosen the square connection according to fig. 5 (actions 1, 2 and 3), push the footboard in (4) and tie it to the frame. Current drawn Grasp the leg near its hingejoint and pull it in a horizontal direction. Lower the leg as shown in the figure. 5 A. When fully extended or retracted: 14-18 A After unrolling the awning completely, adjust the legs at the chosen height. Fig. 4 To avoid that the awning is lifted up by an unexpected gust of wind, it is necessary to secure the legs to the ground with the provided hooks. For greater safety, we strongly advise you also use some storm cords in the upper part of each support leg or anchor the awning with the Fiamma Tie-Down Kit strap. Fig. 5 202 AWNINGS Please find here a list of some practical advice for the best and long lasting use of your awning: If you want to fasten the support legs to the vehicle, put the terminals into the wall brackets. The brackets can be fixed only in reinforced points. ! WARNING: We recommend that the awning be ground mounted only. Side mounting brackets are supplied. But in inclement weather conditions it may cause damage to the motorhome bodywork. ! WARNING: The awning is a sun protection, please roll up your awning in case of rain, wind or snow. Alternatively lower one side of your awning, so that water can flow away and assemble the tension rafter as shown in the figure (not included for all awning lengths). Make sure that the awning perfectly rolls up: when it is, the red indicators on the front profile ends are no longer visible. A damaged fabric does not allow the awning to perfectly roll up. Never use the awning with a damaged canopy. Wash the canopy with Fiamma BRILL. Note: In case of problems refer to the awning user manual or contact your dealer. Suggestions for use and maintenance for the fabric of your awning. 1. Open and close the awning in normal condition of dampness and temperature (at night or in the morning) making sure the fabric has no sharp objects on it and is clean. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT In low temperature, the fabric becomes less pliable and there is a risk of cracks. 2. When closing the awning after a long period in the sun, wrinkles may appear and prevent the awning closing completely. In this case the security of the awning is not compromised, as the security winch will prevent accidental opening. If wrinkles appear re-open the awning and leave in the sun for some hours and the folds will disappear. Then of course you need to reclose the awning in normal conditions (see point 1). 3. Residual damp can cause spots on the fabric. If the awning has to be closed when the fabric is damp we suggest you re-open it as soon as possible to dry. 4. We suggest you avoid using the awning below 0°C. 5. When closing the awning you should support the front bar. 6. Most of the dirt seen on the fabric will be superficial and can be cleaned with water and a cloth. Stubborn marks can be removed using a light detergent. Please do not use aggressive chemical substances and do not use high pressure cleaning tools. Fiamma fabrics are made with PVC and Polyester layers and their properties can change in certain weather conditions. For example, if you close the awning which has been opened in the sun for a long time, wrinkles can appear on the fabric. 203 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T THULE OMNISTOR/AWNING 204 Thule Omnistor -For the mounting height of the bottom mounting brackets ask your dealer. -An awning is a sun and not an all-weather protection. The awning should be closed in case of storm, snow or heavy rain fall (avoid formation of a water pocket) THULE OMNISTOR/AWNING F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Escape Awning 205 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T REVERSING CAMERA / SENSORS / CYCLE RACKS Reverse Camera System Depending on the specification of your motorhome, a reverse camera system may be installed. This uses a single or twin lens camera system mounted at high level on the rear of the motorhome, connected to an LCD screen which forms part of the windscreen mounted rear view mirror. The reverse camera system is powered whenever the vehicle engine is running. Single lens camera system While the engine is running, the LCD screen can be switched on at any time to view the image from the camera, using the power button on the screen/mirror. If Reverse gear is selected, the screen will automatically switch on to display the image from the camera. Twin lens camera system. While the engine is running, the LCD screen can be switched on at any time to view the image from the camera, using the power button on the screen/mirror. Pressing the V1/ V2 then toggles between the images from the two rear cameras, which show a distance view, and a close range view. If Reverse gear is selected, the screen will automatically switch on and display the image from the close range camera. Note: The rear view camera (or reverse sensor system) is a driving aid, it is not a supplement to, nor a replacement for, safe driving and good all-round driver observation. The driver is responsible for the safe manoeuvring and detection of pedestrians, objects and obstacles particularly when reversing. The rear view camera image may be distracting or disorientating to some drivers and as such extra care and awareness must be observed at all times when using the camera. When reversing a responsible adult should assist in guiding the driver into confined spaces particularly where obstacles or pedestrians may be present or when visibility or lighting levels are reduced. 206 The mandatory required rear view door mirrors must be maintained and used as the primary rear visibility aid. The camera image quality can be affected by dirt, road spray, rain droplets, snow and ice and as such the camera lens will require regular inspection and cleaning. Image quality will be reduced at night-time or by bright lights shone in low level lighting conditions. Reverse Sensor System If a reverse sensor system is fitted to your motorhome, this will use a row of sensors fitted at low level on the motorhome, to detect obstacles. The system will automatically switch on when Reverse gear is selected. A buzzer located close to the driver’s seat (within a bed base) will then sound when an obstacle has been detected and is close to the rear of the motorhome. An intermittent tone indicates an obstacle at the maximum distance of the sensors range, and the time interval between tones will reduce as the distance to the obstacle reduces, until a constant tone is heard. Please consider that the distance is measured from the rear bumper of the motorhome – if an accessory such as a cycle rack is added, the driver must take into account the additional clearance required beyond the bumper, when reversing toward an obstacle. If a tow bar is installed, this should include a facility to disable the reverse sensor system when a trailer is connected. A tow bar installation featuring this facility can be installed by your Swift Group dealer. There is a volume control on the buzzer with three settings ON, LOW and OFF. Cycle racks The Swift Group allows the fitment of a two cycle rack carrier and we have made provision for this pre positioned mounting rails fitted to the rear of your motorhome. These are spaced at various heights as shown in the table below. CYCLE RACKS Please be aware a cycle rack can not be fitted onto a model where there is a rear escape window. Contact your dealer for clarification if your van has a rear window. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Not available ✓ 635, 679 744, 714, 724 649, 669, 625 Kon-Tiki Bolero 684 ✓ 424, 462, 484, 496 412, 454, 442, 494 310, 325 Rio Bessacarr All Escape 320, 340 Models Range ✓ 30 Max bike weight (kg) 30 30 ✓ 30 ✓ 19 ✓ 19 50 50 50 50 50 Max load (kg) 50 2+1 2+1 2+1+1 2+1+1 2+1+1 Capacity (# bikes) 2+1+1 307127 307126 306561 306560 309821 Thule reference 309822 Thule Excellent standard version Thule Bike carrier type Thule Excellent short version Thule Elite G2 standard version Thule Elite G2 short version Thule Sport G2 standard version Thule Sport G2 short version Note: Cycle carrying racks are not permitted on the rear opening tailgate of the Rio. cycles should be stored either outside the vechicle or on tow bar mounted carrier. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT The Swift Group only recommends a Thule cycle rack which will conveniently clip in to the pre installed mounting rail. The maxiumum weight which can be mounted on the carrier is 50kg. 207 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T SOLAR PANEL / SEAT SWIVEL / LOCKER / BUNKS Solar panel use Bunk and luton bed safety All Swift Group products have the specific provision for the connection and use of a solar panel, even when the solar panel has not been factory fitted. Each Sargents PSU (fusebox) has a dedicated solar panel connection which allow the 12V feed from a panel to be connect to the leisure batteries. Where the sleeping surface is over one metre above floor level the following notices apply. It should be noted that this connection is only designed for the use of a solar panel and has a maximum rating of 120W. For further details see the services section of this handbook. Seat swivel (Driver/Passenger) ! WARNING: Always ensure safety boards are located before entering the bunk. ! WARNING: Use upper bunks for sleeping only, with the provided protection against fall out in position. ! WARNING: Care shall be taken against the risk of fall out when the upper bunks are being used by children, especially under 6 years of age, these bunks are not suitable for use by infants without supervision. Layouts with an over-cab bed (luton bed), access may be restricted when the lower bed (model specific) is fully extended at night time. To turn the swivel, slide the BLACK lever rearwards and adjust to the required angle. Before driving off ensure the locking mechanism is fully secure. Side lockers Some models are provided with exterior access locker doors. These are suitable for storing external equipment. 208 DROP DOWN BED - When the vehicle is in motion, the bed must be in the stowed (up) position. - When in the stowed position, the only item on top of the bed should be the mattress and bedding. Do not use the area on top of the bed as additional storage. - Before lowering the bed for use, ensure the area below is clear of people and obstructions. • This is especially important in beds over garages. weight of occupants in any other position. - When in the lowered position, the maximum user payload (occupants and bedding plus locker contents is 250kg). - Please ensure the bunk nets are properly fixed in place when using the bed to prevent the possibility of falling from height - To raise the bed back into its stowed position, press the release button and lift it back up. If the bed is difficult to raise, it may be that there is too much weight in the lockers. Remove some items and try again. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Manual Alu-Line bed operation instructions - In order to lower the bed for use, press the release button on the frame and pull the bed down. - Please ensure the bed is fully returned to its ‘up’ position and that the release button has returned to its resting position before travelling. • Watch the bed as it comes down to ensure it remains level and free from obstructions. • Please note - the bed is counter balanced to account for the weight of the mattress, bedding, lockers (where applicable) and locker contents. If the bed lockers are overloaded, this will cause the bed to fall more easily than rise and if they are empty, it may be difficult to pull the bed down. It may be desirable for users to add or remove contents from the lockers as necessary to achieve the required ease of movement. - Ensure the bed is fully lowered before accessing the bed. • The bunk nets and ladder have been designed to work at this height, and the mechanisms of the bed will not support the - Please do not attempt to lubricate the sytem - this may damage the seals on the gas struts which give the counterbalanced action. If the bed remains difficult to operate after adjusting the locker weights as described above then please check for physical obstructions before contacting your dealer for further advice. 209 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T FITTED DROP EQUIPMENT DOWN BED Powered Bed Mechanism (model specific) If fitted to your motorhome, a touch button symbol provides control for a motorised bed mechanism, allowing a bed to be adjusted between either two, or three, differing heights. Two Position Bed Mechanism The bed is operated from a small aluminium panel with a security key and two buttons. One to move the plane of the bed upwards, the other downwards. Once the bed reaches the desired position, turn the key to the OFF position, turning it to the left by 90° and remove it. Note: There are various types of protection. • The key for isolation of operation • Two or three limit switches, one high and the other low. • Mechanical Movement ! WARNING: The bed operating mechanism Insert the key into the lock and turn clockwise by 90 °. Press the top button to lift the bed. The bed moves as long as the button is pressed. Press the bottom button to lower the bed. The bed moves downward as long as the user holds down the button. The lifting-bed system is equipped with two or three limit switches for protection. If for example the user holds the down button for a longer time than that required for the bed to travel its full drop then, a protection device takes over and disables the movement so as not to exit the bed from the guides and also to protect the motor. This protection is replicated for the upward movement. 210 should only be operated by a responsible adult. Take care to ensure that all persons, pets and loose items are clear of the top and underside of the bed before operating the lifting mechanism. Do not operate the lifting mechanism with a person or heavy object on the bed. Always remove the key when the bed lifting mechanism is not in use. Manual Operation The electric motor is fitted on the end with a 13mm hexagonal nut, which allows manual movement of the plane of the bed in case of insufficient voltage of the vehicle leisure battery. The bed mechanism can be operated manually, if power is disabled. Locate the 13mm nut, which is accessible through either the under locker or under bed moulding, via an access hole. Using a 13mm socket, turn the hexagonal nut clockwise or counter clockwise, depending on the desired direction of movement. TABLES Care must be taken to remove obstructions which will restrict the full range of movement of the motorised drop-down bed fitted to Motorhomes. If an object left in the way when the bed is lowered then the bed will not reach it’s pre-set bottom stop position. The motor will continue to run, unwinding the belts until they loop back on themselves and begin to raise the bed despite the ‘lower’ button being depressed If this happens, the remedy to this is to then press the ‘raise’ button, which will effectively re-wind the belts and eventually raise the bed once the slack has been taken up. Tables Note: The free standing table legs have a positive locking mechanism. Care must be taken to ensure that, when folded, the leg which is closed first locks into the second position. When engaging legs in down position the mechanism must be positively locked down. Table storage Tables stored in the table storage compartment must be securely clipped into place whilst in transit. To avoid damage care must be taken when removing tables from their stored position. ! WARNING: Tables infront of forward facing passengers must be stowed in the storage position when the vehicle is moving F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Care points Care of laminate tops, tables, furniture and doors Do not use abrasives, chemically treated cloths or aggressive detergents as these may cause damage Do not place hot objects on laminated surfaces i.e. tops, tables. Any temperatures 70°C and over will cause permanent damage. Clean worktop surfaces, furniture and door fascias with a soft, slightly damp cloth, dry off with a soft cloth. ! WARNING: When erecting the free standing table, be careful to avoid trapping fingers. 211 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TV INLET TV inlet Depending on specification, the motorhome may be fitted with an external co-ax connection in addition to a roof mounted TV aerial. When fitted, the external co-ax connection point will be within the mains inlet enclosure. Co-ax connection point within the mains inlet enclosure, Satellite decoder position within the motorhome. (Kon Tiki and E700) Co-ax connection point within the mains inlet enclosure A short co-ax lead featuring a screw on co-ax connection will be present behind the Blue mains inlet connector. A co-ax cable will be fitted and connected within the motorhome, from the back of this connection, to the primary TV position within the motorhome. At the same time, further co-ax cable or cables will be fitted which route from the TV aerial position (i.e. within the wardrobe) to each of the TV positions within the motorhomes. The primary TV position will feature a socket marked 12v, TV, and SAT. The co-ax from the external connection point will route to the socket output marked SAT, whilst the co-ax from the TV aerial will route to the socket output marked TV. At any secondary TV positions (if present) co-ax from the TV aerial will be fitted, and routed to the socket output marked TV. An external TV aerial or site TV feed can be connected to the external connection point; signals from that connection will then be available at the primary TV position within the motorhome. As the connections are of the screw-on type, it is also possible to use 212 this co-ax to route from an external satellite dish, for instance a tripod mounted dish, to a satellite receiver. A short co-ax lead featuring a screw on co-ax connection will be present behind the Blue mains inlet connector. A co-ax cable will be fitted and connected within the motorhome, from the back of this connection, to the location intended for the later fitment of a satellite decoder or similar receiver. This external connection can be used to link an external dish or signal, to the decoder / receiver position. Upon delivery, the remaining co-ax cables installed in the motor home will be used to distribute the signal from the fitted TV aerial to the TV positions. Depending on the type of decoder / receiver, it is possible that a modulator or similar component may be required, to convert the output from the device (SCART or HDMI) into a signal that can be sent through the same co-ax cable to the TV positions within the motor home. Please ask your dealer or satellite system installer for more details, which are specific to the types of aftermarket equipment fitted. TV ANTENNA F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Status 570 Digital antenna system Travelling Do not travel: • With the antenna raised • With the antenna set for vertical signals To reduce the possibility of damage when travelling, point the antenna backwards. The RED SPOT on the bottom of the mast indicates the front of the Antenna. Operating the system Firstly determine the approximate location of the nearest transmitter and whether the signals are horizontally or vertically polarised. For assistance ask your site operator or check other antennas in the vicinity. 1. Loosen the Mast Locking Collar and raise the antenna. Rotate the mast to direct the TV transmitter. The RED SPOT on the bottom of the mast indicates the front of the antenna. 2. Should you need to receive vertically polarised signals rotate the winder, anticlockwise to cant the antenna through 90°. The red / green indicator in the lower part of the aerial mast indicates whether the aerial is horizontal or vertical. DO NOT use undue force on the winder. 3. Switch ON the amplifier and the LED will illuminate. ! WARNING: The blanking cap is temporary seal and is not recommended for long term use. Technical: Diameter: 122mm (foot) Height raised: 330mm Height lowered: 150mm No Antenna dome: 50mm Mast: 365 mm Amplifier: 115 x 45 x 29mm Frequency Range: UHF 470-862 MHz Antenna Forward Gain: 7db Amplifier Gain - Max: 18db Gain Adjustment - Min: 15db Noise Figure: 2.8db Output Impedence: 75ohms Output: 98 dbuV Power Supply: 12-24 VDC Power Consumption: 55ma 4. Check the gain control is set to maximum. For maximum rotate clockwise. 5. Tune your television into the strongest signal. You may need to adjust the direction of the mast to achieve the best picture quality. 6. Secure by tightening the mast locking collar. Removing the antenna 1. Unplug the antenna lead from the amplifier. 2. Loosen the mast locking collar and lift off whilst feeding out the mast, coaxial cable and plug. 3. Push the blanking cap supplied into place. 213 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T TV ANTENNA Short Hook up - Test 1 This test isolates the wiring from the amplifier through to your TV/Radio points. Unplug the coaxial plugs from the ‘TV’ sockets of the amplifier and using your TV fly lead with convertor 1 supplied. Connect your TV to the amplifier. Fault Finding The following are some of the key areas we suggest you check which generally solve the most common problems encountered with the operation of the Status antenna. Coaxial Connections It is critical that all connections in the system are fitted correctly. Using the diagrams and procedures described over the page, please check all connectors ensuring they are wired correctly. Secondly please ensure only quality plugs have been used. Coaxial Cable Sharp bends, kinks and hot surfaces can easily damage coaxial cable and should be avoided. Coaxial cable, if placed in close proximity to electrical cables, transformers or other pieces of electrical equipment, may pick up electrical interference causing picture quality to deteriorate, especially in poor reception areas. Excess cable should be removed and NOT coiled as this may cause picture distortion. An inspection of the routing of the cable is highly recommended to ensure all is correct. Gain Control In normal use the button should be rotated clockwise for optimum reception. In strong signal areas the amplification may need to be reduced. To reduce amplification rotate the button anti-clockwise until picture quality improves. The button rotates through 270 degrees from MAX to MIN. LED light Should the LED on the amplifier not light, firstly check there is power to the unit. Secondly check the polarity is correct. Otherwise contact your dealer for further assistance. 214 Please ensure the antenna dome is plugged directly into the ‘ANT-IN’ socket of the amplifier and switch on. Tune in your TV for the strongest signal. If the picture quality improves the fault lies with the wiring of the system between the amplifier and the TV outlet socket. Short Hook up - Test 2 This text isolates the amplifier by connecting your TV direct to the antenna. Unplug the antenna from the amplifier and connect convertor 2 supplied to the plug on the cable end. Using your TV Fly lead connect the antenna directly to your TV. Tune in your for the strongest signal. If the picture quality improves, the fault lies with the Vision Plus Amplifier. Antenna Dome Coaxial Cable Check the routing of the coaxial cable from the antenna dome to the amplifier. Check to ensure there are no kinks or trapped cable or if there are loops of surplus cable which could be affecting performance. TV ANTENNA / TV BRACKET / SHOWER Symptom Very poor No picture or sound, TV freezing, severe pixilation, break up and picture drop out Action Check the amplifier gain is set to maximum (rotate clockwise). Check antenna alignment which must be directed at the transmitter. Ensure the antennas polarity is correct, whether horizontal or vertical. Bypass the amplifier by following 'Short Hook-Up Test 1' Poor Moderate pixilation and sound distortion Medium Minor pixilation, will not receive all channels Good Stable picture, good sound quality, will receive all channels N/A Strong Moderate pixilation, picture break up and drop out Reduce the amplifier gain (rotate anti-clockwise). Rotate antenna AWAY from the transmitter. Very Strong No picture or sound, TV freezing, severe pixilation, break up and picture drop out Rotate antenna AWAY from the transmitter. Switch 'OFF' the amplifier and turn the gain control to maximum (rotate clockwise). After performing any of the ‘Actions’ above you must re-tune your TV. Trigger Head shower heads TV Brackets • Squeeze trigger to release water. Release trigger to stop. Twist trigger up to gain permanent water flow, lower to stop. In some models a bulkhead mounted bracket is supplied to mount the TV on. Whilst the bracket has a travel lock it is good practise to unclip the TV from the bracket and store securley for transit. • Orbit shower heads are also provided with a button at the side of the head to allow users to control the flow. Shower • Small children should be surpervised at all times when using the shower. When using the shower, always ensure that the shower door is fully closed thus avoiding water spray on unprotected areas F ITTE D E QUIPME NT Signal • Care should be taken as water may become hot temporarily when switched on until it mixes and regulates. • We recommend unfastening the trigger shower head before travelling and storing safely to prevent it becoming detached whilst travelling. 215 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T EXTERNAL BBQ POINT Motorhomes with external BBQ point Models equipped with an external barbeque point can be used to power any gas appliance suitable for the gas used in the motorhome, at the working pressure shown on the label in the barbeque outlet box. Please note when using the outlet that the fitted regulator will allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the consumption of gas from both the appliances within the motorhome and the appliance connected to the barbeque point cannot exceed a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one time. If you are in any doubt please consult your dealer for advice. To use point proceed as follows. When external gas equipment is being connected, the operating pressure of the gas supply of 30 or 50 mbar must correspond with the operating pressure of the equipment that is being connected (see data plate). The plug-in connection can only be made if the quick-acting valve is closed. The safety locking mechanism can be released by sliding back the coupling sleeve. The coupling K-valve is designed such that the quick-acting valve can only be opened if the connection is being made via the plug-in connection. The connection is made by inserting the plug-in connection into the safety coupling. This operation can be carried out using one hand. After uncoupling the equipment, seal off the valve opening using the protection cap. Note: The external gas socket is only suitable for removing gas, not for feeding gas into the gas system. ! WARNING: Care should be taken when using the external barbeque point. Never barbeque next to an awning or tent. ! WARNING: The caravan barbeque point should only be used as an outlet point for gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to the outlet. 216 EXTERNAL SHOWER POINT / COLOUR REFERENCE Colour reference The colour code for touch ups or resprays for all white Fiat cabs and Swift coach built habitational body components is Fiat White 249. For silver cabs the colour reference is silver metallic 611 and metallic black 632. Some Dealer special cabs may have their own colour specified from the Fiat standard range. For Fiat cabs other than white, contact your Fiat dealer to obtain a colour match. F ITTE D E QUIPME NT External shower point Please be aware that colours can fade over time, and therefore, if the vehicle is more than a few years old, it is suggested a colour match be obtained. The external shower point, if fitted, will be supplied with a separate shower head and hose assembly. To connect the shower, simply align the plug with the socket and push into position. To remove, pull the lower trigger and pull the plug from the socket. 217 FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T FITTED EQUIPMENT 218 MAINTENANCE Motorhome exterior ................................................................................................................ 220 Condensation.......................................................................................................................... 221 Motorhome interior care.......................................................................................................... 223 SwiftShield fabric..................................................................................................................... 224 MA INT E NA NCE Vehicle Modifications & non-standard parts ............................................................................ 220 Hi-Macs® work surface........................................................................................................... 225 Fenix NTM® work surface....................................................................................................... 226 Bulb replacement.................................................................................................................... 229 Winterisation ........................................................................................................................... 230 Chassis & rear axle.................................................................................................................. 233 AL-KO exhaust system............................................................................................................ 233 Caring for the environment ..................................................................................................... 233 219 MA INT E NA N CE MODIFICATIONS Vehicle modifications & non-standard parts As the owner of a Swift Group Product, you are able to make any modifications you wish, either by yourself or through a dealer, without affecting the Swift 3/6 Year Warranty. However, please be aware that any issues, resulting directly or indirectly, from a modification or fitment of a non-standard part, will not be covered by The Swift Group Warranty. WD40 is not recommended for external or internal use WD40 attacks paintwork and sealants. If a lubricant is required for Interior hinges, Sliding door tracks, Exterior door hinges, Plastic tracking etc. We recommend “Ambersil 40+” this is readily available from most DIY/ Automotive spare part retailers Before carrying out any DIY work within the warranty period (3/6) years please check with your Swift Group dealer. Motorhome exterior Plastic Panels (GRP/ABS) These are used for front and rear panels and roof in some cases sheet GRP is also used on side walls. Cleaning For both aluminium panels and plastic panels. 1. Wash the motorhome regularly with mild detergent. Rinse with cold water and leather off. 2. For better protection a similar coloured good quality car wax may be applied. For sealed areas a mild soap is the best way to clean without affecting the sealant. Acid or alkaline based cleaners or solvents should not be used. 220 ! WARNING: Under no circumstances use any abrasive cleaning agents or solvents on the exterior. Do not wash your motorhome with a high pressure washer as these can permanently damage the seals of your motorhome.Care should be taken as the silicon in some polishes can attack the rubber used on the exterior for seals and gaskets. Acrylic Windows Wash windows carefully, as you would with the paintwork of your car, do not scrub windows prior to removing surface dirt and film with a hose pipe - trapped dirt could cause scratching. Wash with a solution of warm soapy water, windows can then be dried off with a leather. Small scratches can be removed, consult your dealer. Catches and stays do not require any special attention or lubrication. Kon-Tiki Polyvision windows It is possible, in weather where extremes in temperatures occur between night and day, that customer will notice condensation between the panes. The same phenomenon may also occur when washing your vehicle on a hot day. The condensation should clear itself when the ambient conditions return to normal and the air between the panes dries. However, if this is taking a longer time than required, the breathable plug (normally located in the top corner of the window) can be removed, with a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the panes are dry. Care should be taken when doing this. Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning The material used to produce most caravan and Motorhome windows is acrylic plastic. While the acrylic used is very durable, it is able to be scratched with relative ease and therefore, care must be taken when clearing your vehicle not to use aggressive clearing products. Equally, care should be taken when using a drying cloth that it is clean and free from grit. CONDENSATION What is condensation Condensation is the process of change of water from its gaseous form (water vapour) into liquid water when it comes into contact with a surface that is cold. Condensation generally occurs when warm air cools quickly and looses its capacity to hold water vapour, and as a result water vapour condenses to form droplets. Why condensation occurs be externally cooled, and to use the heating reasonably by not making the motorhome too warm such that people perspire, as this will only serve to generate more moist air and therefore more condensation. However, in particularly cold periods, where the external ambient temperatures are low, condensation may still form on external walls as the insulation levels may well not be thermally able to cope with the difference between the internal and external temperatures. Condensation occurs when warm moist air meets a cold surface. The level of condensation will depend upon humidity levels, how moist the air is and how cold the surfaces are they come into contact with. How can you prevent condensation If the temperature falls below the dew point temperature, it is quite normal for condensation to occur on any material within the caravan that is cold, for example the external walls, plastic windows etc. a. Good ventilation of the vehicle when cooking or when drying clothes, footwear or pets is essential. Observe when windows begin to show signs of misting and increase ventilation by opening slightly by 1cm or opening a roof vent, as these will help, but keep the habitation door closed as much as possible to retain heat. When condensation occurs Condensation occurs usually in winter months, because ambient temperatures are colder (leading to cold surfaces) and windows and roof vents are opened less so the moist air cannot escape. Where condensation occurs Condensation will occur where warm moist air is put into the atmosphere in areas such as in bathrooms (during showering) and in kitchen areas (during cooking). In the enclosed space of a motorhome, the moist air from the kitchen or bathroom areas will inevitably transfer to the rest of the vehicle, which in turn condenses on cold surfaces leading to visible water droplets. This issue is compounded by warm moist air being generated from normal breathing. Condensation will also form in cold areas where air movement and ventilation is restricted (e.g. cupuboards, wardrobes, under beds, etc.) What is important It is important to provide ventilation and air flow, so that warm moist air can escape, or MA INT E NA NCE Condensation Provide ventilation so that moist air can escape. b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a window to ventilate the area and allow the moist air to escape. c. Try to make sure that the caravan is partially heated. It can take a long time for a cold caravan to warm up, so it is better to have a small amount of heat for a long period then a lot of heat for a short time. d. After showering, keep the bathroom window or skylights open, and shut the bathroom door long enough to dry off the room. e. Fixed ventilation is provided in the vehicle, specifically through the floor, it is important not to block these. f.Electrical heating is dryer than gas heating, and introduces less moisture into the atmosphere. Do not use additional portable paraffin or flue-less gas heaters at all. g. If left unoccupied and unheated for long periods of time the temperatures can soak down thermally into the entire product and become very cold. Whenever possible, put 221 MA INT E NA N CE CONDENSATION the heating on at a low level before use by pre heating in cold weather. h. Even with reasonable ventilation it is likely if the temperature is less than 5oC and the humidity is high that condensation will occur. Ideally the temperature should be kept about 20oC when occupied. Mould Growth Any sign of mould growth is an indication of the presence of moisture and if caused by condensation gives warning that heating or ventilation may require improving. New vehicles New products take a long time before they are fully 'dried out' because of the moisture in the materials used during manufacture. While this is happening extra heat and ventilation will be required. How can you prevent condensation Provide ventilation so that moist air can escape. a. G ood ventilation of kitchens when washing, cooking or drying damp clothes is essential. Open the skylights or windows slightly, but keep the door closed as much as possible. b. After showering, keep the bathroom window or skylights open, and shut the bathroom door long enough to dry off the room. c. In all other areas provide some ventilation. Fixed ventilation is provided in accordance with BS EN 721: 1998 this is through skylights and ‘Heki roof lights’ in the roofs and from ventilators through the floor under cookers, doors and in bed boxes it is important not to block these. Too much ventilation in cold weather is uncomfortable and wastes heat. All that is needed is a very slightly opened window or skylights. Opening a skylight or ‘Heki; rooflights partially or windows opened to about 1cm will usually be sufficient. 222 Provide reasonable heating a. Do not use portable paraffin or flueless gas heaters at all. b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a window enough to ventilate the area and turn on the electric element of the space heater but do not hang items over the heater. c. Try to make sure that all areas are at least partially heated. Condensation most often occurs in unheated areas. d. To prevent condensation, the heat has to keep room surfaces reasonably warm. It can take a long time for a cold motorhome to warm up, so it is better to have a small amount of heat for a long period than a lot of heat for a short time. Motorhomes use only carefully selected insulation materials but unlike most rooms at home all walls are exterior walls, so they lose heat through all walls as well as the roof and floor. Even in a well insulated motorhome with reasonable ventilation, it is likely that during cold weather (less than 10 deg C) condensation will occur. Ideally the temperature should be kept about 20°C although this is not always possible. MOTORHOME INTERIOR Leather care Your motorhome has been designed and built using the corrosion resistant materials (e.g. GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic) panels, stainless steel fixings, hot dip galvanised chassis and powder coated extrusions), which if looked after will extend the life and aesthetics of the product in normal service. In certain conditions, for example, if sited for extended periods in close proximity to sea and sand spray, you may experience premature ageing and/or corrosion of the vehicle than under normal conditions. Leather furniture, in a normal contract and domestic environment, requires little maintenance, although obviously leather in lighter shades will need more attention. To help prevent this, we advise regular cleaning and application of a good quality external car polish. For extended periods (where the vehicle is not in use), we recommend the use of well fitted breathable vehicle cover as protection from harsh coastal elements. Changing Exterior Bulbs Always replace like for like. For individual replacement bulb specification, refer to your Service Handbook. Motorhome interior Follow these guidelines to ensure your investment is receiving the very best attention. Regular care of leather does ensure its lasting quality and some general rules for regular cleaning and maintenance are: MA INT E NA NCE Corrosion • Clean the leather with a soft damp cloth taking care not to soak the leather. • For a more thorough clean, use the Bridge of Weir Leather Cleaning and Protection kite available directly from the distribution centre. • Do not use saddle soap, wax polishes or spray polishes. • Do not use any product or any method of cleaning not recommended by the manufacturer. • Avoid letting any buckles, studs and zips come into direct contact with the furniture. • Avoid drying out the leather by taking extra care where there is heating or an open fireplace. Note: The above cleaning instructions DO NOT apply to Nubuck Suede or any other uncoated leather. Side Walls, Roof Lining A simple wipe over with a damp cloth and a very mild detergent is all that is needed. Soft Furnishings Should be vacuumed occasionally to remove grit and sand and help to keep its smart appearance over the lifetime of the upholstery. The upholstery can be cleaned with a mild, reputable upholstery cleaner. It is recommended that the curtains and pelmets are specialist cleaned only. The foam used in cushions is manufactured to meet fire regulations. It requires time to return to its normal position after prolonged use. 223 MA INT E NA N CE SWIFT SHIELD FABRIC Swift Shield Fabric (model specific) The Swift Shield fabric fitted to some Swift Group products is a luxury stain resistant durable fabric using Aquaclean® technology. This is a revolutionary fabric treatment that allows you to clean stains using water only. This provides you with simple fabric maintenance in the minimum amount of time. Cleaning Instructions Aquaclean® helps to remove the majority of household stains (wine, ink, sauce, fat, mud, chocolate, cream, etc.) in three simple steps: 1. R emove any excess residue on the upholstery 2. A pply water over the stain, either directly or using a damp cloth. Wait a few seconds. 3. Press down over the stain with a damp cloth and rub gently over the fabric in circular movements. If the stain does not come off completely, repeat the process as required. For further details and stain cleaning demo videos visit the Cleaning Gallery on the Aquaclean® web site: http://www.aquaclean. com/ES_en/home. Aquaclean fabrics cannot accept any responsibility for misuse of the fabric by allowing bleach or dissolvent substances coming into contact with it. 224 HI-MACS® WORK SURFACE Consumer Cleaning, Care & Repair HI-MACS® solid surfaces are stain resistant, easy to clean and hygienic, ideal for kitchen countertops, vanity tops, and other surfaces subject to the hazards of moisture and heavy wear. Even the most used areas won't succumb to coffee, ink, or other stains. No special cleaning products are needed to keep HI-MACS® looking beautiful day in and day out. While HI-MACS® is extremely tough and durable, like any other fine material it can be damaged if abused or mistreated. Reviewing this care and cleaning instructions can assist you in understanding how easy it is to care for your new HI-MACS® surface and how you can prevent more severe damage that may require special repairs. A trivet should always be used under heated appliances, such as crock pots, electric frying pans, etc. Although minor cuts and scratches in HIMACS® can be repaired, deep cuts will require the services of professional Strong acids such as those found in drain, toilet bowl, and oven cleaners should be used cautiously around HI-MACS®. If these items are accidentally spilled, wipe them up at once. Some of these items, when left on the surface, may cause whitening, which can be difficult to remove. Spills and Stains While most everyday spills can be removed with the cleaning techniques listed, some troublesome spills and stains such as food dye, tea, and fruit drinks may require more aggressive cleaning. These items can be removed with full strength bleach followed by a general cleanser. With a little knowledge, you can enjoy the elegance and beauty of HI-MACS® for years to come. Bleach should only come in contact with the surface for two to five minutes. On a matte finish, if you prefer, you can scrub with an abrasive cleaner. Even nail polish can be removed from HI-MACS® with nail polish remover or an abrasive cleanser. Normal Cleaning Cigarettes HI-MACS® is non-porous, so it can be wiped clean with a damp cloth or sponge and mild detergents or general purpose cleaners such as Mr. Clean. If you have a matte finish, abrasive cleaners like Ajax or comet may also be used. Periodically it may also be helpful to go over the entire surface in a circular motion with an abrasive cleaner or wet Scotch Brite pad to maintain a uniform appearance. Care Do not place hot pans directly from the burner or oven on the HI-MACS® surface. MA INT E NA NCE Kon-Tiki Kitchen Work Tops Corian Solid Surface Worktop Maintenance While HI-MACS® will not burn, should a lighted cigarette accidentally come in contact with the surface, it could leave a nicotine stain or scorch mark. Either of these can be removed by cleaning with an abrasive cleanser or buffing in a circular motion with a Scotch Brite pad. Repairing Scratches For removing superficial scratches, rub in a circular motion with a wet # 7448 Scotch Brite buffing pad until the scratches are removed. Clean thoroughly with soap and water and let dry. Even though HI-MACS® can withstand sustained temperatures up to 225 °F, prolonged or extreme heat could cause yellowing. 225 MA INT E NA N CE WORKTOPS Note: Deep scratches can be removed by carefully sanding lightly with 120 grit sandpaper followed by 220 and 320 grit sandpaper. Then rub the surface with a wet # 7448 Scotch Brite pad in a circular motion to restore the finish. For added protection, or if any additional luster is desired, after the surface is dry, apply a non-wax polish cleaner or other recommended surface dressing and wipe with a clean, dry cloth. Wipe dry using another cloth. Bolero worktops (FENIX NTM)® Ordinary maintenance FENIX NTM surface should be cleaned regularly but does not require any special maintenance, just a damp cloth with warm water or mild detergents. Almost all normal household cleaning products or disinfectants are perfectly well tolerated. It is suggested to use a melamine foam sponge - also known as magic sponge - for the normal cleaning and maintenance of the surface. Extraordinary maintenance In case of dirt which cannot be cleaned with normal household detergents, due to the irregular topography and closed surface of FENIX NTM, the use of non-aggressive aromatic solvents (acetone) is suggested. In case of micro scratches, please refer to the specific surface thermal healing instructions. Recommendations for cleaning the surface of FENIX NTM The table below shows the cleaning products and methods best suited to different types of dirt. 226 Type of dirt Recommended cleaning products and met Syrup, fruit juice, Water with a sponge jam, spirits, milk, tea, coffee, wine, soap and ink Animal and vegetable fats, sauces, dry blood, dry wine and spirits, eggs Cold water with soap or household detergent with a sponge Smoke, gelatine, vegetable and vinyl based glues, organic waste, gum arabic Hot water with soap or household detergent with a sponge Hair spray, vegetable oil, biro and felt tip, pens, wax foundations and greasy make-up, residual solvent marks MEK, alcohol, acetone with a cotton cloth Nail polish, spray lacquer, linseed oil Acetone with a cotton cloth Synthetic oil paints Trilene nitre based solvent with a cotton cloth Neoprene glues Trichloroethane with a cotton cloth Traces of silicone Wooden or plastic scraper, taking care not to scratch the surface Lime deposits Detergents containing low percentages of citric or acetic acid (10% max.) For best results in cleaning FENIX NTM, it is important to remember certain precautions: - although very durable, the surface of FENIX NTM must still never be treated with products containing abrasive substances, abrasive sponges or unsuitable products, such as sandpaper or steel wool; Maintenance Instructions Iron MA INT E NA NCE General precautions - products with a high acid or very alkaline content should be avoided because they can stain the surface; - when using solvents, the cloth used must be perfectly clean so as not to leave marks on the FENIX NTM surface. Any streaks can still be removed by rinsing with hot water and drying; - avoid furniture polishes and wax based cleaners in general, because they tend to form a sticky layer on the dense FENIX NTM surface, to which the dirt adheres. Maintenance Instructions Melamine foam Sponge 227 MA INT E NA N CE WORKTOPS AND SINK BOWLS Stainless Steel Bowl Care Instructions Work Surfaces After use always remove any plastic bowl or mat, rinse down the surface and dry with a soft cloth to prevent spotting. For more stubborn dirt or grease a non-abrasive multi-purpose cream cleaner, such as CIF, may be used. To preserve the appearance of your appliance we recommend plastic bowls or mats are not stored in the sink during transit. You should not stand very hot items on any of the work surfaces, especially models with polycarbonate moulded sinks and drainers. The quality of water can affect your bowl's appearance. If the water has high iron content, a brown surface stain can form on the bowl giving the appearance of rust. Additionally, in areas with a high concentration of minerals, or with over-softened water, a white film may develop on the sink. To combat these problems, towel dry the sink after use, and clean at least once every week . Surface scratching will be most noticeable on highly polished components. These marks are usually only superficial and can be removed with a proprietary stainless steel cleaner/polish. If the surface has a directional polished grain always clean along the grain and NOT across. Never use wire wool pads to clean the surface. Cleaning agents containing bleach should NOT be left in contact with stainless steel. This includes many of the new “trigger-dispense” products and some multi purpose cream cleaners. Also leaving rubber mats or dishpans in the sink can lead to surface rust or pitting, always remove them after use. 228 Cupboard Catches It is advisable to lubricate all cupboard catches, sliding bolts and hinges from time to time. We recommend “Ambersil 40+” this is readily available from most DIY/ Automotive spare part retailers Kitchen Equipment All the thermoplastic parts in these areas have easy clean surfaces. To ensure long life and to prevent damage you must not use any cleaning materials at all and ensure water temperatures do not exceed 70ºC (putting cold water in first is suggested). After every use it is essential that you rinse with clean water only and wipe with a soft damp cloth. Failure to follow these simple instructions may result in premature failure or cracking which will not be covered by any guarantees (including extended warranties). SHOWER / FURNITURE / BULB REPLACEMENT Bulb Replacement and Type These products should be cleaned immediately after use. Apply a warm, mild soapy water solution with a soft cloth and rinse with clean water immediately. Abrasive materials must never be used. For stubborn stains “Thetford Bathroom Cleaner” is recommended as the use of other cleaners may harm these products, cause premature failure and will invalidate the warranty. “Thetford Bathroom Cleaner is available from most motorhome/caravan dealer shops. Full details of the bulbs used with your Swift Group product can be found in your Technical Handbook. Details of how to change the various bulbs can be found within our Practical Guides, located on Swift Talk (http://www.swift-talk.co.uk/forum/topics/ swift-grouppractical-manuals)/ Washroom bi-fold doors • Panels should be cleaned with warm soapy water and a non-abrasive cloth/sponge. • An abrasive or aggressive cleaning agent is never to be used MA INT E NA NCE Bathroom/Shower In many applications LED lights are fitted which contain no user serviceable parts. In the unlikely event of failure of one of these lamps, the entire lamp will need to be replaced – several types of LED light are intended for semi-permanent installations using self adhesive mounts etc, and dealer assistance may be required should damage or other need for replacement occur. • A proprietary plastic Vuplex®, can also be used. This can be obtained from outlets such as Amazon, ebay etc. Furniture A simple wipe over with a damp cloth should be all that is required. Polishing with a proprietary brand of wax polish enhances and maintains furniture in showroom condition. It must be remembered that because the frames of the doors are made of ash, which is a natural product, they can be affected by temperature and humidity and may bow under certain conditions. As conditions change they should revert to their original positions. Kitchen Drainer and Cutting Board You should not stand hot items on to the removable plastic kitchen drainer. To wash use only warm soapy water, do not use chemicals and bleach. Changing interior bulbs The majority of interior lights are LED, and in the unlikely event of a failure, the replacement of the whole unit is required. It is not possible to replace the "bulb" on these units. For non LED lights remove the lens or lampshade to access the bulb. Always replace like for like 229 MA INT E NA N CE WINTERISATION Winterisation The Swift Group recommends the following winterisation points for customers: from the pump. See Fig.1 Run the pump for a short while to expel any remaining water within the pump. Servicing Pull pipe out Arrange (in advance) the yearly service and habitation check, if the motorhome's next service is due while the vehicle is stored. Plumbing Water expands as it is frozen, and so trapped water, when it expands, can damage the tap / valve /pump or pipe it is trapped within. For this reason, (in addition to reasons of hygiene), the water system should be fully drained when not in use, particularly in colder weather. • Depending on model, open the fresh water tank drain valve to drain the tank, and leave open or remove the tank drain bung inside the tank, and leave open Water filter Pull quick release tabs Fig.1 |This is a good time to de-assemble and clean the pump filter. Squeeze either side of the filter housing to release the retaining tabs and pull the filter cassette out of the housing. See Fig 2 Pull out filter • Open the drain valve (yellow handle) next to water heater, and leave open. • Fully open all the taps and shower mixer, move mixer position to the middle, and leave all taps in the open position. • Unscrew the shower head and shower hose, shake out remaining water and allow water to drain. It is advised to leave the shower head and hose disconnected. • Run pump for a short time, until all water is expelled. • After a short while the majority of water will have left the plumbing system. At this point however it is still important to ensure that the pump itself is 'dry'. During this part of the winterisation, a suitable absorbent cloth or container should be used to catch a small amount of spilled water that will result. 230 Disconnect the pipe work from the pump by pulling the blue quick release tabs, at either side of the pump, at right angles to the pipe work, then pulling the pipe and connectors Squeeze either side of filter housing Fig.2 • Fit the cowl cover to the Truma Ultrastore, model specific. • Open the waste tank drain valve, collecting the waste water in a suitable container, and leave open. Dispose of the waste water in a designated waste water area, clean waste pipes and tanks using a sterilising fluid. See "Waste Tank" section under services Page 55. If vehicle is being stored while connected to 230v Mains Hook-up: • Ensure that the leisure battery is connected and the 20A local fuse(s) is connected. • The isolator switch on PSU should be in the 'ON' position, however. the control panel should be switched 'OFF'. • If Alde system is installed, there is a frost protection setting, which can be used. See Alde user instruction manual. • Vehicles can be left in this condition for extended periods, with the charger operating to maintain the battery. However, periodic maintenance and inspection is recommended, this should include the battery condition. ! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent) which monitors battery voltage. If you plan to disconnect or remove your leisure battery for maintenance or external charging, then please contact the monitoring station before you remove or disconnect the battery. If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also contact the Tracker monitoring station before removing the mains hook up. The Swift Command Tracker monitoring station can be contacted on 0345 6027302. Gas system • Ensure the gas supply is isolated at the gas bottle, and ensure that the gas manifold taps are off. If vehicle is being stored not connected to 230v Mains Hook-up: • Check the age and condition of the high pressure gas hose and regulator, and replace if required. • Charge the leisure battery for 24 hours prior to placing motorhome in storage. Appliances • Ensure the isolation button on PSU is in the 'OFF' position. • Disconnect the negative terminal of the leisure battery or baterries. • The battery should not be adversely affected by winter temperatures but the level of charge should be maintained to maximise the life span of the battery. This can be achieved using an automotive type battery charger as and when required. • Disconnect the vehicle battery negative terminal. Check the charge of the battery every three months. (See Vehicle Inactivity section in the Fiat handbook). Alternatively put the ignition into the 'Isolation Mode' MA INT E NA NCE Electrical Check the battery expiry date on the smoke alarm and CO detector and replace or remove as required. • Ensure the fridge is turned off. • Clean the inside of the fridge. •Prop the fridge door open, and if possible, the internal freezer compartment door for ventilation. • Fit fridge vent winter covers (if available). • Ensure all hob / oven / microwave surfaces are clean. • If the motorhome is going to be left connected to 230v supply while not in use, ensure the microwave is unplugged. • Clean the toilet and empty the cassette and lubricate the seals with an acid free lubricant such as Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant. See Thetford toilet Users manual Exterior (Body / Chassis) • Ensure that all windows, skylights and access doors are closed and secured. • Ensure all fixed ventilation points (high and low) are clear from debris and obstructions. 231 MA INT E NA N CE WINTERISATION • Ensure the vehicle is not parked where falling debris (i.e. leaves, tree sap) could cause damage. • Avoid leaving the vehicle parked in soft ground, long grass or a potential area where standing water may form. • Lubricate relevant points on the chassis. Wheels and Tyres • Do not store in one position with partially deflated tyres. The tyre walls will suffer and do present a real danger of blow outs, especially when travelling at faster speeds than are allowed in the UK. The wheels should be turned every couple of weeks. If you are removing the wheels, follow the jacking procedure for changing a wheel. Check your tyres regularly for signs of age and deterioration, particularly wear, cracking and blistering. If in doubt consult a reputable tyre fitter. • A purpose made cover maybe used, but please ensure the cover is a good fit, breathable and securely fitted. Note: A poorly fitted cover can rub and damage the bodywork. Non-breathable covers will encourage mould to grow. Re-connect the water pump by positioning the pipe connectors into the pump housing and pushing the blue tabs into position. It is advisable, after a period on non-use, to flush the water system with a sterilising fluid such as Milton 2. Fill the fresh water tank with water and sterilising fluid (Refer to sterilising fluid instructions for the amount to use). Turn the pump on and open all the taps, ensuring that the water drains away safely to the waste tank. When the waste tank is full empty the fluid into a designated waste water area. Re-fill the tank with fresh water and flush through the system as described above; repeat this until all traces of the sterilising fluid have been flushed out. (See "priming the Water System" and "Waste Tank" sections on page 53/55) Prepare the toilet system by adding water and Thetford fluid to the toilet waste tank. See "Preparing the Thetford Cassette Toilet for Use" on page 183. Appliances Before starting motor caravanning after storage, check all gas appliances and electrical points. Note: Preferably not less than once a year, the electrical installation should be inspected and tested by a qualified electrician. Interior (Furniture / furnishings) • Open all lockers and internal doors, to ensure good circulation. • Remove cushions and store them in a dry location or ensure all cushions are placed in a well ventilated area. • Close all blinds and curtains. Customers are reminded to check the tension on blinds after storage if left closed for long periods. • Thoroughly ventilate the motorhome by opening doors or windows periodically. • Placing water absorbent crystals in the van during the winter months, will help reduce moisture levels and mould growth. • We do not recommend leaving portable heaters in the van unattended. Recomissioning the water system 232 After storage it is advisable to air the Motorhome and clean throughout, especially cooking appliances and the refrigerator. Replace the bedding if they were removed for storage. ! WARNING: Always follow the manufacturers recommended procedures after use of fitted equipment in the Motorhome, before storing for any length of time. CHASSIS / EXHAUST SYSTEM / ENVIRONMENT Some models are built on a Fiat base vehicle, the chassis of which has been converted by AL-KO. This conversion provides a hot dipped galvanised steel chassis coupled with a wide track rear axle utilising steel torsion bar suspension, imparting vastly improved stability and road holding. MA INT E NA NCE Chassis and rear axle AL-KO exhaust system A standard Fiat exhaust system is fitted, utilising an AL-KO modified tail pipe, available through your approved dealer. A standard Fiat exhaust system is fitted to all other models, with the addition of a Swift Group tail pipe. Caring for the environment After many years of service you may decide that your motorhome has become beyond economic repair and should be disposed of. Please ensure that you comply with the end of life vehicle legislation and take it to an authorised treatment facility where it will be properly dealt with to minimise any negative environmental impact. The transaction will be logged at the DVLA, identifying that you are no longer the owner of the vehicle. 233 MA INT E NA N CE MAINTENANCE 234 FAULT FINDING Gas ........................................................................................................................................ 238 Cassette Toilet ........................................................................................................................ 239 FA ULT F INDING Water ..................................................................................................................................... 236 235 FA ULT F IND IN G WATER FAULTS Water Fault Cause Remedy Water not flowing from any tap when operated but pump runs Freshwater tank empty Check Pump wired in reverse Check wiring, refer to pump manufacturers instructions Pump not primed Refer to pump manufacturers instructions Pipe inlet or outlet pipe disconnected Check connections Pump pipes restricted by kinking Check pipes run Blockage in pump inlet or outlet pipe Check, starting inside freshwater tank Blocked in-line filter of pump filter Dismantle and clean Air leak in suction line to pump Check for bubbles & secure with clip Pump or tap incorrectly wired Refer to pump/tap manufacturers instructions Pump fuse blown Check wiring connection and then replace with fuse of correct rating Battery disconnected Check connections Pump seized or overheated Refer to pump manufacturers servicing instructions Pressure pump sensing switch may have failed Refer to pump manufacturers servicing instructions Contacts may be faulty Check contacts in plug and socket are clean and making contact Wiring connections may be faulty Check wiring connections Feed pipe to water heater incorrectly connected to the heater outlet Refer to installation instructions Blockage in hot pipeline Disconnect pipes and inspect Heater inlet or outlet pipes kinked preventing flow Check and re-route if necessary. Ensure that hose is Carver recommended type Hot tap not connected Refer to installation manual Hot tap failed or blocked Disconnect and inspect Heater non-return valve jammed Seek service attention Pump does not run Water flows from cold tap but not from hot 236 WATER FAULTS Fault Cause Remedy Water flows from hot tap but has reduced flow from cold Cold water pipe kinked preventing flow Check and re-route if necessary Blockage in cold pipe line Disconnect pipes after 1st Y connector and check up to tap Cold tap not connected Refer to installation instructions Cold tap failed or blocked Disconnect and inspect If a water filter is fitted, the cartridge is exhausted Replace cartridge Battery condition low causing pump to run slowly Check battery state of charge, refer to electrical supply note If new taps have been fitted they may be restricting flow Disconnect and check that they have at least 1/4” (6.3mm) bore Pump needs servicing Refer to pump servicing instructions Partially blocked pump filter or in-line filter, if fitted Dismantle and clean if necessary Pump outlet pipe kinked restricting flow Check and re-route if necessary Water leak Check all water connections Y’ connector(s) fitted incorrectly Refer to installation instructions Pipe kinking restricting flow Check and re-route if necessary Bore size difference in taps Use taps of equal bore size Battery voltage may be too low (below 10.5 volts) Check that there is water in the container Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery Check all connections in pipework Reduced flow from both hot and cold taps Reduced flow from either tap If pump motor runs steadily and will not stop FA ULT F INDING Water 237 FA ULT F IND IN G GAS FAULTS Gas Fault Cause Remedy Hob does not light No gas Check level of gas in bottle Check gas bottle valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to hob manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in bottle Check gas bottle valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to oven manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in bottle Check gas bottle valve is on Check gas taps are on Check exhaust outlet is clear Over gassed Air in pipe Turn off appliance, wait 2 minutes and try again Purge system Refer to space heater or boiler manufacturers instructions No gas Check level of gas in bottle Check gas bottle valve is on Check gas taps are on Air in pipe Purge system Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions Oven does not light Combi Boiler Fridge does not light 238 CASSETTE TOILET FAULTS Fault Remedy Bowl does not drain when toilet is flushed. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl. Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal removal and emptying procedure. Cassette is overfilled Odours Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle. Toilet tissue does not fit into compartment. Since some tissues are supplied on larger rolls, it may be necessary to use some tissue before storing into compartment. Soiled bowl after flushing Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste. Tip: Leave valve blade open during use. No power to add water to toilet bowl Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement and operation. Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse. Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl. Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise to close valve blade. Cassette cannot be removed Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise. FA ULT F INDING Cassette toilet CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the cassette tank. Valve blade mechanism sticks or is hard to open Spray light film of silicone on blade. Major unit malfunction Contact your original Motorhome Dealer. 239 240 USEFUL INFORMATION Spares and after sales Supercare .......................................................................................... 242 Repair facilities ....................................................................................................................... 242 Caravan Clubs ....................................................................................................................... 243 Motoring Associations ........................................................................................................... 243 Trade Association .................................................................................................................. 243 Change of ownership ............................................................................................................ 244 Index ..................................................................................................................................... 248 USE F UL INF ORMAT ION Owners Club ......................................................................................................................... 242 241 US E FUL INF ORMATIO N USEFUL INFORMATION Owners club The Owners Club is a completely independent organisation run for the benefit of the motorhome owners. They have numerous rallies during the year in various parts of the country. Apart from the friendliness and companionship the Club generates it is also actively engaged in charity work for those less fortunate than ourselves. The address of the Secretary of the Owners Club can be obtained from the Swift Group website. Spares and after sales customer service A catalogue of spare parts are available through our Swift Group Dealer Network, from door catches through to spare wheels. Please note, all parts enquiries must be directed through your dealer, as the Swift Group does not operate a direct retail service. We endeavour to supply parts for vehicles up to 8 years old. If the original part is no longer available your dealer should be able to source a suitable alternative. Note: Please remember to quote chassis VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) when ordering any items from your dealer. This can be found at the bottom of the front windscreen, on the plate on the front cross member within the engine compartment and on the Swift manufacturers plate situated on the bulkhead directly behind the front driver/ passenger seat. Repair facilities Should you be unfortunate to encounter damage to your vehicle, we have a number of approved workshops and dealerships with workshop facilities to undertake such repairs. Details of which can be found via our website: www.swiftgroup.co.uk/find-a-dealer 242 CLUBS AND TRADE BODIES Caravan Clubs The Caravan Club, East Grinstead House, East Grinstead West Sussex, RH19 IUA Tel: 01342 326944 www.caravanclub.co.uk The Camping and Caravanning Club, Greenfields House, Westwood Way, Coventry, West Midlands. Tel: 0845 130 7631 or 024 7647 5448 www.campingandcaravanningclub.co.uk The Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders Limited (SMT) Forbes House, Halkin Street, London SW1X 7DS Tel: 020 7235 7000 www.smmt.co.uk Green Flag Tel: 0845 246 1557 www.greenflag.com USE F UL INF ORMAT ION The enjoyment of motorhoming can be greatly enhanced by membership of one or more of the various motorhome/caravanning, motoring and holiday clubs. Here are some useful addresses: RBS Insurance Churchill Court Westmoreland Road Bromley Kent BR1 1DP 0800 158 2493 Trade Association Motoring Associations NCC Catherine House, Victoria Road, Aldershot, Hampshire, GU11 1SS Automobile Association (AA) Fanum House, Basingstoke, Hants. RG1 2EA Tel: 01252 318251 www.thencc.org.uk www.motorhomeinfo.co.uk e-mail: [email protected] Tel: 08705 448866 www.theaa.co.uk e-mail: [email protected] RAC Motoring Services RAC Motoring Services 8 Surrey St Norwich Norfolk NR1 3NG Tel: 01922 437000 www.rac.co.uk © 2016 SWIFT GROUP LTD 243 US E FUL INF ORMATIO N Change of ownership Notification of change of ownership As the new second hand owner, please notify the Swift Group of the change of ownership by completing this page and sending it to: Customer Services Swift Group Limited, Dunswell Road, Cottingham, East Yorkshire HU16 4JX. Note: Warranties are only transferable providing the terms and conditions of the warranty have been met by the previous owner(s). Please see warranty information at the beginning of this handbook for full details. The 'Extended Body shell warranty' is a non-transferable warranty 244 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP Model: Chassis No: New owner: Name: Address: USE F UL INF ORMAT ION Details of motorhome: Email: Telephone: Mobile: Date of purchase: Previous owner: Name: Address: Email: Telephone: Mobile: Date of purchase: 245 246 US E FUL INF ORMATIO N USE F UL INF ORMAT ION 247 IND E X INDEX 248 Symbols Code of conduct...................................... 16 230V mains electrical equipment power consumption............................................ 68 Colour reference..................................... 217 A Connecting cable wiring........................... 69 Accessory harnessing............................... 95 Country code........................................... 18 Acrylic windows...................................... 220 Cruise control........................................... 28 Airbag....................................................... 24 Cycle racks............................................. 206 Alde 3020 control panel.......................... 123 D ALDE boiler troubleshooting................... 141 Dometic absorption refrigerator.............. 142 Alde Compact 3020............................... 134 Dometic C600 oven................................ 169 Alde heat exchanger............................... 133 Dometic refrigerator operating controls... 152 Alde heating troubleshooting.................. 131 Dometic refrigerator troubleshooting....... 160 AL-KO exhaust system........................... 233 Driving...................................................... 17 Assistance.................................................. 9 Driving licence.......................................... 24 Awning................................................... 202 Drop down bed...................................... 209 Awnings and Tents................................... 48 E B Electrical overseas connection.................. 67 Bathroom/shower care........................... 229 Electrical system....................................... 67 Blown air outlets..................................... 122 Electrics fault finding................................. 97 Bulb Replacement.................................. 229 En-route heating....................................... 63 Bunk and luton bed safety...................... 208 Environment............................................. 18 C Escape paths........................................... 36 Cab radio............................................... 100 European touring...................................... 26 Caravan clubs........................................ 243 External 12v fill socket.............................. 52 Caravan exterior..................................... 220 External barbeque point............................ 61 Carbon monoxide..................................... 39 External BBQ point................................. 216 Cassette toilet faults............................... 239 External shower point............................. 217 Central Locking........................................ 20 Extractor hood........................................ 181 Change of ownership......................... 9, 244 F Chassis and rear axle............................. 233 Fault finding............................................ 235 Children.................................................... 36 FENIX NTM work surface........................ 226 Child seats............................................... 23 Fire........................................................... 34 Cleaning water system............................. 53 Fire extinguisher....................................... 36 CO alarm.................................................. 39 Fix & Go Repair Kit................................... 30 Coastal code............................................ 18 Fresh water system.................................. 51 Condensation......................................... 221 Positioning................................................ 48 Gas.......................................................... 61 Pressure switch........................................ 55 Gas bottles............................................... 61 Pressure switch adjustment...................... 55 Gas cylinder changing.............................. 63 Pressure switch troubleshooting............... 56 Gas cylinder compartment........................ 62 Priming the water system......................... 53 Gas faults......................................... 66, 238 R Gas safety advice..................................... 64 Repair facilities........................................ 242 Gas schematic................................... 60, 62 Reverse camera system......................... 206 Gas types................................................. 62 Reverse sensor system........................... 206 Generator usage....................................... 96 Roof light blind and flyscreen.................. 199 H Roof lights.............................................. 198 Habitation relay......................................... 96 Roof loading............................................. 22 Heki midi rooflight................................... 200 S Heki mini rooflight................................... 198 Seat belts........................................... 23, 24 HI-MACS work surface........................... 225 Seat swivel............................................. 208 K Security.................................................... 37 Kitchen care........................................... 228 Service inspection.................................... 11 L Shower................................................... 215 Large storage areas.................................. 22 Levelling the motorhome.......................... 48 Loading of vehicle..................................... 21 M IN D E X G Side lockers............................................ 208 Skyview operating instructions................ 197 Smoke alarm............................................ 34 Solar panel connection point.................... 94 Solar panel use....................................... 208 Microwave oven..................................... 179 Spares and after sales customer care..... 242 Modifications.......................................... 220 Spare wheel on ALKO conversion............ 28 Motorhome battery................................... 92 Spare wheel removal Fiat chassis............. 29 Motorhome interior................................. 223 Supplier contacts..................................... 10 Motorhome terms..................................... 20 Swift Command power control system..... 72 Motoring associations............................. 243 Swift Command remote access & control. 89 Moving off................................................ 20 Swift Command technical information....... 77 O Swift Command Tracker by Sargent......... 37 Omnistep single step.............................. 202 Swift Connect Direct................................... 9 Owners club........................................... 242 SwiftShield fabric.................................... 224 P Swift Talk.................................................... 2 Parking..................................................... 17 Passenger seating.................................... 23 249 IND E X INDEX T W Tables.................................................... 211 Warranty..................................................... 6 Tank heaters............................................ 52 Waste water system................................. 55 Thermal insulation heating........................ 65 Water faults...................................... 58, 236 Thetford C260CS & C260S cassette toilet......................................... 182 Water level sensor & cleaning................... 57 Thetford C260CS & C260S cassette toilet fault finding...................... 186 Thetford C400 cassette toilet.................. 187 Thetford C400 cassette toilet fault finding. 193 Thetford cookers.................................... 164 Tow bar connection.................................. 95 Towing..................................................... 25 Trade association................................... 243 Truma combi 4E/6E boiler...................... 116 Truma Combi 4E/6E boiler troubleshooting...................................... 121 Truma Combi boiler roubleshooting........ 115 Truma combination boiler....................... 102 Truma CP Plus digital timer control......... 103 TV antenna............................................. 213 TV Brackets............................................ 215 TV inlet................................................... 212 Typical appliance consumption figures..... 70 Typical gas schematic drawing................. 60 Tyre pressures.......................................... 23 Tyres........................................................ 22 V Vehicle identification number.................... 37 Ventilation................................................. 37 250 Water system........................................... 50 Water tanks.............................................. 51 Wild camping........................................... 17 Window blinds........................................ 196 Windows................................................ 194 Winterisation........................................... 230 Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet...................... 69 USE F UL INF ORMAT ION All Swift Group models have been certified by the NCC for compliance with stringent European Standards, British Legislation and industry SET Codes of Practice specifically relating to health and safety issues. The approval process covers the testing and inspection of critical areas of the product from fire safety, weights and dimensions, to gas, electrics and ventilation. Every motorhome carries the “NCC Approved Motorhome” badge. The NCC also conduct unannounced inspections at the Swift factory to ensure continued compliance. NCC Approval gives you peace of mind that your motorhome is legal and safe. All Swift Group motorhomes are European Whole Vehicle Type Approved. This is your assurance that these motorhomes meet all European regulations, and have been constructed and conform to approved safety, environmental and manufacturing control standards. 251
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement